Home

CX-Supervisor User Manual

1. Makes smooth creamy Insh style coffee Recipe Ingredients Ingredient Name Editable colfee ugar water cream whiskey 100 Add Ingredient Modify Ingredient Delete Ingredient The selected recipe can be redefined as described in chapter 10 Creating a New Recipe The Modify Ingredient and Delete Ingredient pushbuttons on this dialog respectively allow the highlighted ingredient to be modified or deleted following confirmation Once all the information has been provided for the updated recipe clicking the OK pushbutton saves the recipe details whilst the Cancel pushbutton aborts this modify operation Release 3 0 Page 185 CHAPTER 10 Recipes OMRON Copying an Existing Recipe Definition Open the Recipe Editor dialog as described in chapter 10 Viewing Recipes in the Recipe Editor To copy an existing recipe highlight the recipe from the recipe list and then type lt Ctrl gt C This creates a copy of the recipe definition on the clipboard To paste the recipe definition back in to the current project type lt Ctrl gt V The cut copy and paste operations in the Edit menu may also be used The Recipe Editor ensures the name of the recipe is unique by appending a number to the name For example if the original recipe name was Recipe the name of the pasted recipe is Recipel All other properties of the pasted recipe remain the same as the original recipe definition It is
2. cceccccccssceceeeeeeeseeeeaeeeaeeeseeeaeeeneeeaees 180 Creating a NEW RECIPE sciiesccaeestcieiecd ener aan a yt eened ade teehee a een 181 Updating an Existing Recipe c8 tecniectn cde ccvesestasedit eaeiekesnalctcemaccumne mueseceuecems 184 Copying an Existing Recipe Definition ccc cccccceececeeeeceeeeseeeeaeeeeseeeeseeeeaes 186 Deleting an EXiSUnG RECIPE micie Nai iw eater a lay 186 Recipe Security Levels sist ca hus ssa s cosh cath atchuendinnbineaualioonzonln cs eateeincoeehiieats 186 HMMAG RECIPES nar ea n Dade nleodtde ie n e Uatunt nity aon vacances 187 Using Recipes in Runtime seein Sects cancel cians ernaeweind devas worea deanery 188 Chapter 11 Data LOSSING tt ecceessscccccccecccceeccccssssseees LIS VV ALIS Data Logging ceciren esse sceslac raters E E 193 eG EONO Freeride erased a a tito needa a 193 Data LOGGING al TRUNMIMN Cia celiois ie doliitd cannons cnoited detente wiatoldd come lena cece o aa ea 198 Data Log View Component V2 0 and V1 8 cccccecccseeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeaaeeees 202 Remote Data Log Viewer wactioncnueteanci tonsa euth tone wubloreauchines nc hn caubtinns Net veneaat 205 Data Og EXPO aCe sesccct c5 5 ctcseca stn a e Sra a a 205 Data LOJN ens a a mace E iE 208 Chapter 12 Databases ssssceccossseeccsssseeccsseesossscesossseessssseessssee 2 OVOVICW aa E ap eia AT Ea a aE p la 211 Database Connection Editor cccccecccesceceseeceeeeceeceuseceu
3. 1 Group together points that will be configured as Always Update in contiguous PLC memory addresses 2 Group together points that will be configured as Update when On Display grouping for each page 3 Within groups from steps 1 amp 2 create sub groups for each required update rate 4 Within update rate sub groups sort and group data by data format BCD Float etc These points can be defined as 1 or more arrays Release 3 0 Page 281 CHAPTER 19 Best Practices OMRON e Use Fins event memory If your communications is using a Fins driver e g Controller Link it 1s possible to create a responsive application giving the impression of high performance by linking the SCADA to the event memory which the network updates automatically Of course reads and writes actually access the local cache very quickly although this will lag behind actual device values e Control communications Use the On Request update type to give you complete control over when the value of a point is read from the PLC or written to the PLC The InputPoint script function is used to input the value of a specified point and the OutputPoint script function is used to output the value of a specified point Points This section covers some good practices with the Points for quicker development and smoother running e Define as few points as possible Keep the Points database as slim and manageable as possible by e Using arrays where p
4. The Dataset Keep all files checkbox defaults On for complete data retention but this should be cleared to stop the Hard Disk filling up Page 286 Release 3 0 OMRON APPENDIX A Configuring a PC for remote connection APPENDIX A Configuring a PC for Remote Connection The OPC interface and CX Supervisor Communications Control use a Microsoft technology called DCOM This allows the Clients and Servers to be seamlessly Distributed over a PC network The Server should be running on the PC with direct connection to the Device or Device network However the Client or indeed multiple Clients can be run on different networked PCs and will automatically read and write data over the PC network To do this the PC running the Server must be correctly configured If necessary refer to your OPC server documentation For full details of DCOM configuration and security issues see your Microsoft documentation The following is a quick guide Note Although DCOM connections can be achieved using Windows 98 and ME they are more difficult to configure and offer less functionality For best results always use Windows NT or Windows 2000 Configuring a Client PC running Windows XP Service Pack 2 Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a communications Firewall to protect your computer from malicious communications By default this firewall is turned on and so will block all OPC and DCOM communications es roe To allow OPC or DCO
5. Actual CPS The number of characters per second being used on the network if this is approaching the same value as the theoretical CPS 60 or higher then network problems are likely Average Active Points Sec Average Active Elements Sec Calculated Max Points Sec Calculated Max Elements Sec This is how many points elements are being updated every second if all points are at 1 second interval the calculation would be 1 and the Average should be very close to this If you have 2 points at 0 5 seconds the calculation would be 2 If the Average and Calculation differ considerably then there is a problem with bandwidth use Release 3 0 Page 255 CHAPTER 15 Application Analysis Performance Monitor OMRON PLC Average Latency ms The average time it takes the PLC to process its own programs and any other requests of it before responding to a particular request Processing Delay ms Processing Time ms This is the time used by CX Supervisor applications if these values are too high it would indicate the processing required by your application e g scripts is too much and you need to think more about the design of your application Read Time ms Write Time ms Max Read Time ms Max Write Time ms This is the time it takes CX Supervisor to read or write a point on the PLC the lower this number the better performance you are getting If you are overloading the network this value will increase and the heartbeat in
6. Create from File C Program Files SOMAONSCH Supervis C Create Control Browse F Link F Display As leon Inserts the contents of the file as an object into your document to that you may activate it using the program which created it Type the full path of the file containing the object to be inserted ending with the full file name into the Create from File field To locate an existing file name or a different path click the Browse pushbutton to display the Browse dialog A Browse dialog similar to that used for changing an object s icon is displayed the difference being that the List Files of Type field has a single entry of All Files extension 1 2 3 1 Use the Look in field to navigate to the appropriate location Page 346 Release 3 0 OMRON APPENDIX F Obsolete Features 2 Select the file from the list offered and click the Open pushbutton to return to the Insert Object dialog 3 On return to the Insert Object dialog click the OK pushbutton to return to the current page and embed the selected object into it at the current insertion point To display the object as an icon follow the procedure detailed in the previous chapter and click the OK pushbutton to return to the current page and embed the selected object in icon form into it at the current insertion point It is often more appropriate to link to an object rather than embedding it in the current page By linking to an object rather than embedd
7. CQM1H CPU51 Toolbus 9600 CLK Page 293 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions OMRON CQM1 CPU42 Max Num of Reads per Second SYSMAC WAY 9600 Toolbus 9600 See gt How does the Operating System affect performance See gt What is the maximum limit of number of points See also Chapter 16 Best Practices Performance and Chapter 16 Best Practices Points Q How can I see if the communication network is overloaded Use CX Supervisor Performance Monitor Tool to see if the network is overloaded This tool is available in the CX Supervisor run time by right clicking and selecting Performance if security privileges allow It can be used to see how much of the available bandwidth is in use You can also see how many points are waiting to be processed and the latency of actual communications To improve responsiveness try to reduce the bandwidth used the latency and the number of active messages Note that performance begins to reduce well before 100 saturation is achieved For example it is rare to achieve more than 70 80 for a serial connection This is analogous to a motorway where cars slow down long before they are touching bumpers and might only achieve a maximum of 50 capacity 1 e each car has a car length space behind it Page 294 Release 3 0 OMRON APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions Q How does the Operating System affect performance On the same specifica
8. Changing the View Mode Project Editor 125 Changing the Viewing Mode Point Editor 37 Closing a Page Saving a Page to a Project 32 Colour Palette Graphics Editor 14 COM 350 Communications Control Properties 265 276 Communications Drive 350 Compiling and Running a Project 118 Configured Users Runtime Security 114 Configuring a Client PC under Win 98 Me Running Windows 98 333 Configuring a client PC under Win NT 2000 Running Windows NT 2000 287 288 Configuring a PC for remote connection 287 Configuring a Server PC under Win 98 Me Running Windows 98 334 Configuring a Server PC under Win NT 2000 Running Windows NT 2000 288 289 Connecting to a remote CX Supervisor application 269 Control Bar Horizontal Mirror 19 Lower Down One 18 Object Identification 17 Raise Up One 17 Rotate 18 Transparency On Off 19 Vertical Mirror 19 Control Objects Alarm Objects 59 Bar Chart 61 Bitmap 63 Linear Gauge 65 Pushbutton 67 Rotary Gauge 67 Scatter Graph 69 Slider 70 Toggle Button 71 Release 3 0 OMRON Trend Graph 74 Control Tool Bar 16 Conversation Attributes Creating Points 44 Copy Manipulating Objects 77 Create Runtime Install Disc 120 Creating a CX Supervisor Client application 272 Creating a CX Supervisor Server application 271 Creating a Page 25 Creating a PLC Connection Device Configuration 91 Creating a Point 39
9. In practical terms for serial connections consider 70 80 the limit For Ethernet packet collisions start occurring above 30 and are automatically corrected but 40 50 is the practical limit For Controller Link which has a vast bandwidth any value above 10 signals a performance issue To reduce the usage see Chapter 16 Best Practices Performance and Chapter 16 Best Practices Points Diagnostics dialog The Runtime has a communications diagnostics window This will only normally be used under guidance of Technical Support to assist diagnosing specific communication issues To view the dialog a Log in as a user with Designer privileges b Open the Point Maintenance dialog and select the PLC point to diagnose c Press Diagnostics The following screen is shown Page 322 Release 3 0 OMRON Sliderln Point Diagnostics Information Cx Server Interface Informations Total Active Points Average Active Pts Sec Calculated Peak Pts Sec Read Callbacks Reads Now Being Processed Callback Only On Change Allow Input Optimisations MSecs since last callback MSecs since first callback Minimum callback interval Masimum callback interval Average callback interval Masimum callback duration Average callback duration Data updates MSecs since last data update Data changes MSecs since last data change Comme Fail Status Cx Server Registration Type Lx Server Internal Kep Other Information
10. J acme Colour Automatic BOUSDOSL nase E S ie CeEOOSBOSDO Shadow ED ONENEN Fill Effects ampe When editing is complete select Update and Exit from the application s File menu to return to CX Supervisor Running c program Note The Update and Exit command varies from application to application If the object is an animation or sound file when activated it is played through until it ends at which point control is returned to CX Supervisor Note Ifthe application which created the object no longer be available CX Supervisor reports an error Page 348 Release 3 0 OMRON APPENDIX F Obsolete Features Converting a Package Object Certain types of object may be converted from one form to another To initiate conversion ee ore 1 Select the object on the page 2 Activate the Edit menu and select Package Object displayed as the last item on the Edit menu 3 Select Convert from the sub menu displayed Note The menu item name varies from application to application but always references the inserted object Convert El El Current Type Microsoft Excel Worksheet Object Type Cancel f Convert to Microsoft Excel Chart Microsoft Excel Worksheet Activate as I Display As Icon Result The selected Microsoft Excel Worksheet object will not be converted Release 3 0 Page 349 GLOSSARY OF TERMS CX Supervisor User Manual OMRON GLOSSARY
11. Klinkmann Omron driver 2 Ignores Read from Device option Seen to lose device values potential OPC Labs Time Monitor Fail Group inactive item active still results in a callback poe re Software V1 0a Server only not supported ae AG nial V1 0a Server only not supported Contact Siemens to Siemens Building MK8000 MP1 30 MP1 30 Could not get the Technologies Inc simplest of operations to succeed Softing OPC ae support issues reported USDATA Corp haiti 7 0 1 el Single test failed to connect Q What is the maximum limit of commands in a script There is no set limit and some applications have had many hundreds of lines However it is not practical to have too many lines and a limit of 30 lines should be considered not as a system limit but as a warning that the application is not correct Q What is the maximum limit of ingredients in a recipe There is no limit other than the PC memory Page 304 Release 3 0 OMRON APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions Q What is the maximum limit of number of entries in the Alarm Log The number of lines in the alarm log and the error log is set in the Project Runtime Settings Alarm and Event settings dialogs The maximum limit is currently 2000 Q What is the maximum limit of number of Alarms Theoretically the maximum number of alarm types that can be defined is 10 000 Q What is the maximum limit of number of serial ports supported It is th
12. Language Settings The language for user defined text can be set via the Language Settings dialog Select Runtime Settings from the Projects menu followed by Language Settings to display the Language Settings dialog Release 3 0 Page 111 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON Language Settings Language for User Defined Text Nederlands Belgie Nomnvegian Select a language from the Language for User Defined Text field Click the OK pushbutton to accept the settings or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation Point Substitution Settings The enclosing characters associated with a report can be changed via the Point Substitution Settings dialog Once set these characters must be fixed for all reports generated by the project Select Runtime Settings from the Projects menu followed by Point Substitution Settings to display the Point Substitution Settings dialog Point Substitution Settings Point Enclosing Characters Opening Characters ii Closing Characters in Cancel Supply enclosing characters in the Opening Characters field and Closing Characters field Click the OK pushbutton to accept the settings or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation Advanced Settings To open the Advanced Settings dialog select Advanced Settings from the Runtime Settings menu The dialog is displayed as follows Page 112 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects Advanced Settings Internal Communication
13. Note In this context for this dialog only lt Default gt means no language file will be loaded so the default text compiled in the executable 1 e English will be used This is the initial setting and can be useful if no Language features are being used Runtime Multilingual Features Applications supporting more than one language can be very useful for example for general use in countries with more than one national language or where a plant has a specific mix of personnel This can also prove valuable for international installations when the developers and on site maintenance engineers native language is different to the end customers The system can be switched to a comfortable language during work and easily switched back to the customer s requirement prior to hand over All translations for all system text like dialogs menus and errors etc are installed automatically User defined text entered at development time like button captions static text like Value graph titles etc can be exported to a text file for easy translation into as many additional languages as required At runtime the user can then change languages dynamically 1 e without having to exit and restart the application The translated system text and user defined text is automatically loaded and displayed Page 240 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 14 Multilingual Features Changing language at Runtime The user if permitted by security settings
14. PLC Status Information PLC Mame LSO1H FPLC Type LS1H CPU Type LPUB Error Status Mo Errors PLE Communication Status J Open PLC PLE Mode 6 Stop Debug Monitor Run Upload Program Download Program Communication Settings Description Point Communication Attributes Enabled Points Disabled Points Bitod Bit Enabl Pitt rable Bitlis Disable lnputOo A lant Filter Options f All Points Input Points Output Points Input Output Points Selection of the Communication Settings option displays the Communication Settings dialog showing the current settings for the PLC Release 3 0 Page 95 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON PLC Communications Settings gt lt Communication Settings Say COM Baud Rate JOU Data Bits f Stop Bits 2 Parity Network Port It is possible to configure default settings for the runtime via the PLC Runtime Default Settings fields in the Setup PLCs dialog Communications to the PLC can be enabled on startup via the Open PLC option Fins Gateway Option Page 96 CX Supervisor normally uses the Omron CX Server Communications software for both device and point configuration and also for runtime communications reading and writing values from a PLC Another Omron product Fins Gateway 2003 also provides communications drivers that can be used for interfacing to Omron devices
15. Recipe Ingredients Ingredient Hame Linked to Point Quantity E pression Editable Add Ingredient Migditin gredient Peletelrngedient Once all the information has been provided for the new recipe selecting the OK pushbutton adds the new recipe definition to the project whilst the Cancel pushbutton aborts this add operation Note The short cut keyboard combinations for Cut Copy and Paste operations are valid within the Add Recipe dialog Highlight part or all of a field and type lt Ctrl gt X to cut the text or lt Ctrl gt C to copy the text insert the cursor at the desired field and type lt Ctrl gt V to paste the text Since the cut and copy operations store the information in the Windows Clipboard they may be pasted to another dialog or application Release 3 0 Page 181 CHAPTER 10 Recipes OMRON Recipe Configuration Attributes The name of the recipe is entered in the Recipe Name field The recipe name can be constructed using any alphanumeric characters This field is visible from the Recipe Editor dialog A recipe description may be inserted in the Description field To start a new line press lt Ctrl gt lt Return gt Any characters are valid and up to 255 characters may be entered in the text field This field is also visible from the Recipe Editor dialog Recipe Ingredients The recipe ingredients are added using the Add Ingredient pushbutton in the Add Recipe dialog to display the Add Ingredi
16. State 1 Colour IY Apply changes to object frame test colour W Apply changes to abject background fill colour To specify a change in an object s colour enter a Boolean expression in the Digital Expression field Non Boolean expressions may be entered as long as the result is TRUE or FALSE The colours are specified in the Colour Attributes fields for Boolean State 0 and Boolean State 1 To apply the change to the frame of the object select the Apply colour changes to object frame setting To apply the change to the object background select the Apply colour changes to object background setting Release 3 0 Page 167 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON On selection of a colour in the Colour Change Digital dialog the Colour Palette dialog is displayed The Colour Palette dialog is described in chapter 9 Common Colour Palette To abort the Colour Change Digital edit click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed Enable Disable Objects can be enabled or disabled This is achieved using the Enable Disable dialog To access the Enable Disable dialog to add an action select Enable Disable from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Enable Disabl
17. There is no theoretical limit to the number of recipes except limits imposed by the size of memory of the PC In practice no more than 10 000 should be created on a standard PC configuration Page 314 Release 3 0 OMRON APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions Q What is the maximum limit of number of event error log entries The maximum number of entries in the event error log is 500 Q What is the maximum limit of number of Users The maximum number of Users that can be configured is 500 Q Why do I get the message Failed To Install MSVCRT DLL Access Denied error message During installation the following error can occur Failed to install MSVCRT DLL Access Denied This file is locked by the system so must be configured to install on the next reboot However the current user priviledges prevent access to the system registry to do this This problem has only been seen on Windows NT To correct this problem and allow full installation you must log on to your computer with administrator rights Either log onto your network as the network Administrator or log on to your local domain as Administrator or user with local administrator privileges See your Systems Administrator for further details Q Why do get the message ODBC DriverError The query is not updateable because it contains no searchable columns to use as a hopeful key When attempting to pass information to an Excel spreadsheet it the following ODB
18. This is the name of the selected communications control The default name for the first control is OMRONCXICCommunicationsControl For each additional control added the number increments by one Project File This is the name of the current Project file that stores the setup of the items If no name is shown or it is incorrect click the Info button and select Create or Open as appropriate Clicking the Open button opens the Open Project dialog from where you can navigate to the project file you wish to open If you want to create a new file click the Create option to open the Create Project dialog In the Create Project dialog navigate to the directory in which you want to create your new file and enter your File Name Select the appropriate file type Save as type 1 e File Name msc and click the Save button Note that a Project File name can not be entered from the keyboard files names can only be entered by using the Create or Open options Device Select the Device containing the required item from the dropdown list To Add Modify or Delete a Device click the Info button Items The Items within the selected Device are listed The Item Attributes dialog can be used to add or edit the items To Add Modify or Delete an Item click the Info button Selecting the Add or Modify option will open the Items Attributes window from where the item details can be added or updated Array Size Enter the number of array elements i
19. x OLE Access Cancel Read tite P Nor Volatile Validate Point is Within Specified Range In order to access a CX Supervisor point value via OLE2 Automation it must be given OLE Read or OLE Write access The scope of the access can be defined by checking the appropriate setting in the OLE Access The point value which is stored to disk may be Volatile or Non volatile by selecting or deselecting the Non Volatile check box A Non volatile point ensures the preservation of the point s value at regular intervals If power is lost or CX Supervisor is shut down for any reason then when the application is restarted the point is initialised to the last saved value These values are saved in a project file with NVP extension To prevent unexpected operation this file is automatically deleted if further point changes are made in the Developer In this case points revert to their Default value Select the Validate Point is Within Specified Range check box This option is only available for Input or I O points of type Integer or Real When checked an error message is displayed in the error log if the data passed to CX Supervisor is outside of the specified Minimum and Maximum range Click the OK pushbutton to accept the advanced settings or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation Amending an Existing Point To modify an existing point highlight the point from the points list and click the Modify Point button from
20. Advanced Point Setting 44 Conversion Attributes 44 Data Transfer Actions Update 44 General Attributes 39 I O Attributes 42 I O Types 41 I O Update Rate 42 Memory Attributes 41 PLC Attributes 43 Point Types 39 Creating a project 89 Creating and Editing Graphic Objects 57 Creating Graphics Library Graphics Library 128 Creating Editing Control Objects 59 Creating Editing Graphic Objects Arc 57 Block 57 Ellipse 57 Line 58 Polygon 58 Polyline 58 Rectangle 58 Round Rectangles 58 Text 59 Customising 106 Customising CX Supervisor 14 17 Cut Manipulating Objects 77 CX Server 351 Error Codes 328 CX Supervisor customising 14 17 106 CX Supervisor Preferences 32 D Data Transfer Actions Creating Points 44 Date Points Point Import 51 DBCS 238 245 352 Release 3 0 INDEX CX Supervisor User Manual DCOM Configuring 287 Definition 352 DDE 335 352 Server application 355 Default language 240 Defining Properties of a Page 26 Delete Manipulating objects 77 Deleting an Existing Point 46 Design application 278 Device Configuration 90 Display Points Point Import 52 Distributed Server 270 DLL 352 Double Byte Character Set See DBCS Drop and Drag of Points Point Editor 37 Dynamic Data Exchange See DDE Dynamic Link Library See DLL E Editing Objects 56 Re shaping 56 Re sizing 56 Woz
21. File DSN tab Any Data Source Names already defined will be listed Page 216 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 12 Databases gt Click on Add to create a new Data Source Name file This will invoke the Create New Data Source dialog box with a list of available drivers only drivers that are installed on your machine will be shown Choose the driver to access the data source and select Next gt You will then be prompted to name your Data Source Type a suitable name and select Next gt Verify the information shown and select Finish to complete this part of the operation Depending on the driver selected you may be prompted for details of the database you wish to connect to A new DSN file will now exist which can be used by CX Supervisor to Create a Connection Creating a Read Write connection to an Excel file Connections to Excel files may result in the error Operation must use an updateable query This is because the Provider installed with ADO version 2 0 is read only by default hence Records can not be added or amended To override this function you must manually change the Read Only property in the Connection String On the Modify Connection dialog click Advanced and set the connection property as shown in the last line below Driver Microsoft Excel Driver xls DBQ C WorkBook xls ReadOnly False Excel files can also be updated by accessing the file via the
22. InputO3 These points are also connected to SliderOut Any changes in SliderOut will be output to data location 02 z Btos continuously monitoring the PLC points at a scan rate of 1 second CX Supervisor Output points cause them to be sent to the PLC CxX Supervisor point Sliderin This point is also connected to IROOS but IROO IROO7O0 IROO 701 IROO702 and IR00703 The Input points are IROO701 IROO702 and IR00703 in the PLC A change in the state of the a circle are connected to wn is an Input point on a scan rate of 1 second NOTE PLC must be in Program or Monitor Mode for the demo to work ke pe be o ke JARE 3 4 D o A Qa a lt Page 242 IROOS in the PLC The gauge bar and St01 BitO2 og BtO3 Disse punkter Bit01 BitO2 und BOS Diese Punkte er forbundet til IR00700 InputO1 InputO2 og InputO3 Disse punkter er ogs forbundet til SliderOut Alle ndringer i SliderOut vil blive sendt til data lokation Kontinuerlig monitering af PLC punkter med 1 sekunds interval for at sende dem til PLC en CX Supervisor point Sliderin Dette punkt er ogs forbundet til IROOS men IROO7OO IROO701 IROO702 and IROO7O3 Input punkterne er IROO 701 IROO 02 og IROO703 i PLC en En ndring i status pa IROOS i PLC en Maleren s jlen og cirklen er forbundet til er et Input punkt med opdateringsinterval p
23. OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects By default there are four previously defined users listed in the Configured Users field Designer with designer level privileges Manager with manager level privileges Operator with operator level privileges and Supervisor with supervisor level privileges Web access is an additional privilege it allows the user to log on to the Standard Web Pages To add a new user 12 3 4s 1 Click the Add pushbutton The User Attributes fields and buttons become enabled and the contents of all fields are cleared ready for a new user to be added 2 Type the full name of the new user in the Full Name field 3 Type a login name in the Login Name field 4 Type a user password in the Password field The password must be at least four characters in length 5 Select a level of privilege from the Security Level drop down list 6 Click the Store pushbutton to add the new user to the Configured Users list or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation To modify an existing user D sod Sic l Select a user from the Configured Users list and click the Modify pushbutton The User Attributes fields and buttons become enabled with the contents of all the fields filled with the attributes of the selected user 2 Amend the full name login name password and level of privilege in the same way as adding a new user 3 Click the Store pushbutton to update the user in the Configured Users list or the Ca
24. Some users may already have this software installed on their computers and may prefer to use it In addition a suitable Fins Gateway 2003 installer is supplied on the CX Supervisor CD The Setup Devices dialog shown below contains the option for configuring the system to use Fins Gateway instead of CX Server If the Use Fins Gateway 2003 option is set and Fins Gateway 2003 is present on a computer then the Fins Gateway drivers will automatically be used for runtime communication to CS CJ devices via Ethernet and Controller Link CX Server will still be used for any non CS CJ devices and for any devices that don t use either Ethernet or Controller Link CX Server is always used for configuring the point data Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects Setup Devices Device List Close Modify Fl Delete Runtime Default Settings for Device Access Security Level all Users z W Open Device x lle Note This is an advanced option For most applications communications via the standard Omron CX Server communications drivers is ideal but in some cases performance may be better or more consistent using the Omron Fins Gateway 2003 drivers This option allows the user to choose between the two sets of drivers For further information about Fins Gateway including instructions on configuring Fins Gateway refer to the online Help system that is installed with Fins Gateway Fins Gateway is provide
25. The On Interval option specifies the frequency that communications occur with the PLC When this option is selected an list box appears allowing the frequency to be entered I O Attributes The I O Attributes option specifies the external source or destination for the point This option is not available to Memory Resident points O Attributes PLC C OPC Other Setup Page 42 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 3 Points The external source is defined by selecting the appropriate V O Attributes setting Further configuration of the external source can be applied by clicking the Setup pushbutton On clicking the Setup pushbutton for a PLC external source the PLC Attributes dialog is displayed PLC Attributes Boolean PLC Attributes PLC Name ee Cancel PLC Type None gt Add PLE Data Location Amay Size i Data Type Modifier I Communications Enabled Data Transter Actions When Opening a PLC Write Value To PLC C Read Value From PLC C No Data Transfer Conversion Attributes onli onversion Factor alisin mi ei Oe F Mianmmum A ENE 5999 The point type associated with the PLC Connection attributes is shown in the title bar The required PLC can be selected from the PLC field If no PLCs exist in the PLC field then one must be added This is achieved by clicking the Add PLC pushbutton and configuring one A point cannot be configured to have a PLC connection unless all the PLC
26. around the objects in the reverse order To select items in a specific tab order use the lt Tab gt key to move around the page items in a specific order using the move to top feature Start at object number 1 and end with the last object 1 e if obj1 obj2 and obj3 then use move to top on obj1 first followed by obj2 and then by obj3 this gives the tab order obj1 obj2 obj3 Changing Between Pages The lt Ctrl gt lt Tab gt key can be used to change between pages Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects Simulating a Left Mouse Button Click Objects that have scripts attached such as a pushbutton or objects that perform a particular action when clicked such as toggle buttons can be executed by using the lt Enter gt key Slider Operation When a slider object is selected the plus and minus keys can be used to increment or decrement its value respectively This also applies to the sliders on trend graphs Obtaining the Runtime Floating Menu To display the Runtime Floating menu use either the lt Shift gt lt F10 gt key combination or use the Windows right mouse button key which is next to the lt Ctrl gt key on the right hand side of the keyboard Standard Windows Keys Some standard Windows key combinations are as follows lt Alt gt lt gt hyphen Used to access the child window control box at the top left hand side of the dialog lt Alt gt lt Spacebar gt Used to access the
27. correctly read Remember to disconnect before running if the provider doesn t support multiuser connections like the Excel provider Note that every database function returns an error code to confirm if the operation was successful Always assign this to a temporary point and after the call to check the value When database errors occur try calling DBGetLastError This will give a textual description of the problem As these errors are standard there is often information about the cause of these errors available on the Internet just search for the exact text of the error How to create steps to reproduce The first step in troubleshooting is creating steps to reproduce the problem Not only does this help understand the problem but is a requirement so that your potential fixes can be tested with confidence Computers and software are guaranteed to perform the same way with the given data and so there are always steps to reproduce although sometimes these can be difficult to find It can be timing dependant you have to do this exactly 1 342 seconds later or just very difficult to see a pattern However in most cases problems are quite repeatable Once a problem can be reproduced the next step is to refine the steps to determine the exact cause The process should be repeated attempting to leave out one step at a time to confirm if that step is required Where scripts are executed each line should be removed to determine just th
28. field property types For this reason the Automatically read on open checkbox is disabled when this type is applied When creating configurations to add new records you will need to create a Add association for every field required to create a valid record 1 e primary keys non null values etc need to be catered for See DBAddNew for more details Access field by index When checked a numeric index is used to identify a particular field instead of its name This is useful if you want to configure generic field associations Automatically read on open When checked the data is transferred from the Recordset field to the associated point when the Recordset is opened Page 222 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 12 Databases Field Paging You can work with a single record at a time by associating points with the required fields and process the data one record at a time However if the point specified is an Array point the whole array will be processed i e multiple fields will be read written or added This concept is called Paging Paging is supported by the Database script functions enabling you to manipulate and navigate the database a page at a time CX Supervisor determines the page size by using the number of elements in the Array point used in Field Associations i e if an array point with 10 elements is used then a page size of 10 will be used In order for paging to work sensibly you should ensure that all
29. name and value at the cursor Selected trace has a gt before the name Clicking on other trace details selects other traces Scale shows Minimum value Maximum value and scale label of selected trace with intermediate scales A cursor allows data to be read off the graph Pressing Ctrl and cursor keys allows moving between logged data A Zoom In and Zoom Out facility Time and Range plus X amp Y axis scrolling are available Previous a and Next buttons load data files for the previous and next time period The Refresh button reloads the file from disk A Live option is used to show the latest data and keep it up to date Data can be exported to CSV files or to text The current screen can be printed or print previewed in colour gt gt gt gt gt The traces shown using trace selection dialog as shown initially can be changed using the Select item facility Remote Data Log Viewer Data log files are not restricted to a machine that has CX Supervisor installed on it CX Supervisor is supplied with a Data Log Viewer application that enables all the View and Export facilities with the exception of Live updates to be carried out on dlv files that have been transferred to a stand alone machine Data Log Export Facilities Exporting Data via the Export Dialog All the export facilities described in the ExportLog function can be carried out from the E
30. od quantity as ExtendedPrice from order details as od AS rsDetails RELATE orderid TO orderid Page 232 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 12 Databases SUM rsDetails ExtendedPrice AS OrderTotal AS rsOrders COMPUTE sxrsOrders SUM rsOrders OrderTotal AS CustTotal ANY rsOrders contactname AS Contact BY customerid Note The inner SHAPE clause in this example is identical to the statement used in the Hierarchy with Aggregate example Multiple Groupings example SHAPE SHAPE select customers od unitprice od quantity as ExtendedPrice from customers inner join orders on customers customerid orders customerid inner join order details as od on orders orderid od orderid AS rsDetail COMPUTE ANY rsDetail contactname AS Contact ANY rsDetail region AS Region SUM rsDetail ExtendedPrice AS CustTotal rsDetail BY customerid AS rsCustSummary COMPUTE rsCustSummary BY Region Grand Total example SHAPE SHAPE select customers od unitprice od quantity as ExtendedPrice from customers inner join orders on customers customerid orders customerid inner join order details as od on orders orderid od orderid AS rsDetail COMPUTE ANY rsDetail contactname AS Contact SUM rsDetail ExtendedPrice AS CustTotal rsDetail BY customerid AS rsCustSummary COMPUTE SUM rsCustSummary CustTotal As GrandTotal rsCustSummary Release 3 0 Page 233 CHAPTER 12 Databases OMRON Note The missing BY cla
31. to project on disk without project Release 3 0 Page 51 CHAPTER 3 Points OMRON name eS 2 147 483 647 Number Moo alarm entries currently spooled awaiting printing to page printer Version Text Version number of CX Supervisor Runtime program Display Points The following table describes system points for use with the display mode ScreenSizeX 0 2 147 483 647 Screen width ScreenSizeY 0 2 147 483 647 Screen height Mouse Points The following table describes system points for use in mouse movement and operation They are updated on a left button click Alarm Points The following table describes system points for use with CX Supervisor alarms C sompo Pomeupe Pomrarge orae MediumAlarms 0 2 147 483 647 Number of active medium priority alarms LowAlarms 0 2 147 483 647 Number of active low priority alarms SLowestAlarms 0 2 147 483 647 Number of active lowest priority alarms 0 2 147 483 647 Number of alarms currently unacknowledged Alarms Error Logger Points The following table describes system points for use with CX Supervisor errors Page 52 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 3 Points HighErrors 0 2 147 483 647 Number of high priority errors logged 0 2 147 483 647 Number of low priority errors logged MediumErrors 0 2 147 483 647 Number of medium priority errors logged PLC Communications Points The following table describes system points for
32. 128 Print Graphics Library See also Page Preview page Page Print page Page Setup page for printing Sharing 132 View 128 Line Creating Editing Graphic Objects 58 Line Style Palette Graphics Editor 15 Linear Gauge Control Objects 65 Linking Pages in a Project Project Editor 125 Lower Down One Control Bar 18 Release 3 0 INDEX CX Supervisor User Manual M Manipulating object Alignment 79 Alignment Toolbox 79 Applying Tooltips 82 Delete 77 Floating Menu 82 Group 78 Mirror Image 78 Orientation 78 Paste 77 Raise Lower 79 Transparency 78 Undo 78 Zoom 80 Manipulating objects 76 Manipulating Objects Copy 77 Cut 77 Move 77 Select 76 Memory Attributes Creating Points 41 Menu Option Access Levels Runtime Security 116 Microsoft Word for Windows 353 Mirror Image Manipulating objects 78 Modify Graphics Library Graphics Library 129 Modifying a PLC Connection Device Configuration 93 Mouse Points Point Import 52 Move Manipulating Objects 77 Multiple Selection Project Editor 126 N Navigating Projects with the Workspace 123 O Object About 354 ActiveX Objects 83 Page 361 INDEX CX Supervisor User Manual Attributes 130 Control object 351 Control objects 13 59 76 Edit definition of an object 131 Embedded objects 13 Grab handles 56 59 Graphic objects 13 5
33. 289 Configurating a Server PC running Windows NT or 2000 ccccceece sees eens 289 Appendix B Frequently asked questions ccccsccsssrseee ZIL Appendix C Troubleshooting cccccccsssssssssssscccccsssessees SLU Appendix D CX Server error COdES cccssssscccccecccseees ILO Appendix E Using with the Omron DyaloX 000 331 Appendix F Obsolete Features ccccccccccsssssssscccceeseesees QOD Release 3 0 Page 11 CX Supervisor User Manual OMRON Page 12 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 1 Graphics Editor CHAPTER 1 Graphics Editor This chapter describes the Graphics Editor and the various tools and controls available It also provides instructions for using these tools and controls and is supported with suitable screen displays About the Graphics Editor The Graphics Editor enables a variety of objects to be created on a page Supported objects are Graphical objects Control objects ActiveX objects Graphical objects are geometric shapes for example ellipses and polygons but also include Text objects Control objects allow information to be displayed and entered in clear way through the use of Wizards Examples of control objects include Pushbuttons and Trend Graphs ActiveX objects or controls are from sources external to CX Supervisor Refer to chapter 4 Objects for further information regarding control objects and
34. 53 54 Print page Page Setup page for printing Project Real 36 39 40 50 171 174 175 176 355 About 88 355 Runtime maintenance 48 Adding pages to a project 125 Script Editor 157 Advanced settings 112 Search 121 122 Alarm settings 107 Sort 37 Alarm Message printer settings 108 String 356 Alias definitions 155 System 157 Alias definitions 121 Text 36 41 50 172 173 356 Amending a Project 89 Variable 355 Animations 148 Polygon Creating Editing Graphic Objects 58 Compiling a project 118 Polyline Creating Editing Graphic Objects 58 Create runtime installation 120 Print Creating a new project 89 Access 30 Creating a project 89 Advanced options 29 31 Deleting pages from a project 125 Alarm Message settings 108 Editor Project See Project Editor Alarms 145 Event Error messages 109 Collate copies 31 Exit privilege 117 Copies number of 31 Find points 121 122 Landscape orientation 29 Font default button 103 Number of copies 31 Information 120 126 Page preview 29 30 Language settings 111 Page print 30 31 Linking pages in a project 125 Paper size 29 Menu option access levels 117 Paper source 29 Modify a project 89 Portrait orientation 29 Non volatile point rate settings 106 Range 31 Non volatile rate 106 Specific printer 29 Opening a project 90 Print Preview Point substitution settings 112 Printing a Page 29 Printing 90 Print
35. 7 bits allows definitions for only 127 characters and does not include any accented characters The representation of an image stored in a computer s memory Each picture element pixel is represented by bits stored in the memory In CX Supervisor a bitmap image can be installed as a single object A type of point where the value of the point can be one of two states Essentially the two states are 0 and 1 but these states can be assigned a meaningful designation Examples are State Example Example Example Example 0 OFF FALSE OUT CLOSED l ON TRUE IN OPEN See also AND NOT and OR COM is a Microsoft technology that allows components used to interact The relevant communications management system for OMRON PLCs in conjunction with Microsoft Windows providing facilities for other SYSMAC software to maintain PLC device and address information and to communicate with OMRON PLCs and their supported network types Release 3 0 OMRON Constant Control Object CX Server Database connection Database Connection Level Database Recordset Database Schema Database Server Query Database SQL Query Release 3 0 GLOSSARY OF TERMS CX Supervisor User Manual Within CX Supervisor a constant is a point within the script language that takes only one specific value In CX Supervisor a control object is applied in the development environment and can be a pushbu
36. All objects can be selected by clicking Select All from the Edit menu Move To move an object or a number of objects select them and click and hold the left mouse button within the selection the object s can now be dragged to their new location Cut Where objects are to be moved between pages it is often useful to cut them without having to insert a new object CX Supervisor has the ability to cut and paste objects Objects which are cut and pasted retain the properties assigned to them for example animation or alarms ab To cut an object from the current page select it and click the Cut button on the toolbar The object is removed from the page and is held on the clipboard until a new object is cut or copied Copy ES An object which is to appear on a number of pages can be copied from an original To copy an object select it then click the Copy button on the toolbar A copy of the object is held on the clipboard overwriting the previously copied or cut object Paste To paste an object which has been cut or copied to the clipboard click the Paste button on the toolbar The object currently on the clipboard is pasted either over the original if the object is to remain on the same page or positioned in a new page Objects can then be re positioned by selecting and dragging using the mouse Delete To delete an object or objects select them and press the lt Delete gt key on the keyboard Release 3 0 P
37. CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON e7 Select the List button to view details as a list Select the Details button to view details as a list including page name page path project status runtime display and load status information The details can be sorted in ascending order by clicking once or in descending order by clicking twice in the appropriate field Viewing Project Details To open the Project Details dialog and view the project name and description click on the Edit Details About Project button on the Project Editor toolbar Multiple Selection Standard multiple selection facilities can be used within the Project Editor To select an additional line hold the control key down while clicking to select all lines between the anchor line the last line clicked on and another line hold the lt Shift gt key down while clicking The buttons can then be used to apply to all the selected lines at the same time Printing from the Project Editor Print Setup The Project Editor can be printed in the same way pages can Before printing ensure that the printer has been set up correctly To check the printer settings refer to chapter 2 Pages Print Preview To preview the page before printing ensure that the Project Editor dialog is displayed and currently selected and then select Print Preview from the File menu Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print Preview display Printing S To print the contents of the
38. CX Supervisor via DDEPoke 1 Example sending array values from Microsoft Excel to CX Supervisor Sub SendArrayValues Dim chan As Integer chan DDEInitiate SCS Point If chan lt gt 0 Then Send a row of data to an array point named Arrayl1 DDEPoke chan Arrayl Range Cells 1 1 Cells 1 3 Send a column of data to an array point named Array2 DDEPoke chan Array2 Range Cells 2 1 Cells 4 1 Send individual array element values to Array3 The or format can be used to delimit the array index DDEPoke chan Array3 0 Cells 1 1 DDEPoke chan Array3 1 Cells 1 2 DDEPoke chan Array3 2 Cells 1 3 End If End Sub Requesting Arrays from CX Supervisor via DDERequest Requesting arrays from CX Supervisor and storing them in Microsoft Excel is a little more complicated than sending in that both CX Supervisor and Microsoft Excel need to know 1f the array is to be stored in rows or columns CX Supervisor is informed of the row col requirement by specifying either row or column after the array points name The default is row if nothing is specified The following are all valid examples of specifying names for Arrayl in a DDERequest Arrayl Arrayl Row Arrayi r Valid ways to specify a row Arrayl Column Arrayl col Array1l1 C Valid ways to specify a column Microsoft Excel i
39. CX Supervisor Performance monitor The CX Supervisor Performance Monitor tool displays application and communication information and can be very helpful in diagnosing performance problems It is launched by right clicking the runtime and selecting Performance if security privileges permit There are statistics and a performance trend for each PLC each network the CPU time and a Summary and Overview page Overview Shows an overview of the headline performance of all other components Summary Provides a Summary view totalising and averaging property values from all PLCs on all networks CPU Time Lists specific CPU and process information including processing times for all scripts and all callbacks Network Totalises properties for all PLCs on each network PLC The PLC Average Latency ms field shows the physical delay of the network and PLC response time Depending on the PLC setup and network this should be 9 30ms If this is drastically higher it could be the cause of performance problems Try some of the following steps to reduce it The PLC Average Latency ms field shows the physical delay of the network and PLC response time Depending on the PLC setup and network this should be 9 30ms If this is drastically higher it could be the cause of performance problems Try some of the following steps to reduce it Release 3 0 Test on a dedicated network or if not possible with other nodes disabled This
40. Cut the old points from the Point Editor before pasting Note All pasted points will pasted into the group on view Runtime Point Maintenance Page 48 It is possible to reconfigure points at runtime via the right mouse button floating menu option Points Maintenance The Point Maintenance dialog is displayed Point Maintenance Point Marne Filter Options All Point Values T ext M Boolean M Integer T Continuous Monitoring I Real Get Value Servae If Text Diagnostics Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 3 Points To monitor and change the value of a point in runtime select a point from the Point Name field The Filter Options field and settings refines the points listed in the Point Name field Select the Get Value pushbutton to retrieve the current value of the selected point Specify a new point value in the Point Value Text field and click the Set Value pushbutton The Diagnostics button shows details including communications statistics useful for diagnosing communication problems Note this button is only available when a user with Designer privileges is logged in Select the Close pushbutton to complete the operation Optimisation of PLC Communications PLC communication speeds can be increased by creating array points which contain several elements of the same type rather than creating a large number of individual points For instance the time taken to update an array point containing 50 elements ar
41. Delete unused points After a development phase and prior to deployment delete any unused points These are listed in the Point Editor under the group lt Unused Points gt Drawing This section covers some good practices when drawing the screens These can greatly speed up application development and help produce a professional looking system Release 3 0 Page 283 CHAPTER 19 Best Practices OMRON e Start new pages with Snap to Grid During the creative phase of any page this helps ensure objects are automatically aligned and sized saving time tidying up later e Use cursor keys for fine adjustments The cursor keys move selected objects by 1 pixel or snaps to grid if lt Ctrl gt held and vice versa when Snap to grid is active This is a lot easier than using the mouse e Group objects To make Workspace navigation of objects easy reduce the number of top level objects by collecting objects together into Groups Grouped objects can be nested on other groups in a natural hierarchy e g a machine has several panels that have keypads that have buttons e Create object libraries Keep a common look and feel between pages and speed up development by creating libraries of commonly used objects e g displays or buttons These can also be reused in later projects e Use Copy and Paste Making good use of Copy and Paste to duplicate similar objects can reduce development time e Use Alignment functions Cr
42. Display Points 52 Error Logging Points 52 Internal Points 51 Mouse Points 52 PLC Communication Points 53 Security Points 53 Time Points 50 Point Attributes General Attributes 40 Point Attributes Creating Points 40 Point Editor 35 37 35 37 35 37 About 35 Access 35 Changing the Viewing Mode 37 Create point 37 45 Delete point 46 Dragging from 37 38 Drop and Drag 37 Filtering Points via Group 36 Filtering Points via Point Type 36 Modify point 45 Sorting Points in the View 36 Sorting Points View by I O Type 36 Summary of Point Information 37 View 35 37 35 37 35 37 Point Types Creating Points 39 Points About 35 355 Alias definitions 121 155 Animation 146 154 157 Release 3 0 OMRON INDEX CX Supervisor User Manual Boolean 36 39 40 50 167 170 171 173 350 Printing Constant 351 Printing a Page 30 Editor Point 35 37 35 37 35 37 Printing Printing Points 53 54 Find 121 122 Printing Printing from Project Editor 126 Groups 36 39 50 Printing a Project 90 I O type 353 Printing from Project Editor Information 37 Print Preview 126 Integer 36 39 40 50 171 174 175 176 353 Print Setup 126 Maintenance 48 Printing 126 Non volatile points 354 Printing Points Non volatile rate 106 Print Preview 53 Point Editor 35 37 35 37 35 37 Print Setup 53 Print points See also Page Preview page Page Printing
43. Features ccccccceecceecceeeceeecceeccesceeeeseesaeesaeesaeeseeees 240 Translating User Defined Text with the Translation TOol cccccceceeeeeeeees 242 Translating User Defined Text Manually ccccccccsecceseeeeeeeeseeeeseeesaeeeeaeees 243 Configuring Windows for Language Support cccccceececeeeeseeeeaeeesaeeeseeeeeeees 244 Data OG WIG WCF cagira E E da bebletonaieuna tt phates 248 Standard WV COP AG CS sree sect beers tease elec hasan a e ie acetates 248 Adding Unsupported Runtime Languages ccccccsecceeceeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeesees 248 PODUD Keyboard LAVOUL siccs csssoevs scnnscesagas save coumi sense a a a el aa sete aues ti coaae 249 Chapter 15 Application Analysis Performance Monitor 250 HL FOOUCUON asne E mssameonece wees p tate mas E 250 ADD IIGATIOMGANGIY SIS sarute ete each a e a 250 FP ChlOnmance Monl sosiego atest Suen ialola a a N 255 Chapter 16 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client 258 AN Overview ON ORC 0c hls eta eee ia ey ede eae 208 Using CX Supervisor with OPC Serve cccccccseccceeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeeeseeeeaeeeeaes 263 Using with Omron s CX Server OPC ccccccccecccseeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeaeeeeaes 268 Page 10 Release 3 0 OMRON CX Supervisor User Manual Chapter 17 Connecting to Remote Applications 269 Two Tier Client Server or Master Slave ccccccccsccceeeeese
44. It also forms the prefix for the file name A maximum of 26 characters is allowed The Period fields allow a period to be entered in Hours Days or Months and defines the period of data to be grouped into a single file For example if the Period is set to 1 month any data logged for the current month is saved to the same data file even when the system is stopped and restarted When logging spans a Month boundary the data file is closed and a new file started and given sequential file name This allows easy archiving and backup of the logged data The start of a new data file is always synchronised to a natural boundary e g for months the Ist of the month for days 24 00 hours and for hours on the hour The No Of Files to Keep entry determines the maximum number of data files that are to be kept Once the number of files kept has reached the value entered as each new file is created the oldest file is deleted For example to keep process data for 2 years you could keep 24 files of 1 month period The file names are generated automatically based on the Data Set name plus a suffix which is incremented by one as each new file is generated If the Keep all Files option is checked the data files management is disabled and no files will be deleted The Start Logging on Application Startup checkbox controls the logging of the Data Set When selected all the Items in the Data Set start logging when the system is started and stop logging
45. PLC Memory Card components Refer to the CX Server Reference Manual for further information on CX Server components On completion click the OK pushbutton to accept changes or the Cancel pushbutton to abort Exit Level An additional security measure can be applied by selecting Exit Level from the Runtime Security menu The Exit Level dialog is displayed as follows Exit Level Security Settings Required Level for Exit The dialog allows a specific privilege to be applied to exiting the runtime application Select a user privilege from the drop down list and click the OK pushbutton to confirm the setting or the Cancel pushbutton to abort Release 3 0 Page 117 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON Compiling and Running a Project When a project is running it cannot be edited CX Supervisor runs projects under the CX Supervisor runtime environment Building a Project To create the CX Supervisor runtime project click the Build button This will compile the projects and pages into a CX Supervisor runtime file sr2 Rebuild All The Rebuild All option on the Project menu causes the entire application to be re compiled Together with the Analyse Application feature this can be used to validate your project CX Supervisor checks application integrity whenever the application is compiled or run and warns that a full rebuild may be necessary When the Rebuild All operation is carried out all errors and warnings w
46. Preview Printing Points 53 Project Editor See Project Editor Print Preview Printing from Project Editor 126 Running a project 118 Print Setup Saving a project 90 Printing a Page 28 Saving a Project 90 Print Setup Printing Points 53 Saving a runtime project 119 Print Setup Printing from Project Editor 126 Screen size 107 Release 3 0 Page 363 INDEX CX Supervisor User Manual Search for points 121 122 Security 114 Startup conditions 103 105 Workspace 123 Project Editor 124 About 124 Access 123 124 Adding Pages 125 Changing View Mode 125 Linking Pages 125 Multiple Selection 126 Opening a Page 125 Printing from See also Page Preview page Page Print page Page Setup page for printing See also Page Preview page Page Print page Page Setup page for printing See also Page Preview page Page Print page Page Setup page for printing Removing Pages 125 Selecting Pages for Display 125 View 124 Viewing Project Details 126 Viewing the Contents 124 Project Information 120 Project Workspace Access 123 Alarms view 123 Project view 123 Recipe view 123 Pushbutton Inserting a pushbutton 67 Wizard See Wizard Pushbutton Control Objects 67 R Raise Up One Control Bar 17 Raise Lower Manipulating objects 79 Recipe Editor About 179 Access 123 180 Configuration attributes 182 Copying recipe definition 186 Create a
47. Printing Recipes for a typical example of the formatted output aj A summary of recipe information is available by selecting the Recipe Information button from the toolbar The Recipe Information dialog is displayed see chapter 10 Viewing Recipes in the Recipe Editor for an example Downloading a Recipe There are two ways of downloading a recipe definition in runtime The first method is to use a CX Supervisor script function attached to a graphical object on a page such as a push button The function call is DownLoadRecipe lt NameOfRecipe gt m The other way to download a recipe is to display the Recipe Viewer as described in the previous chapter Highlight the desired recipe from the recipe list and click the Download Recipe pushbutton The Download Recipe dialog is displayed as follows Page 190 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 10 Recipes Download Coffee Irish Quantity Expression Editable Ingredient Hame Cancel Modify Target The Modify Target pushbutton allows the target value for an ingredient to be modified by means of the Modify Ingredient dialog shown above An ingredient must already be selected from the list of ingredients for this recipe Any change to the target value is of a temporary nature and is not permanently changed in the recipe definition Any number of ingredients may be modified in this way before the recipe is downloaded Selecting the OK pushbutton attem
48. Project Editor select the Print button from the toolbar Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print dialog Navigating Pages using Workbook mode Open pages can be easily viewed with the page Workbook tabs shown at the bottom of the Pages area There is a tab for each page currently open and a single click shows the selected page The Workbook mode can be turned off and on from the View menu Page 126 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects Using Full Screen mode With many windows docked there may be times when all graphics objects or the screen layout of the whole application cannot be seen Selecting Full Screen from the View menu shows the Pages area using the full area of the screen The normal menu appears when the mouse is at the top of the screen or click the Close Full Screen to revert to normal editing Release 3 0 Page 127 CHAPTER 7 Graphics Library OMRON CHAPTER 7 Graphics Library This chapter describes the CX Supervisor Graphics Library The chapter includes details of how the Graphics Library may be used for storing frequently used objects for use with a number of applications Overview The Graphics Library is a repository for objects that are often used in CX Supervisor pages The Graphics Library Editor allows access to Libraries from a drop down list box Objects are stored in the Library and can be removed or copied allowing quick addition of frequently used objects to pages or whic
49. Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 1 Graphics Editor Choose fill pattern from palette The Cursor Co ordinates area provides position information for the current location of the mouse pointer as it tracks around the active page within the CX Supervisor window If an object on a page is selected the status area displays the co ordinates of the location of that object An example of the system status area is illustrated as follows The first two display panels show the current x and y co ordinates of the mouse pointer within the currently active page As the mouse pointer leaves the confines of a page and moves into the client area of the main CX Supervisor window the last recorded co ordinates are held in these panels If an object is clicked on all four panels are used by CX Supervisor to display the co ordinates of that object as follows E f EEA x y Width Height The first two panels contain the distance of the top left corner of the object from the top left of the page in pixels The second two panels show the extent of the object in pixels Text Bar An illustration of the CX Supervisor Text Bar is as follows Release 3 0 Page 21 CHAPTER 1 Graphics Editor OMRON Font Name The Font Name field contains a list of fonts which are available on the host version of Windows The list is presented in alphabetical order and only details typeface families This does not include bold or italic variants as this attr
50. Supervisor via a modem Yes you can connect from CX Supervisor via CX Server to a PLC via a modem In the PLC configuration Network Settings dialog select the Modem tab CX Server uses standard TAPI build into the OS The modem must be installed properly to be shown in the Modem list Q What is the CX Supervisor and SYSMAC SCS Tokens compatibility CX Supervisor 2 0 does not operate with old software tokens from older versions You need to purchase a version 2 0 USB Dongle Older product versions are illustrated below Page 312 Release 3 0 OMRON APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions SCS V1 0 SCS V2 0 CX CX CX CX amp V1 1 Supervis Supervisor Supervisor Supervisor or V1 0 V1 1 V1 2 V1 3 CC V1 67 CC CC V1 72 CC V1 72 CC V1 72 V1 72 Token Token Token Token Token SYSMAC SCS 1 0 SYSMAC SCS 1 1 SYSMAC SCS 2 0 A A T T S a T T E a A T T E sme e e e OO vee e E e m a A CX Supervisor V2 0 Different versions of SYSMAC SCS and CX Supervisor have used different versions of the copy protection software The Product versions listed above vertically will work with the token versions listed horizontally which have a Yes If using CCMOVE the token disk and the token being moved must all be the same version Doing it from a native DOS prompt is recommended Q What is the CX Supervisor and SYSMAC SCS Dongles compatibility CX Supervisor 2 0 does not operate with USB Dongles from version
51. The Deadband field enables a percentage limit or Deadband to be applied to the logging expression This allows the value of the expression to change within the percentage limit without being logged This is particularly useful when logging analogue values which are subject to noise Each sample is checked when the value changes for On Change sampling or every log period for On Interval against the last logged value While the value varies within the deadband the values are ignored Immediately the value exceeds the deadband limits the new value will be logged This may dramatically reduce file size and ease analysis Entering a value of 0 i e no deadband will cause every sample to be logged Page 196 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 11 Data Logging Sample Rate The sample rate options are used to determine how data will be recorded select either on change or on interval The default is interval When the On Change option is selected data will be logged only when the value actually changes This ensures all transient information is logged even if changes occur faster than maximum sample rate and also ensures periods of inactivity do not generate duplicated data The On Interval sample rate option enables the data values to be logged at regular intervals Enter the interval as a number and from the pick list select the form e g 5 Second This method guarantees the value is checked and recorded at every inter
52. Type Normal Error Data Boolean Integer Real Release 3 0 Page 201 CHAPTER 11 Data Logging OMRON Data Log Viewer Component v2 0 and v1 8 Invoking the Data Log Viewer The Data Log Viewer can be invoked by Selecting Data Log Viewer from the popup menu if privileged in the runtime From script function OpenLogView with the Data Set and Traces to show as arguments and also closed by CloseLogView script function From an external program Viewing Logged Files In CX Supervisor 3 0 the Data Log Viewer was significantly enhanced with lots of new features For systems that do not support version 3 5 of the NET Framework like Windows 2000 the old Data Log Viewer can continue to be used Data Log Viewer 2 0 Version 2 0 of Data Log Viewer looks like this 29 Data Log Viewer 5 x Fle Yew Cursors Options Help GAIUS tev x elm Ho ss Glaole 60 m Pa d A Fa Fa z Fa 11556 91 773 71 E 2 r ae f a Pa y ke P Fad aa 7 Le l l l I I l EHIN 15 56 00 000 15 55 50 000 1S 5 amp 40 000 15 57 36 134 06 February 2009 l l I l 15 54 36 1754 1200 0 1A 1756 40 000 15 57 36 134 06 February 2009 Type Time Offset _T Offset Boolean liber 10 Seconds Page 202 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 11 Data Logging New Features The basic functionality remains largely the same however the following features are new to versi
53. Users Acknowledge Latest Alarm a meee y 8 aa M PLC Data Monitor All Users v Setup Users v Display Alarm Status M P All Users v M Display All Users z M PLC Data Teaca All Users IV Display Alarm History M Language Settings all Users oi iti Z M PLC 1 0 Table all Users i v v PLC M Card v M Print Page Al Users WM Display Event Error Log AI Users Vv emory Lar All Users M PLC Errors alu Vv Print Screen All Users IV Display Recipe Viewer All Users Ee rr eS M PLC Setup All Users IV Exit Application all Users M Display Data Log Viewer All Users M Network Configuration Tool fan Users M Performance Monitor Tool all Users M Point Maintenance All Users he Cancel Cancel As well as a context sensitive floating menu for the development environment there is a floating menu for the runtime environment which is configurable in the development environment It is possible to select the operations to be on the runtime floating menu by clicking the relevant setting across the three tabs General Utilities and Communications It is also possible to assign a level of user privilege to the menu so each level of user sees a different floating menu This is achieved by selecting a user privilege from the relative drop down list The Communications tab permits the activation of CX Server components such as the PLC Data Trace and
54. Yes water ml water 250 Yes Release 3 0 Page 187 CHAPTER 10 Recipes OMRON Using Recipes in Runtime Recipes defined using the Recipe Editor in the development environment can be accessed in runtime using the Recipe Viewer Recipes may be downloaded using the Recipe Viewer Recipe Viewer The Recipe Viewer can be displayed in one of two ways in the runtime environment It may be displayed by any CX Supervisor script code attached for example to a pushbutton The function call is simply DisplayRecipes The Recipe Viewer may also be displayed using the floating menu The floating menu needs to be configured to display the Recipes option This is done in the development environment and explained in chapter 6 Projects The Recipes dialog is displayed as follows gt Recipes of x le sala S ACCESS Coffee American Coffee British Coffee European Coffee Irish The Recipe Viewer is similar to the Recipe Editor however there are some differences in functionality and appearance To remove an existing recipe highlight the recipe from the recipe list and select the Delete Recipe button on the toolbar A confirmation dialog is displayed Click the Yes pushbutton to remove the definition or the No pushbutton to abort the delete operation Note that recipes created in the development environment may not be deleted in the runtime environment The delete operation only affects recipes copied and saved
55. a particular operation under the control of a CX Supervisor project A CX Supervisor recipe consists of one or more ingredients each of which relates to a point Each ingredient assigns a value to a point by means of a target value A suite of CX Supervisor recipes may be created for any project In runtime the recipes are a great time saver that eliminate mistakes that may otherwise be made were the repetitive tasks they perform left to human endeavour It is possible to achieve simple point initialisation using the CX Supervisor script language This approach works perfectly well for relatively straight forward applications However further functionality is provided using the recipe system such as the ability to modify a recipe while the CX Supervisor project is being executed in runtime Recipe Components Before proceeding any further with the description of recipes some basic recipe terminology must be introduced Recipe A recipe is a set of pre defined steps used to perform a particular task A CX Supervisor project may contain none or many Recipes are defined in the development environment and executed or downloaded in the runtime environment Ingredient Each recipe consists of at least one ingredient Each ingredient must be related to an existing point Target Value An ingredient must specify a target value for its related point This is the value to which the point is set in runtime when the recipe is downloade
56. and clicking the Delete pushbutton This results in a confirmation dialog being displayed Click the Yes pushbutton to remove the PLC from the list or the No pushbutton to abort the delete operation Note A PLC cannot be renamed deleted or edited if it is currently open for communications Accessing PLC Connection in Runtime Page 94 It is possible to reconfigure PLCs at runtime via the right mouse button floating menu option PLC Maintenance List The list of currently configured PLCs is displayed via the PLCs in Project dialog box On selection of a PLC the PLC Information dialog is displayed which allows the user to change the PLC configuration dynamically during runtime The Open PLC option provides the capability to toggle the communications status of the PLC The PLC Mode options switch the current mode of operation of the PLC between Stop Debug Monitor and Run Stop mode halts the PLC program execution allowing the PLC to be programmed Debug mode allows for the single stepping of program execution This mode is reserved for CV series PLCs only Monitor mode operation allows normal PLC program execution and modification of data Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects Run mode operation allows normal PLC program execution No data in any of the PLC memory areas can be changed It is possible to individually enable disable point communications from the PLC Maintenance dialog PLC Maintenance xX Close
57. and scripts 152 78 Create installation disc 120 Event Error messages 109 Exit privilege 117 Floating menu 105 Language settings 111 Menu option access levels 117 Non volatile point rate settings 106 Point substitution settings 112 Points maintenance 48 Recipes 188 Saving a project 119 Screen size 27 107 Security 114 Starting an application 118 Startup conditions 103 105 User configuration 114 Viewing recipes 188 Runtime Point Maintenance 48 Runtime Security Access Levels 116 Configured Users 114 Runtime settings See Customising CX Supervisor Runtime Settings Settings 103 S Save Page As Saving a Page to a Project 32 Save Runtime As 119 Saving a Page to a Project 32 Closing a Page 32 Save Page As 32 Saving a Project 90 SCADA 352 355 Scatter Graph Control Objects 69 Screen size 107 Script Editor 152 58 About 152 Alias definitions 121 155 AND statement 350 Arguments 350 Clear 158 Compilation errors 158 Completion 158 Copy 157 Cut 157 Release 3 0 INDEX CX Supervisor User Manual Executable files use of 352 Execution attributes 155 Expression dialog 154 Nesting 353 NOT statement 354 Object selection dialog 155 Operator and operand 354 OR statement 354 Paste 157 Points 157 Statements 355 Tabulate 157 Undo 157 View 153 Security 114 17 Add a new user 115 Designer
58. and select Regional and Language options 2 Click on the Advanced tab 3 From the Language for non Unicode programs select the language that the application was written for Remember that CX Supervisor 1 25 and earlier was a non Unicode program Note In some circumstances like Russian or Greek support it has been noted Install files for complex script needs to be selected on the Languages tab Microsoft does not document the reason for this 4 OK all dialogs and install new OS files from CD if requested Reboot if required Windows 2000 To configure Windows 2000 to correctly display extended characters to allow conversion to Unicode 1 Open Control Panel and select Regional Options 2 On the General tab select the original application language in the Language settings for the system section Note In some circumstances like Russian or Greek support it has been noted Thai language also needs to be selected Microsoft does not document the reason for this 3 Change the default System Locale to the original application language Click the Set Default button and select the required language 4 OK all dialogs and install new OS files from CD if requested Reboot if required Page 246 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 14 Multilingual Features Once configured follow these steps to convert the application 1 It can be worth checking the language configuration by running the old application under the ol
59. and the procedures associated with the creation amendment and removal of points using the Points Editing facility The application of external sources to points is also described What is a Point A point is a variable used internally by CX Supervisor All points within CX Supervisor have a name group and type associated with them CX Supervisor provides a set of pre defined System Points which are detailed in chapter 3 Points About the Point Editor The Point Editor allows the viewing creating modifying and removing of points from the points database Note System Points cannot be modified g To open the Point Editor dialog select the Point Editor button from the toolbar An example of the Point Editor dialog is as follows Point Editor lt All Groups gt T Sol o 1 123 4 5 ac ala lala po ee Name sid Type sd dO Type Address Description 2 12Hour Integer System Hours in 12 Hour format E fActiveslarms Integer System Humber of active alarmna E t amp larmCount Integer System Total number of alarms EL t4MPM Text System AM Z PM indicator for 12 Hour clock format S f4vailableMemoarn Integer System Amount of available memory in bytes Date Text System Date fe g 26 02 95 amp 0 ayO Month Integer System Day of the Month 2 0 ayOhear Integer System Dap of the ear amp 0 emol ode Boolean System Indicates a valid token has not been installed and is therefore in demo mode tDiskSp
60. another application XML resembles and complements HTML XML describes data such as city name temperature and barometric pressure and HTML defines tags that describe how the data should be displayed such as with a bulleted list or a table XML however allows developers to define an unlimited set of tags bringing great flexibility to authors who can decide which data to use and determine its appropriate standard or custom tags Example XML is used to describe an Employees phone list lt EmployeeList gt lt Entry gt lt Employee gt John Jones lt Employee gt lt Phone gt 555 1213 lt Phone gt lt Type gt Mobile lt Type gt lt Entry gt lt Entry gt lt Employee gt Sally Mae lt Employee gt lt Phone gt 555 1217 lt Phone gt lt Type gt Business Fax lt Type gt lt Entry gt lt EmployeeList gt You can use an application with a built in XML parser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 to view XML documents in the browser just as you would view HTML pages Datashaping The ADO SHAPE command can be used to produce hierarchical recordsets i e where a value within the current record is used to access another Recordset For example a record showing Customer Details might contain a field for Customer ID Every time the record position is changed a child Recordset showing Orders for that Customer ID could be recreated Hierarchical recordsets present an alternative to using JOIN syntax when accessing parent child data H
61. appropriate field To select an Expression Attribute click on the Browse pushbutton and select a point from the displayed list The Select Required Item dialog is displayed click the OK pushbutton to accept the point or click the Cancel pushbutton to leave the point unselected Clicking the Add Point button from the toolbar allows a new point to be created prior to association with the Gauge Wizard An existing point can also be associated with the Gauge Wizard by dragging a point directly from the Point Editor Refer to chapter 3 Points regarding adding a new point and dragging from the Point Editor To enter gauge values or display units type over the existing field entries The Gauge can be displayed in linear or rotary format either with or without ticks The text font used for the gauge title can be changed via the Title Font pushbutton The text font used for the gauge scale can be changed via the Scale Font pushbutton The font size used by the gauge can be automatically calculated for the user by selecting the Auto Size Fonts field Exit the Gauge Wizard by clicking the OK pushbutton to accept the new gauge attributes or click the Cancel pushbutton to leave the gauge unchanged Page 66 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 4 Objects Pushbutton Pushbuttons provide a simple means to start a set of actions Click the Push Button button then click or click and drag on the page to insert a pushbutton To edit the pushbutton double click
62. bitmap objects Refer to chapter 5 for further information on ActiveX Objects The tools are contained on the Control Bar and the Palette Bar The palettes allow all similar types of tool to be kept together The various tools and tool bars are discussed in the following chapters Status and help information is presented in a Status Bar located at the bottom of the main CX Supervisor window Palette Bar The Palette Bar contains the tools to apply colour and style options to the graphic objects placed on CX Supervisor pages Foreground Colour Line Style Background Colour Fill Pattern Release 3 0 Page 13 CHAPTER 1 Graphics Editor OMRON The Palette can be removed or re displayed at any time by selecting Palette from the View menu A tick next to the name indicates the Palette is currently displayed CX Supervisor saves the settings when it is exited and restores them when it is next run Each of the buttons on the palette is discussed in more detail in the following paragraphs Foreground Colour and Background Colour To create an object in a particular colour before selecting the object s tool from the Graphic Object bar first select the colour by clicking one of the colour buttons to drop down the colour picker Palette x Note Itis not strictly necessary to select a colour for an object before creating it however if no colour selection is made the object retains the same colour as the last object To
63. connection attributes are correctly configured For more information on adding and configuring PLCs and devices see chapter 6 Projects Device Configuration PLC Attributes The Data Location field identifies the area of memory to which this address applies and is dependent upon the type and configuration of the PLC The Data Type field identifies the type of data held at this address The type determines how point values are converted from a computer format into a PLC format The field contains options applicable to the Data Location Release 3 0 Page 43 CHAPTER 3 Points OMRON The Modifier field indicates the command to be performed on the data at this address An example of a modifier is for a bit a modifier might declare that a bit is to be forced set and not to be written normally The field contains options applicable to the Data Location The Array Size field specifies the number of data values associated with the point A value greater than 1 allows the point to be treated as an array For more detail on array points and their uses see Optimisation of PLC Communications The PLC Attributes dialog takes on a slightly different appearance if the point type is text showing the number of characters which start at the specified data location Data Locatia Characters fi Data Transfer Actions When Opening a PLC The type of data transfer action for the selected PLC can be specified by selection of the appropriate setti
64. control in selected state Either click the cursor into the editable area of the control and enter a new point size or click the down arrow and select a new point size from the presented list The control displays the current point size for the selected block of text If more than one block of text is selected having different point sizes the edit part of the control is empty However selecting a font from the supplied list or typing in a new point size still sets the point size for all the selected blocks of text Text Bold On Off The Text Bold button allows any selected text objects to be set to bold when the Text Bold button is pushed in or normal when the Text Bold button is released Text Bold only applies to text block text and to text on buttons other controls and graphics cannot be emboldened Text Italic On Off z The Text Italic button allows any selected text object s to be set to italic when the Text Italic button is pushed in or normal when the Text Italic button is released Text Italic only applies to text block text and to text on buttons other controls and graphics cannot be italicised Text Underline On Off ul The Text Underline button allows any selected text object s to be set to underline when the Text Underline button is pushed in or normal when the Text Underline button is released Text Underline only applies to text block text and to text on buttons other controls and graphics can
65. copy the text Insert the cursor at the desired field and type lt Ctrl gt V to paste the text Since the cut and copy operations store the information in the Windows Clipboard it may be pasted to another dialog or application Alarm Header Information The name of the alarm is entered in the Name field The alarm name can be constructed of up to 20 alphanumeric characters Any other characters including spaces generate an audible error or an Invalid Alarm Name entered message This field is visible from the Alarm Editor dialog The group to which this alarm is added is selected from the Group field To create a new group name simply type the name of the new group in the Group field The use of alarm groups allows filtering of alarm messages by group name The priority assigned to the alarm is selected from the Priority field The Display Alarm Acknowledge Box setting determines whether the Acknowledge Alarm dialog is displayed in runtime when the alarm occurs The dialog notifies the operator of the alarm condition and allows the operator to acknowledge the alarm The default value is True Activating the Auto Acknowledge Alarm setting causes these messages to be acknowledged without any operator action Refer to chapter 8 Alarm Acknowledge The Play Sound setting determines whether an audible warning is sounded when the alarm occurs The default value is False Note that a waveform file must also have been selected for the warning
66. current point value if the point is not an ingredient of the recipe being downloaded In the event of a failure the script language should perform a premature lt Return gt This has the effect of failing the recipe validation check and abort the attempt to download the recipe The recipe validation code should not contain any command which requires user input e g a Message command This is because the validation script would not have been completed and appropriate action taken at the time that user input is requested Instead if a message box is required then a point should be used as an error status value and set to an appropriate value This point can then be checked in an on condition script and the appropriate message displayed from there If the validation code exits normally the recipe is downloaded in the normal way Updating an Existing Recipe Open the Recipe Editor dialog as described in chapter 10 Viewing Recipes in the Recipe Editor Page 184 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 10 Recipes To modify an existing recipe highlight the recipe entry from the recipe list and select the Modify Recipe button from the toolbar This results in the Modify Recipe dialog being displayed a dialog based on the Add Recipe dialog as shown below Modify Recipe E4 Cancel Validate Recipe Before Download Validation Tode Configuration Attributes Recipe Name Coffee lrish Description Yalidation
67. data 2 Data Set period Days If a Data Set named Batch1 starts logging at 23 00 on the 29 December 1999 with a period of 1 Day the following files will be created Page 200 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 11 Data Logging Batchl1 1999122923 dlv If the system is left running the Data Logging directory will contain the following files Bauch tL 1999122923 2dLy Batch 1999123000 dlv Batch1 1999123100 dlv Batch 2000010100 dlv The first file will only contain 1 hour of data all subsequent files contain the full 24 hours of data 3 Data Set period Months If a Data Set named Shifts starts logging at 22 00 on 29 February 2000 with a period of 2 Months the following file will created Shifts1 2000032922 dlv If the system is left running the Data Logging directory will contain the following files Shifts 2000050100 dlv Shifts 2000070100 dlv The first file will only contain 1 month and 2 hours of data all subsequent files contain the full 2 Months of data Data Records There are two types of records that are stored in a Data Log file for each Item logged these are Events or breaks and the Actual Data Event Break Records Event records currently consist of the following fields Event Date Time Event Open Close Clear Start Stop Events have no associated data Data Records Data records currently consist of the following fields Type Date Time Milliseconds Data
68. data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed During runtime selecting the user input object by clicking the left mouse button results in the in place edit box or runtime User Input Text dialog being displayed based on the contents of the development version Set Text to Curent Text Cancel Enter Hew Test The user is provided with an instruction based on the Runtime Display Attributes field and a field in which the user enters the desired text Click the OK pushbutton to accept the value or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation An invalid entry typed in the editable field is exposed as an error once the OK pushbutton has been clicked Common Colour Palette If an object or action has a colour associated with it the colour can be changed by clicking on the sample of the colour in the dialog which describes the object or action The Colour Palette dialog is displayed so that a new colour can be specified Release 3 0 Page 177 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON Basic colors Custom colors ll 88 ll 88 ll tai EEE ll EE EE EE EE Define Custom Colors gt Cancel A colour can be selected by clicking on one of the palette colours This becomes the selected colour and is denoted as such in the Selected Colour field Alternatively a colour can be selected by specifying a colour name or number in the Colour Name field The selected colour within t
69. editor and the identical Modify Field Link dialog when the Edit menu is selected Add Field Link Field Properties Hame Fan Cancel Field Link fOe A Browse Expressiory PO Data Type C Bool Integer Real Text Dead Band eooo 7 I Trigger on change of value Name For convenience a unique Field Link name is created automatically This can be changed to give a more meaningful description if required Release 3 0 Page 209 CHAPTER 11 Data Logging OMRON Field Link Select the Field to link to from the list showing fields configured in the chosen Recordset Expression Enter the point name or expression that will be logged The Browse button allows easy point selection Data Type Set the type of the data to be stored For a point this is automatically set to the same as the point type when selected using the Browse button However for an expression this must be specified for example an expression Second 3 will create a Real value but the required data may be just the integer part so the Data Type would be set to Integer Deadband This allows the value of the expression to change within the percentage limit without being logged This is particularly useful when logging analogue values that are subject to noise Each sample is checked when the value changes for On Change sampling or every log period for On Interval against the last logged value While the value varies within the deadba
70. errors If any script has correct syntax but generates an error at runtime e g trying to open a file that does not exist the error is recorded in the Error Log To troubleshoot further e To confirm the line causing the problem temporarily comment it out and see if the error is no longer reported e Display values using MsgBox Message command or using the LogEvent command Design errors The only remaining errors are when the script compiles and runs correctly but do not produce the expected results These are typically errors in the design of the script To troubleshoot further e Confirm path of execution using MsgBox Message in all conditional branches e Display values using MsgBox Message command PLC Maintenance dialog The PLC Maintenance dialog is launched by right clicking and selecting PLC Maintenance After choosing the PLC you can Release 3 0 Page 325 APPENDIX C Troubleshooting OMRON Open and close the PLC See if there are errors Change the PLC Mode See the effect of optimisations as points are Disabled Database errors The database connectivity can sometimes be problematic to configure correctly To troubleshoot CX Supervisor database functionality Try viewing and writing the data from another data source for example Microsoft Access application for mdb files etc Connect to the database from the Developer to check Table and Field names can be
71. followed by ObjectName for example MyPage Push_1 Note Any text that includes a quote character cannot be stored so is automatically converted to single quote character Translations must also include single quote characters Note To enter a newline in the edit field hold the lt Ctrl gt key and press the Return key Translating User Defined Text Manually To get the user defined text translated and incorporated follow these steps 1 2y Bike 1 Develop your application completely It is easier and more effective to perform these steps just once However if further development is required repeat these steps and use a development tool like WinGrep Visual Sourcesafe or other version control software which should easily show the changes that have been made 2 Export the user defined text by selecting menu Project Create User Language Bila Thio will naranata a fila in tha nraiant dirantamr nallad dAafaiilt At Release 3 0 Page 243 CHAPTER 14 Multilingual Features OMRON File This will create a file in the project directory called default udt 3 Copy this file for as many translations as are required Name each copy lt language gt udt using exactly the same text particularly the accents as appears in the Language Settings dialog If the filename prefix is not exactly the same the file will not be loaded The format of these files is 29 99 development text translated text optional obje
72. from the list presented 4 To change the paper source click the Source field and select the desired paper source from the list presented 5 Click the OK pushbutton to exit from the Print Setup dialog when the settings are correct Note The Properties pushbutton gives access to advanced printer configuration functions for the selected printer For details of these functions refer to the Windows User Manual On line Help or the appropriate Manufacturer s handbook Print Preview To preview the page before printing select Print Preview from the File menu This results in a screen display similar to the following Release 3 0 Page 29 CHAPTER 2 Pages OMRON Balloon Page lt HE Do Bal lom Page A oil A 1 2 3 1 To print the page click the Print pushbutton CX Supervisor displays the Print dialog 2 To display the next page click the Next Page pushbutton 3 To display the previous page click the Prev Page pushbutton 4 To display the current page side by side with the next page click the Two Page pushbutton To return to a single page view click the same button again which now carries the legend One Page 5 Click the Zoom In pushbutton Click it a second time to zoom in to the second level This does not zoom into a specific area of the page 6 To zoom out from a zoomed in view click the Zoom Out pushbutton Click a second time to zoom right out 7 To close the preview screen cl
73. is at the bottom Clicking the button with the object at the bottom of a group has no effect The following example illustrates the state of a group of two objects before and after clicking the Lower Down One button with the grey polygon selected Before After Rotate f The Rotate button allows graphical and bitmap objects to be rotated With an object selected clicking the button once opens the Rotate dialog box Set the desired angle and click the OK pushbutton to rotate the object Rotate EJ Cancel The following example illustrates the state of an object before and after clicking the Rotate button and defining a 10 rotation with the object selected Page 18 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 1 Graphics Editor Before Rotated 10 Horizontal Mirror tq The Mirror Horizontal button on the Control Bar allows graphical and bitmap objects to be mirrored in the horizontal plane With an object selected clicking the button once flips the object producing a horizontal mirror image The following example illustrates the state of an object before and after clicking the Mirror Horizontal button with the object selected Before After Vertical Mirror The Mirror Vertical button allows graphical and bitmap objects to be mirrored in the vertical plane With an object selected clicking the button once flips the object producing a vertical mirror image The following example illustrates the state of an ob
74. is to ensure it is not due to network loading or other external factors Try with the PLC in STOP mode If this has an impact double check the PLC settings This can vary depending on PLC type but some require a longer scan rate so more free CPU time is available to service the communications whereas some require a shorter scan rate so the communications are service more frequently at the end of each scan Some other settings may also impact the CPUs ability to service communications Try to reduce the number of active messages see below Page 321 APPENDIX C Troubleshooting OMRON e Try to reduce to usage see below On the Performance tab the quantity of Active Messages is shown Each Active Message is a single communication request although the internal optimisations mean that many continuously addressed points can be read in one message This depends on the frame size which in turn depends on the network type This is why use of arrays and good memory layout are essential to performance To reduce the Active Messages see Chapter 16 Best Practices Performance and Chapter 16 Best Practices Points On the Performance tab the current and historic usage is shown 100 usage is rarely seen and the system may be running at capacity well before this This is analogous to a motorway where cars slow down long before they are touching bumpers and might only achieve 50 of capacity each car has a car length space behind it
75. main window control box at the top left hand side of the dialog lt Alt gt lt F4 gt Used to close down the current application Using Runtime Alarm Error and Recipe Viewer These can be invoked from the Runtime Floating menu see above To access their functionality use the lt Tab gt key to move from toolbar button to toolbar button and lt Enter gt to press a button The up and down cursor keys can be used to scroll the displayed list To close them or to move or resize them use the standard lt Alt gt lt gt hyphen key combination to access their menus Other Notes In Project level scripts it is possible to define OnKeyPress scripts which are attached to the cursor keys If Keyboard Only operation is set then it is not possible to execute a script attached to one of the cursor keys since they are being used for navigating around the selectable objects on the page Alternative additional keys have been added to compensate for this They are the number pad cursor keys i e 2 4 6 and 8 However these can only be used when the lt Num Lock gt key is on Target Settings The project target can be changed between Machine Edition and PLUS with this dialog Release 3 0 Page 105 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON Runtime Target Settings Target Runtime Type Cs Supermisor Plus va Project Informatior Cancel Total Max PLCs 0 296 Fonts 20 ang Fages FOO Alarms S000 Interval Scripts 100 Sup
76. may change the language at runtime The user may right click the application and select the Language Settings option see Chapter 6 Projects Menu Option Access Levels for details of the right click menu and setting access permissions Language Settings Ea Language for User Defined Test Default lt Default Nederlands Belgie Horwegian Note In this context lt Default gt means the language selected as the Default startup language during development in the above case Espa ol Spanish In addition the developer may call the SetLanguage script function see the CX Supervisor Script Language Reference Manual for details for example behind a button to allow the user to automatically switch languages User Defined text While the Runtime system is shipped with full translations for all system text any user defined text added by the developer must be translated and these translations incorporated into the application Examples of user defined text are e Button captions like Open Page e Text in Text objects like Value e Default values of Text Points e Chart and Graph titles The system always loads user defined text from files with the file name exactly the same as the language selection and extension UDT The file names for installed languages are English Czech Danish Deutsch Espa ol Finnish French Italiano Nederlands Belgi Norwegian Polish Portug
77. modern browser with cookies and JavaScript enabled Release 3 0 Page 237 CHAPTER 14 Multilingual Features OMRON CHAPTER 14 Multilingual Features This chapter introduces CX Supervisor s multilingual features to a new user and explains how to develop in and create applications in languages other than the default English for example Note e How a non English designer can run the development tools in their native language even if they are creating an application in another language e How non English runtime applications can be developed e How applications can be developed where the end users with different nationalities can switch between 2 languages 1 e Bilingual or more 1 e Multilingual e How applications can be developed for export where the developers can work in their native language and switch language before export and visiting maintenance engineers onsite can switch back to the development language Projects created in CX Supervisor versions 1 25 and earlier use Microsoft s Multi Byte Character Sets known as MBCS or sometimes DBCS for Double Byte Character Sets for multilingual features The formatting of character tables in MBCS is not the same as Unicode However old projects are automatically converted to Unicode when they are loaded and will then be saved in Unicode See the section Loading old projects for important information before you start Multilingual issues can be very complex but li
78. more meaningful name if required Point The name of an array point which will hold the results of the schema request The Browse button may be used to select a current point or add a new one Type The Type list will be populated with a selection of available Schema Types Criteria The Criteria list shows the available Criteria for the given Schema Type Release 3 0 Page 225 CHAPTER 12 Databases OMRON Filter The Filter list is used with certain Schema types to reduce the information returned Read on Connection If checked the Schema results are automatically obtained when successful connection to the database is achieved Preview If the Connection is live then the Preview button will be enabled on the dialog which allows you to view the results of the configured Schema The Schema Type Criteria and Filter values can be modified at Runtime via the DBSchema function Database Schema Types The Database Schema types supported in ADO are Schema Type values Criteria Values Schema Asserts CONSTRAINT CATALOG CONSTRAINT SCHEMA CONSTRAINT NAME Schema Catalogs CATALOG NAME Schema Character Sets CHARACTER_SET CATALOG CHARACTER_SET SCHEMA CHARACTER_SET_ NAME Schema Type values Criteria Values Schema Check Constraints CONSTRAINT CATALOG CONSTRAINT SCHEMA CONSTRAINT _NAME Schema Collations COLLATION CATALOG COLLATION SCHEMA COLLATION NAME Schema Column Domain Usage DOMAIN C
79. object using a Wizard Re sizing To re size an object click on it with the left mouse button This selects it and brings up green sizing grab handles Click and drag the handles until the object is of the desired size Re shaping Re shaping procedures are similar for all graphical objects which can be reshaped Not all can Control objects can only be reshaped using Wizards To change the shape of a graphical object choose Edit Object from the Edit menu to bring up the red editing grab handles Click and drag the handles until the object is of the desired shape The typeface of the editor can be amended by choosing Preferences from the File menu This is especially useful when printing CX Supervisor preferences can be configured such that double clicking on a graphical object also brings up the red editing grab handles Setting this preference is achieved by selecting Preferences from the File menu Refer to chapter 2 Pages for further details on preferences and CX Supervisor configuration Page 56 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 4 Objects Wizards Control objects cannot be re shaped in the same way as a graphical object but are edited using Wizards Wizards customise control objects to display information in an easy to understand manner To edit a control object and activate a Wizard double click on the object Note The shortcut keyboard combinations for Cut Copy and Paste operations are valid within Wizards Highlight p
80. of the grid is illustrated as follows In this example the selected polyline is in the process of being moved down The presence of the grid governs the movement of the object in all directions As the object is moved its position snaps an equal distance from the original position of the object against the grid Currently the object has been moved five grid steps down shown by the bracket Alignment Toolbox Objects on a page can be aligned in a variety of ways using the Alignment toolbar It is possible to Release 3 0 Page 79 CHAPTER 4 Objects OMRON BI j Click the Left Alignment button from the toolbar to align objects along their left edge Click the Right Alignment button from the toolbar to align objects along their right edge fa Click the Top Alignment button from the toolbar to align objects along their top edge f 4 ol wi Click the Centre Horizontally on Page button from the toolbar to centre objects on a page horizontally Click the Centre Vertically on Page button from the toolbar to centre objects on a page vertically Click the Bottom Alignment button from the toolbar to align objects along their bottom edge Click the Centre Align Horizontal button from the toolbar to align objects on their horizontal centres Click the Centre Align Vertical button from the toolbar to align objects on their vertical centres Click the Make Same Width button from the toolbar to make objects
81. on it The Push Button Wizard dialog is displayed as follows Push Button Wizard Button Style Colour Button Cancel Button Text In Out Button The Wizard allows a pushbutton to be assigned a style or text or both to signify its purpose To select a style click on an option in the Button Style field To enter button text type in the Button Text field the Style Attributes dialog is automatically updated The text font can be changed via the Font pushbutton Click the OK pushbutton to accept the new button attributes or click the Cancel pushbutton to leave the button unchanged Examples of the different styles of pushbutton are illustrated below The colour of the coloured pushbutton is red by default but can be changed by using the Palette x Configuration Attributes Rotary Gauge A Gauge provides a means of displaying the value of an operation or the value of a point Click the Rotary Gauge button then click or click and drag on the page to insert a gauge To edit the Rotary Gauge double click on it The Gauge Wizard dialog is displayed as follows Release 3 0 Page 67 CHAPTER 4 Objects OMRON Gauge Style K Linear Cancel l l Browse Configuration Attributes Scale Font Bauge Title E S Upervisor Gauge E spressioni Title Font FELL Style Attributes Minimum Gauge value f0 Maximum Gauge Value 100 Minor Display U
82. points DDE Array Points CX Supervisor supports arrays in DDE for both Client and Server transactions DDE Client data transfers are initiated by CX Supervisor either sending or requesting data from external DDE Applications such as Microsoft Excel DDE Server data transfers are initiated by external DDE Applications either sending or requesting data to or from CX Supervisor Refer to the CX Supervisor Script Language Reference Manual for further details DDE Client Array Points This chapter explains how to create DDE Client Array points This is similar to the way normal DDE Client points are created except extra information is required to specify the range of the array and also whether it is to be stored as a row or column in the Server application Py las re l Select the Add Point button from the Point Editor toolbar The Add Point dialog is displayed Enter a meaningful name in the Point Name field Set the O Attributes setting to DDE and click on the Setup pushbutton The DDE attributes dialog is displayed Enter an application in the Server Name field Enter a topic in the Topic Name field Enter the item in the tem Name field Itis also necessary to specify how the array is to be transferred For instance in Microsoft Excel this is either as a row or column the default is as a row which can be omitted The following are valid array item names R1C1 R3C1 col firs
83. possible to copy many recipes at once by highlighting all the desired recipes in the recipe list Press and hold the lt Ctrl gt key and use the mouse to select recipe definitions one by one or press and hold the lt Shift gt key and use the mouse to select blocks of recipe definitions Once the desired recipes have been highlighted the recipe definitions may be copied and pasted in the usual way w Recipe Editor All Users S Access Level 25 Coffee American Coffee British Coffee European Coffee Insh Deleting an Existing Recipe Open the Recipe Editor dialog as described in chapter 10 Viewing Recipes in the Recipe Editor To remove an existing recipe highlight the recipe from the recipe list and select the Delete Recipe button from the toolbar A confirmation dialog is displayed Click the Yes pushbutton to remove the definition or the No pushbutton to abort the delete operation Recipe Security Levels A recipe may be assigned a security level governing which level of users are allowed to download the recipe in runtime The available security levels are shown below in descending order Designer e Manager Supervisor Operator Page 186 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 10 Recipes All Users To assign a security level to a recipe display the Recipe Editor dialog Then select the recipe to which the security level is applied With the recipe highlighted from
84. procedure Objects can also be cut or copied and pasted into the Library refer to chapter 4 Objects When the object is pasted with the Graphics Library Editor open the Add Object To Library dialog is shown Page 130 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 7 Graphics Library Modify Library Element To change the name of a Library object click on the object in the Library the object name is highlighted in the Graphics Library Editor and click on the Modify Library Element toolbar button The Modify Library Element dialog is displayed as illustrated below Modify Library Element Title Pump Cancel Description 100 mm bore low pressure cold water centrifugal pump Identifier Group Enter the new object title text description and identifier Click the OK pushbutton to add the new object description to the Library or the Cancel pushbutton to cancel the operation Delete Object To delete an object from the Library select the object the grab handles are not shown however the object name is highlighted in the Graphics Library Editor and click on the Delete Object toolbar button A message box is displayed with the associated object name to remove Click on the Yes pushbutton to delete the object or the No pushbutton to cancel the operation Using a Graphic Library Object in the Graphics Editor A library object can be added to the Graphics Editor in the same way that the Graphics Editor is used to bui
85. pushbutton is clicked The raised message may be changed at any time simply by entering the desired message in the text field A message associated with the alarm can also be entered in the Normal field in the same manner to that above this message is displayed once an alarm condition has been rectified and normal conditions have been resumed The Alarm Editor provides a default normal message The name of the alarm is substituted for the character in the message text when the OK pushbutton is clicked The normal message may be changed at any time simply by entering the desired message in the text field Page 140 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 8 Alarms Both alarm messages can include embedded point names via the Browse pushbutton which is replaced at runtime with the value of the point Example Boiler temp high BoilerTemp shows the point value in the alarm message Example Flow exceeded Pressure Press Temperature 2 2 temp Updating an Existing Alarm Open the Alarm Editor dialog as described in chapter 8 Viewing the Contents of the Alarm Database To modify an existing alarm highlight the alarm entry from the alarm list and select the Modify Alarm button from the toolbar This results in the Modify Alarm dialog being displayed a dialog based on the Add Alarm dialog as shown below Modify Alarm Cancel Browse General Attributes Alarm Name vent empLow Grou
86. recipe 181 Create ingredient 182 Delete ingredient 185 Delete recipe 186 Page 364 OMRON Download recipes at runtime 190 Information 180 Ingredients 182 Modify a recipe 184 Modify ingredient 185 Print recipes See also Page Preview page Page Print page Page Setup page for printing Runtime 188 Security levels 186 Terminology 179 Validation 183 View 180 Recipes See also Recipe Editor About 355 Download recipe 352 356 Download recipes 190 Ingredients 182 353 Print recipes See also Page preview page Page print page Page setup page for printing Runtime 188 Security levels 186 Validation 183 Workspace 123 Rectangle Creating Editing Graphic Objects 58 Redundant Server 271 Remote connection Configuring 287 to a CX Supervisor application 269 Using OPC 258 Removing a PLC Connection Device Configuration 94 Removing Pages from a Project Project Editor 125 Re shaping Objects Editing Objects 56 Re sizing Objects Editing Objects 56 Rotary Gauge Control Objects 67 Rotate Control Bar 18 Round Rectangles Creating Editing Graphic Objects 58 Rubber Band 76 Runtime About 355 Access PLC connection 94 Advanced settings 112 Alarm history 144 Alarm reporting 143 Alarm settings 107 Alarm acknowledge 143 Alarm Message printer settings 108 Alarms current 144 Release 3 0 OMRON Alarms print 145 Animations
87. representations of computer resources and functions The CX Supervisor development environment and run time environment are run from icons Each recipe consists of at least one ingredient Each ingredient must be related to an existing point A type of point where the value of the point can only be a whole positive or negative number Within the CX Supervisor script language Item is a generic term for a point OPC item or Temperature Controller item A Java style scripting language supported by Microsoft s Windows Scripting Host Java Virtual Machine A spreadsheet application A windowing environment that is noted for its GUI and for features such as multiple typefaces desk accessories such as a clock calculator calendar and notepad and the capability of moving text and graphics from one application to another via a clipboard CX Supervisor will run only under Microsoft Windows DDE functions communicating with other applications supported by CX Supervisor use Microsoft Windows as a basis A word processing application To incorporate one or more IF THEN ELSE ELSEIF ENDIF statements inside a structure of the same kind 1 Part of the PLC configuration based on the device type The number of Networks available is dependant on the device type Page 353 GLOSSARY OF TERMS CX Supervisor User Manual Non Volatile NOT Object OLE DB Operand Operator OR Pages Parameter Association Pixel P
88. resources free UserResources 0 100 Percentage of user resources free Overview CX Supervisor supports Dynamic Data Exchange DDE which is a method of communication between Windows programs DDE uses messages to exchange data between applications and a protocol to synchronise the passing of data DDE applications fall into four categories client server client server and monitor A client application requests data or services from a server application A server application responds to a client applications requests for data or services Monitor applications can intercept DDE messages but cannot act on them they are therefore useful for debugging purposes CX Supervisor is a client server application which is both a client application and a server application thus requesting and providing information All CX Supervisor DDE data transfers are carried out on points and are asynchronous transfers There are two types of DDE points that can be created namely DDE Client Points and DDE Server Points Release 3 0 Page 335 APPENDIX F Obsolete Features OMRON With DDE Client Points all data transfers or conversations are initiated by CX Supervisor either sending data to or requesting data from external DDE Server Application s For example a CX Supervisor point could be linked to update a cell on a Microsoft Excel worksheet With DDE Server Points all data transfers are initiated by external DDE Client Appli
89. right menu option Add Field will be enabled Selecting this option will invoke the following dialog Modify Field Association E4 Field Association Properties Name OrderlD Cancel Point nOrderlD Browse Field Order D h Field Property alue ha Access field by index M Automatically read on open Name A unique Field name will be automatically provided This can be modified to provide a more meaningful name if required Release 3 0 Page 221 CHAPTER 12 Databases OMRON Point The name of the point that will be used in data transfers The Browse button may be used to select a current point or add a new one Field The name of the Recordset field to be associated with the above point If the Recordset is open this list will automatically show all available fields Field Property The type of information from the field to be transferred the following options are available Value default the assigned value of the field Name the name of the field column title Type the fields Data Type Size the maximum width of the field Add used to add new fields to a record Note The Name Type and Size properties are fixed for all entries of the column whereas the field value depends on the current position of the Recordset Note The Add property is specifically designed to enable fields to be added together to create new records They are not involved in any read operations as with the other
90. sound to be heard The waveform is selected by using the Alarm Sound pushbutton on the Alarm Settings dialog An alarm description detailing the possibilities of how the current alarm would be raised is inserted in the Description field To move to a new line press lt Ctrl gt lt Return gt Any characters are valid and up to 255 characters may be entered in the text field This field is visible from the Alarm Editor dialog Activating the Print Alarm Messages setting causes alarms of this type to be printed automatically when they occur Alarm Type The alarm type can be Simple Deadband or Rate of Change Select the desired type by clicking on the Simple Deadband or Rate of Change settings This field is visible from the Alarm Editor dialog Page 138 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 8 Alarms Alarm Attributes The attributes for an alarm are defined according to its type as this defines when an alarm reacts Since Simple is the default type the Simple alarm attributes are initially visible For a Simple alarm the following attributes are displayed Alarm Le n Alarm Attributes Simple Expression Browse Biolertemp gt 100 C Deadband C Rate of Change An expression based on a point is entered in the Expression field The alarm is raised once the point meets the expression The alarm is cleared when the point value subsequently fails to meet the expression For a Deadband alarm t
91. syntax error is no longer reported As a test try to simplify complex script lines into 1 or more lines with single instruction to identify which instruction 1s causing the error As a test simplify complex math formulae into several lines with single operation to identify which operation is causing the error As a test use hardcoded values for parameters using known valid values Display values using MsgBox command or using the LogEvent command Confirm path of execution using MsgBox in all conditional branches Release 3 0 OMRON APPENDIX C Troubleshooting CX Supervisor Syntax errors These are seen during development when OK is pressed on the Script dialog when the script type is CX Supervisor script To troubleshoot further e Refer to the comprehensive CX Supervisor Script Reference manual or on line help for detailed information including examples on specific script instructions e Double check capitalisation and objects names e To confirm the line causing the problem temporarily comment it out and see if the syntax error is no longer reported e As atest try to simplify complex script lines into 1 or more lines with single instruction to identify which instruction 1s causing the error e As atest simplify complex math formulae into several lines with single operation to identify which operation is causing the error e Asa test use hardcoded values for parameters using known valid values Runtime
92. the alarm list Press and hold the lt Ctrl gt key and use the mouse to select alarm definitions one by one or press and hold the lt Shift gt key and use the mouse to select blocks of alarm definitions Once the desired alarms have been highlighted the alarm definitions may be copied and pasted in the usual way Alarm definitions may be pasted into a project other than the original Care should be exercised when attempting this procedure as the alarm expression may contain references to point names which may have different meaning in the new project Deleting an Existing Alarm Open the Alarm Editor dialog as described in chapter 8 Viewing the Contents of the Alarm Database To remove an existing alarm highlight the alarm from the alarm list and select the Delete Alarm button from the toolbar A confirmation dialog is displayed Click the Yes pushbutton to remove the alarm from the alarms database or No pushbutton to abort the delete operation Printing Alarms Print Setup The Alarm Editor can be printed in the same way pages can Before printing ensure that the printer has been set up correctly To check the printer settings refer to chapter 2 Pages Print Preview To preview the page before printing select Print Preview from the File menu Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print Preview display Page 142 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 8 Alarms Printing To print the contents of the Alarm Editor
93. the animation an expression based on the status of a point must be entered in the Expression field The boundaries in which the object moves are inserted into the Active Expression Range Required Position fields The Maximum Offset specifies the number of pixels upwards from its initial position that the object moves when the result of the expression reaches the Maximum Value The Minimum Offset specifies the number of pixels downwards from its initial position that the object moves when the result of the expression reaches the Minimum Value A value within the maximum and minimum values results in a proportionate movement between the top and bottom positions To abort the Vertical Move definition click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed Resize Width Objects can be animated by shrinking or expanding horizontally This can be specified via the Resize Width dialog To access the Resize Width dialog to add an action select Resize Width from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Resize Width dialog to modify an action select Resize Width from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar Refer to chapter 9 Object for a list of the obje
94. the toolbar This results in the View Point dialog being displayed as shown below a dialog based on the Add Point dialog Release 3 0 Page 45 CHAPTER 3 Points OMRON Modify Point General Attributes OF Point Hame Time aken Cancel Group lt Detault gt 2i Advanced Description E Point Type Point Attributes C Boolean Minimurn Yale 39999999 Integer Maximum Value 99999999 C Real C Test Default Value lo LO Type Memory Attributes f Memory Array Size li Input Output C nput Output The selected point can be redefined as described in chapter 3 Creating a Point Note If a point is renamed then any animations or scripts that were using the previous point name become invalid Run the Analyse Application tool to check for References to non existent points Deleting an Existing Point To remove an existing point highlight the point from the points list and click the Delete Point button from the toolbar This results in a confirmation dialog being displayed Click the Yes pushbutton to remove the point from the points database or the No pushbutton to abort the delete operation Note It is possible to delete more than one point by either selecting points within a range or by selecting individually several points To select a range click on a point to mark the start of the range and click again with the lt SHIFT gt key down to mark the end To individually select more than o
95. this field can be updated using the Graphics Editor The position of the displayed value within the text field is specified by entering a character into the Displayed Text field The value can be displayed in its decimal form in scientific notation or in hexadecimal by selecting a Format settings Release 3 0 Page 171 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON The number of decimal places displayed can be specified by adding a character for each required place after a decimal point e g indicates 2 decimal places The text can also be left justified by setting the Left Justified setting Note To include a character as part of the text insert it as an escape character For example to display Box 1 type Box Only hashes typed to the left of the required for value display need escape characters since the first hash without an escape character is taken to be the point at which the value should be displayed To abort the Display Value edit click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed Display Value Text Text may be displayed using the Display Value Text dialog To access the Display Value Text dialog to add an action select Display Text Point from the animation li
96. to use the Sleep command It can also create confusing applications as it can create re entrant scripts and asynchronous PLC communications Always question e Ifitis used for timing use PLC ladder instead as this is much more reliable e Consider if the code following the Sleep should in fact be executed on an event e g after completion flag returned from PLC instruction or new data value etc e Use Animations if possible Always choose direct object animations in preference to page object scripts blink colour disable height width horizontal fill verticalYofill move rotate display and close These are both quicker and clearer e Keep scripts short Although the script editor can manage hundreds of lines this would suggest a serious design problem Consider 30 lines as a practical maximum Logging This section covers some data logging related good practices e Utilise Data Logging performance Always use the inbuilt Data Logging in preference to trend graphs or file I O functions as the performance is far superior e Always use On Change Always log data On Change There is no sampling error and CPU disk activity and storage required are almost certainly reduced Release 3 0 Page 285 CHAPTER 19 Best Practices OMRON e Use deadband option Consider using the deadband option especially for noisy analogue signals to reduce the actual logging and storage requirements e Don t Keep all files
97. together including page layouts and all scripts This can be useful as a development aid for maintenance and for project documentation ly 2 Jas 1 Start CX Supervisor and load the project to be printed 2 From the options dialog select the items to print and press OK 3 Select the printer to print to and press OK Device Configuration aa To amend the device configuration or create connections to a PLC or temperature controller click the Device Setup button from the toolbar This results in the Setup Devices dialog being displayed Page 90 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects Setup Devices Device List Close Add Modify Ed Delete Runtime Default Settings for Device Access Secunty Level al Users WwW Open Device Creating a PLC Connection A new device can be added by clicking on the Add pushbutton on the Setup Devices dialog Note CX Supervisor calls an external application to change PLC information The functions described in the following paragraphs may differ slightly depending upon which application and version has been invoked Change PLC Device Name p Device Type C31G Settings r Network Type SYSMAC WAT Settings gt Comment Lok cancel _ A name can be assigned for the device in the PLC Name field Select the PLC from the Device Type field To add a temperature controller select a temperature controller from th
98. type of Items data points provided they have the same update rate Note This dialog cannot be opened until a valid project file exists in which to create the groups Groups Use the Add Edit and Delete buttons to show the Group Attributes dialog and update the list of groups For identification purposes groups should be given logical names The defaults are Group1 Group etc i GROUP ATTRIBUTES Group Attributes Group Attributes Mame Group Update Fate i 0 Seconds IY Active On Startup Name This is the name of the selected group If you are editing an existing group name or creating a new one the current or default Page 266 Release 3 0 OMRON Release 3 0 CHAPTER 16 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client name is overwritten The default name for new groups are Group Group etc Update Rate This is the rate at which the Items data points in the group will be interrogated and new data entered if it is a readout or read from if it s a control Enter the rate as a numerical value and select the units from the drop down list The minimum value is 100msec the maximum is 99999Sec 1 e over 27 hours Active On Startup Checking this option will make the Group active when the OPC server is started This means the items contained within will be able to read and write data The default is checked c Items Tab The Items within the selected group are listed Items are data points of inform
99. 1 3 or old parallel port dongles from older versions You need to purchase a version 2 0 USB Dongle Older product versions are illustrated below Release 3 0 Page 313 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions OMRON Hardlock Parallel CX Supervisor CX Supervisor CX Supervisor port dongle 1 3 USB Dongle 2 0 USB Dongle 2 0 USB Dongle CX Supervisor V1 2 Yes N A N A N A and ealier Q What is the maximum limit of number of PLCs or Devices Machine edition projects are capable of communication with up to 15 devices through CX Server and the PLUS projects with up to 256 devices Q What is the maximum limit of size of array points Each array point may contain up to 1024 elements Q What is the maximum limit of number of pages Machine edition projects can configure up to 100 pages and the PLUS projects with up to 500 Q What is the maximum limit of number of objects on a page There is no theoretical limit to the number of objects on a page but 1 000 should be considered the limit for normal PC configurations Since each object consumes resources Operating Systems like Windows NT Windows 2000 and Windows XP will support larger applications than Win98 or ME Q What is the maximum limit of number of scripts on a page There is no theoretical limit to the number of scripts associated with a page but performance of the application will be reduced the more scripts there are Q What is the maximum limit of number of recipes
100. 2 Horizontal Move 151 159 Horizontal Percentage Fill 151 Invisible 151 169 70 Modify animation 152 78 153 Move Horizontal 159 Move Horizontal 151 Move Vertical 151 159 60 Object selection dialog 155 Percentage Fill Horizontal 151 Percentage Fill Vertical 151 163 Resize Height 151 161 62 Resize Width 151 160 61 Rotate 151 Runtime 152 Script Execute 151 See also Script Editor Show Page 151 164 Text Display Value 151 172 73 Text Edit Point Value 151 176 77 Text User Input 151 176 77 Vertical Move 151 159 60 Vertical Percentage Fill 151 163 View 147 Visible 151 169 70 Width Resize 151 160 61 Animations Aliases 121 155 Object animations 152 Page animations 149 50 Points 146 Project animations 148 49 Runtime 152 Script See Script Editor Appendix A Configuring a PC for remote connection 287 Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions 291 Appendix C Troubleshooting 320 Appendix D CX Server Error Codes 328 Appendix E Obsolete Features 331 333 Application 350 Application Design 278 Applying Tooltips Manipulating objects 82 Arc Creating Editing Graphic Objects 57 B Bar Chart Control Objects 61 Page 358 OMRON Best Practices 278 Bitmap 350 Opening an existing bitmap 63 Pixel 354 Bitmap Control Objects 63 Block Creating Editing Graphic Objects 57 Boolean Point 72 C
101. 20314 dlv File View Options Windows Help 4 x S SB Sle alsle ele B r w la sl ely jz H 350 00 gt Altitude 300 00 100 00 Fuel 250 00 E 0 00 200 00 t 150 00 100 00 50 00 0 00 03 02 99 03 02 99 03 02 99 03 02 99 03 02 99 14 05 44 14 05 54 14 06 04 14 06 14 14 06 24 TRUE Burning 03 02 99 03 02 99 03 02 99 03 02 99 03 02 99 14 05 44 14 05 54 14 06 04 14 06 14 14 06 24 gi ee For Help press F1 03 08 00 14 06 32 000 NUM Z Features The Data Set viewed is the name passed as an argument with the script function or a user selected Data Set On start up a dialog allowing selection of traces to view from the Data Set will be shown Up to 10 analogue traces and 50 digital traces may be shown at once Alternatively script parameters can be used to automatically select the traces to show On display the viewer displays Page 204 the latest data file for this Data Set the X axis set to the Data Set s period e Y Axis set to full scale for the first trace The selected analogue traces are shown overlaid Boolean points are displayed in a separate view Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 11 Data Logging The X Axis shows true Date and Time as the local time on the logging system Remote analysis within different time zones will show the same dates and times Logging of local time means adjustment of PC time and daylight saving are handled Key shows trace colour
102. 250 00 200 00 150 00 100 00 50 00 0 00 CVM1 CS1H CQM1H C200HX of CVM1 Performance Sysmac Way 9600 140 00 120 00 100 00 80 00 60 00 40 00 20 00 0 00 CVM1 CS1H CQM1H CQM 1 C200HX Page 317 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions OMRON Toolbus 9600 200 00 180 00 160 00 140 00 120 00 100 00 80 00 60 00 40 00 20 00 0 00 of CVM1 Performance CVM1 CS1H CQM1H CQM1 C200HX Sysmac Net 200 00 180 00 160 00 140 00 120 00 100 00 80 00 60 00 40 00 20 00 0 00 of CVM1 Performance CVM1 C200HX Page 318 Release 3 0 OMRON Release 3 0 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions Sysmac Link 600 00 900 00 400 00 300 00 200 00 100 00 0 00 CVM1 CS1H C200HX Page 319 APPENDIX C Troubleshooting OMRON APPENDIX C Troubleshooting The appendix is a guide to troubleshooting and resolving problems Several tools and techniques are discussed to assist troubleshooting and in the case of no success the information required to request support How to diagnose problems Here are some tips to help diagnose problems e Where you think a problem exists try to create steps to reproduce it see below e Be scientific Decide what the problem could be and perform a test to prove or disprove the theory Perform one test at a time e Check the data values are correct in the PLC using
103. 7 59 353 Manipulating an object 76 Re shaping an object 56 Re sizing an object 56 Snapping objects to grid 79 Text 356 Text object 13 Wizards See Wizard Object Identification Control Bar 17 Objects 56 Obsolete Features 331 333 OLE Automation 342 OPC Client 258 Foundation web site 258 What is it 258 Opening a Page via the Project Editor Project Editor 125 Opening Graphics Library Graphics Library 129 Optimisation of PLC Communications Device Configuration 49 Orientation Manipulating objects 78 Output workspace 123 P Page About 354 Access 25 Attributes 26 28 26 28 Modify page 25 26 Preview page 29 30 Print page 30 31 See also Page Preview page Page Setup page for printing Print Properties 26 28 26 28 Save page 32 89 Save page as a different identity 32 Palette Fill Pattern Palette 15 Line Style Palette 15 Palette Page 362 OMRON Colour Palette 14 Palette Graphics Editor 13 Paste Manipulating objects 11 Peer to Peer 269 270 PLC 43 44 90 93 94 355 Accessing connection in runtime 94 Attributes 43 Configuration 90 Creating a connection 91 Deleting a connection 94 Device type 92 Modifying a connection 93 Network 92 353 Optimising connections 49 PLC Attributes Creating Points 43 PLC Communication Points Point Import 53 Point Import 49 Alarm Points 52 Date Points 51
104. 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 ms Write time under increasing load 450Mhz E 450Mhz 1 1 Ghz gt 1 1 Ghz gt 2 4Ghz 1 7 2 4Ghz 2 2 1 7 2 2 1 7 2 2 SD HD HOGA OG HD GO PP PPP LK A LP POP OS Page 299 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions OMRON Q Can Irun CX Supervisor Runtime as a restricted Windows User CX Supervisor and CX Server require Administrator rights to be installed on a computer but other users can then run the software The runtime will run without problems as a Standard User member of Power Users group and will run as a Restricted User member of Users Group although will show errors when trying to update the registry To avoid these errors specific registry access can be provided by an Administrator to the following registry keys HKEY CLASSES ROOT CLSID 0002D780 0000 0000 C000 000000000046 HKEY CLASSES ROOT CLSID 0002D78 1 0000 0000 C000 000000000046 HKEY CLASSES ROOT CX Supervisor Application HKEY CLASSES ROOT CX Supervisor Project Q Can I use CX Simulator with CX Supervisor Integrated Simulation can be used to automatically launch and use CX Simulator See Compiling and Running a Project for more details Omron s CX Simulator virtual PLC can also be manually configured for use with CX Supervisor To achieve this follow these steps l r PO es oe ee a 10 11 St
105. 9072002 10 59 42 SystemManager Event Supervisor logged in to C Supervisor 1sorlzo02 11 01 39 RecordManager High Unable to Find recipe T H The events can be sorted based on a designated field type date time reported by priority or associated message By selecting the Date field the events are sorted alphanumerically by date The Time Reported by Pri Event and Message fields react in the same way The Event Error Log display shows the log listed in date order el The widths of the alarm fields can be widened or narrowed as required using the mouse to drag the column boundaries af Time 093 56 1 09 56 1 There are a number of toolbar buttons that aid the use of the Event Error Log The Disable Error Updates button once pressed stops further events occurring in the runtime environment being added to the log The Event Error Log dialog is still accessible to switch back subsequently The Enable Column Sorting button allows the format of the Error Event Log dialog to be continually updated when subsequent errors or events are added The Clear Event Error Log button clears all entries from the log The Display All Errors Events button lists all events and errors irrespective of priority The list is sorted according to the Date Time Reported by Pri Event or Message field The Low Priority button lists all errors designated as a low priority only Other errors and events are not deleted from the log they are mer
106. ATALOG DOMAIN SCHEMA DOMAIN NAME COLUMN_NAME Schema Column Privileges TABLE_CATALOG TABLE_SCHEMA TABLE_NAME COLUMN_NAME GRANTOR Page 226 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 12 Databases Schema Columns TABLE_CATALOG TABLE_SCHEMA TABLE_NAME COLUMN_NAME Schema Constraint Column Usage TABLE_CATALOG TABLE_SCHEMA TABLE_NAME COLUMN NAME Schema Constraint Table Usage TABLE_CATALOG TABLE_SCHEMA TABLE_NAME Schema Foreign Keys PK_TABLE_CATALOG PK_TABLE_SCHEMA PK_TABLE_NAMEFK_TABLE CATALOG FK_TABLE_SCHEMA FK_TABLE_NAME Schema Indexes TABLE_CATALOG TABLE_SCHEMA INDEX _ NAME TYPE TABLE_NAME Schema Key Column Usage CONSTRAINT CATALOG CONSTRAINT SCHEMA CONSTRAINT NAME TABLE_CATALOG TABLE_SCHEMA TABLE_NAME COLUMN_NAME Schema Type values Criteria Values Schema Primary Keys PK_TABLE_CATALOG PK_TABLE_SCHEMA PK_TABLE_NAME Schema Procedure Columns PROCEDURE_CATALOG PROCEDURE_SCHEMA PROCEDURE_NAME COLUMN_NAME Schema Procedure Parameters PROCEDURE_CATALOG PROCEDURE SCHEMA PROCEDURE_NAME PARAMTER_NAME Schema Procedures PROCEDURE_CATALOG PROCEDURE_SCHEMA Release 3 0 Page 227 CHAPTER 12 Databases PROCEDURE_NAME PROCEDURE_TYPE Schema Provider Types DATA_TYPE BEST_MATCH Page 228 Schema Referential Constraints Schema Schemata Schema SQL Languages Schema Table Constraints Schema Table Privileges Schema Tables OMRON CONSTRAINT CATALOG CONSTRAINT SCHEMA CONSTRAINT _NAME
107. Box Error ErrorNum occurred e As parameter to LogError or LogEvent This too is useful to help convert numbers to strings e g LogError Error ErrorNum occurred priority e Titles in Graphs and Charts useful for translations again e g Titles Ti tlestring e In Tooltips for dynamic information Tooltip text ToolTipString e In Report templates See Script Reference GenerateReport for more information See Chapter 6 Point Substitution Settings and FAQ Creating Reports and HTML Reports for related information Release 3 0 Page 55 CHAPTER 4 Objects OMRON CHAPTER 4 Objects This chapter describes the various objects available within CX Supervisor It also describes the processes for creating editing and manipulating objects Objects Pages created with CX Supervisor are constructed from objects that are inserted and linked together to form a coherent interface CX Supervisor objects are divided into three groups graphical control and embedded Generally the procedures for creating objects are identical A pushbutton representing the desired object is clicked on the Graphic Object bar The mouse pointer is then either clicked on the page for a default sized object or clicked and dragged to the appropriate point on the page for a custom sized object Editing Objects Editing falls into three distinct categories Re sizing an object Re shaping an object Modifying an
108. C Driver Error can occur The query is not updateable because it contains no searchable columns to use as a hopeful key The Excel ODBC driver cannot correctly interpret the data type of a column if the column in the spreadsheet contains both text and numbers If a spreadsheet has been set up with data directly inputted in Excel and an attempting to write new data to the spreadsheet from CX Supervisor this error will occur This is because the ODBC Driver sees different formats in a column To overcome this set up the spreadsheet the data area definition to contain only the column headings Insert Name Define Release 3 0 Page 315 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions OMRON Another problem in this area has been that the format of the data can change from Number to Text i e 333 formats in the cell of the spreadsheet The exact cause of this error is unknown but can be resolved by clearing the cell formats Edit Clear Formats of the spreadsheet that will be receiving the data Q How does the PLC affect performance for my network type The charts below show how the network type affect the performance depending on the PLC used Ethernet 350 00 300 00 250 00 200 00 150 00 100 00 50 00 of CV500 Performance 0 00 CV500 CS1H Page 316 Release 3 0 OMRON Release 3 0 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions of CVM1 Performance Controller Link
109. CATALOG _NAME SCHEMA_NAME SCHEMA _OWNER CONSTRAINT CATALOG CONSTRAINT SCHEMA CONSTRAINT_NAME TABLE_CATALOG TABLE_SCHEMA TABLE_NAME CONSTRAINT_TYPE TABLE_CATALOG TABLE_SCHEMA TABLE_NAME GRANTOR GRANTEE TABLE_CATALOG TABLE_SCHEMA TABLE_NAME TABLE_TYPE Schema Type values Criteria Values Schema Translations Schema Usage Privileges Schema View Column Usage TRANSLATION CATALOG TRANSLATION SCHEMA TRANSLATION NAME OBJECT CATALOG OBJECT SCHEMA OBJECT NAME OBJECT _TYPE GRANTOR GRANTEE VIEW_CATALOG VIEW_SCHEMA VIEW_NAME Schema View Table Usage VIEW_CATALOG VIEW_SCHEMA Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 12 Databases Schema Views TABLE_CATALOG TABLE_SCHEMA TABLE_NAME Note The actual schemas are defined by the OLE DB specification and Providers are not required to support all of the OLE DB standard schema queries Specifically only Schema Tables Schema Columns and Schema Provider Types are required by the OLE DB specification However the provider is not required to support the Criteria constraints listed above for those schema queries Using Transactions Modifications of data in the database i e adding modifying and deleting records can be grouped so that all modifications take place at the same time This group of modifications is called a Transaction A Transaction includes any modifications to data in a connection regardless of the Recordset A transaction is started by ca
110. CX Supervisor User Manual Software Release 3 0 CX Supervisor User Manual OMRON Notice OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual Always heed the information provided in them Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to the product DANGER Indicates information that if not heeded is likely to result in loss of life or serious injury WARNING Indicates information that if not heeded could possibly result in loss of life or serious injury Caution Indicates information that if not heeded could result in relatively serious or minor injury damage to the product or faulty operation OMRON Product References All OMRON products are capitalised in this manual The word Unit is also capitalised when it refers to an OMRON product regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product The abbreviation PLC means Programmable Logic Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for anything else Page 2 Release 3 0 OMRON CX Supervisor User Manual Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the p
111. CX Supervisor applications without the need for the configured devices to be physically connected How to use Integrated Simulation 1 Click Run With Simulator from the Project menu 2 Select the device to be simulated 3 Select the CX Programmer project to be run 4 Close CX Programmer to end integrated simulation Simulator Configuration x Device PLCI Project C projects Simulatorshelp cxe Prowse Requirements and Limitations Both CX Programmer and CX Simulator must be installed to enable integrated simulation in CX Supervisor At the time of writing CX Simulator is limited to simulating a single CS or CJ series PLC For CX Programmer projects with multiple devices only the first device will be simulated NOTE The One Click simulation feature is designed to test the functionality of your PLC program and CX Supervisor application It is not intended to simulate communications or hardware performance and is likely to perform slower than the actual hardware Save Runtime As Once the project has been compiled and run the compiled version of the project may be saved into another directory location or onto another disc for issue to the target equipment CX Supervisor asks for a location and name for the runtime project This is a standard Windows dialog and operation depends on your operating system Please consult your Microsoft documentation for full details The default file type is SR2 Relea
112. Connecting to Omron Industrial Components This chapter details connecting CX Supervisor to Omron s Industrial Components like Temperature Controllers Digital Panel Meters and Timer Counters Any process value or parameter from these devices can be monitored or written See the device documentation for available parameters and their description This is achieved in CX Supervisor by creating a point and linking it to the required parameter Device ranges supported are following models that support communication where indicated a wildcard e K3GN e ES5 N e E5 J e ES5ZE e E5 K e H8GN e K3N e ES5ZN Adding a Point Linked to a Parameter Te ocd 1 Start CX Supervisor Development and open your project Start gE 2 Open the Point Editor by selecting the Point Editor option from the Utilities menu or by clicking the toolbar button 3 In the Point Editor dialog click the Add Point button in the toolbar to open the Add Point dialog 4 In the Add Point dialog move to the I O Type options and select the Input Output or Input Output option as appropriate Note that the I O Update Rate and I O Attributes options and displayed 5 In the I O Attributes options select OPC Other and click the Setup button This will open the Communications Control Attributes dialog 6 In the Communications Control Attributes dialog enter the appropriate parameters as follows Communications Control Attributes Page 274 Release 3 0
113. Cs Supermisor Communications Control Clicking the OK button in the Communications Controls dialog will open the Communications Control Properties dialog from where the server details can be added or updated Click Show All and select the computer name of the server machine from the list To edit these properties later select Modify from the Info menu Group Select the Group containing the required item from the dropdown list To Add Modify or Delete a Group click the Info button Items The Items within the selected Group are listed The Item Attributes dialog can be used to add or edit the items To Add Modify or Delete an Item click the Info button Selecting the Add or Modify option will open the Items Attributes window from where the item details can be added or updated Array Size Enter the number of array elements in the CX Supervisor point that this item should have If not an array enter 1 Having checked that all the parameters are correct return to the Point Editor window by closing any attributes window that may be open The application can now be run by clicking on the Run Project button in the toolbar The CX Supervisor Point will now be connected to Remote CX Supervisor application and can be used like all other CX Supervisor points 1 e to drive animations in alarm expressed in recipes for data logging etc Page 273 CHAPTER 18 Connecting to Omron Industrial Components OMRON CHAPTER 18
114. DataType Group Recipe Pending Humber of Errors Last Error 0 0 ILOOOk Integer lt Defaults 0 0 Total Active Point Elements APPENDIX C Troubleshooting Refresh Average Active Elements Sec Calculated Peak Elements Sec Write Callbacks Writes Now Being Processed Data Transfer Optimisation Allow Output Optimizations MSecs since last callback MSecs since first callback Minimum callback interval Maximum callback interval Average callback interval Maximum callback duration Average callback duration Active Enabled Registered with Cs 5erver Clear 0 i Clear All Always Update Auto Update Synchronized Registered Jointly Send Data Pending Ce Server PLE Ce Server Address Point ype Humber of Elements Registration Required C200H C200H 8 1 USH Registered By Page Script etc The most useful readings on this screen are Auto Update refreshes the data twice a second e Total Active Points Number of CX Server points both input and output currently active e Average Active Pts Sec Measured number of CX Server Inputs per second since application started or since Clear pressed With Input On Change optimisation this can be very small Also InputsActual System Point e Calculated Peak Pts Sec Calculated number of CX Server Input points currently active multiplied by update rate Release 3 0 Page 323 APPENDIX C Troublesho
115. Database name Database Error Ea S Ounce M icrosott JET Database Engine Description Could not find file C Program FilestOmroniS CSD emos D ataba source M orthwairn mdb Database Connection String dialog Connection to a Database is performed by means of a Connection String Because different Data Providers require different information to connect you to a data store these strings can be quite complex and cumbersome For this reason CX Supervisor will automatically create a valid connection string for your selected data source if it s supported This string can be viewed and modified via the Connection String dialog shown below when Advanced is pressed on the Add Modify Database Connection dialog Page 214 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 12 Databases Connection String Provider MicrasottJet OLEDE 4 0 Data Source C data source orthwind mdb Build Connection String Cancel If your data source is not supported or you have your own drivers for a particular database the Connection String can be modified using this dialog consult your database documentation for the required connection string User Id and Passwords If a connection to a database requires a user id or password this can be supplied by means of the connection string which can be modified via the Advanced Dialog as follows Connection String Frovider Microsott Je OLEDE 4 0 Data Source C data sources orthwind md
116. E2AUTO WRI in that subdirectory for more information Page 342 Release 3 0 OMRON APPENDIX F Obsolete Features OLE Overview The Microsoft Windows operating environment allows the transfer and sharing of information between applications by using a technique known as Object Linking amp Embedding or OLE pronounced ol Embedding allows drawings sounds or almost any objects to be created within an application and then inserted embedded or linked within another file or document The embedded object can then be edited or activated by merely double clicking on it Linking allows an object to be shared by several documents by forging links between the destination documents and the source object e g a company logo may appear in several word processor documents by linking to a graphics object rather than embedding Embedding and Linking Objects within the CX Supervisor application can either be achieved by using the Object Packager or by embedding or linking objects directly within a page Note Packages may only be embedded or linked into CX Supervisor pages if they are created using OLE compliant applications This applies to objects either directly linked or embedded within CX Supervisor and those inserted using the Object Packager Object Packager The Object Packager is a Windows application which enables objects to be wrapped for insertion into documents It can be used to either create a link to a file held on disk or t
117. Horizontal action the Percentage Fill Horizontal dialog is displayed Percentage Fill Horizontal Expression oK Cancel Active Expression Range Required Percentage Fill Browse Minimum Value Filled lo lo asimum ale li U0 li 0g Filled Fill Direction Left to Right C Right to Left To define the animation an expression consisting of a number of operators and operands which may be based on the status of a point must be entered in the Expression field The boundaries associated with the percentage fill are inserted into the Active Expression Range Required Percentage Fill fields The Filled fields specify the percentage of the object to fill when the expression reaches its maximum and minimum values The flood fill also requires a direction This can be specified as left to right or right to left by selecting the appropriate Fill Direction setting Page 162 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation To abort the Horizontal Percentage Fill definition click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed Vertical Percentage Fill Closed objects can be flood filled along a vertical axis This can be specified via the Percentage Fill Vertical dialog
118. I O type states the scope of the point i e whether it is purely an internal variable or whether it communicates with a PLC mi0 Type Memon Aesidenl C Input Dutput C Input Output A Memory Resident point is provided internally by CX Supervisor An Input point receives data from an external device An Output point sends data to an external device An Input Output point both sends data to and receives data from an external device Memory Attributes The Array Size field allows Memory Point arrays to be created If an Array Size of 1 is specified a single point is created Specifying any other value creates an array of points of this type This option is only available to Memory Resident points Release 3 0 Page 41 CHAPTER 3 Points OMRON Memon Attributes Array Size li I O Update Rate The I O Update Rate specifies how and when communication with the PLC takes place This option is not available to Memory Resident points UO Update Rate On Change On Request On Interval 1 Seconds w The On Change option specifies that communication with the PLC occurs automatically as a result of a value change The On Request option specifies that data updates with the PLC will be manually requested using the scripting commands InputPoint and OutputPoint The point is updated internally but only communicates with the PLC when requested to by the script commands
119. Level to Identify Setup the access permissions by either a On the Default COM Security tab adding the user to the Access Launch and Configuration lists by clicking the Edit Default button in each case The user added should have Administrator rights on the local PC If not it may be necessary to add user groups INTERACTIVE and NETWORK as well b From the My Computer item in Component Services select DCOM Config and configure the properties for required applications e g SCS OpenDataServer and OpcEnum On the Security tab add the required users to each of the Custom Permissions The users added should have Administrator rights on the local PC If not it may be necessary to add user groups INTERACTIVE and NETWORK as well Configuring a Server PC running Windows NT or 2000 1 2 3 1 Start DCOMCNFG EXE e g by selecting RUN from the Start button The WAStart default location is C WINDOWS SYSTEM 2 View the Default Properties tab Ensure that the Enable Distributed COM on this computer is checked Release 3 0 Page 289 APPENDIX A Configuring a PC for remote connection OMRON 3 From the Default Properties tab configure the Default Authentication Level to Connect and the Default Impersonation Level to Identify Setup the access permissions by either a On the Default Security tab adding the user to the Access Launch and Configuration lists by clicking the Edit Default button in each
120. Logging OMRON Data Logging Overview As well as the inbuilt datalogging features it is also possible to log data directly to an existing Database This provides direct storage of data in third party format allowing for easy analysis using familiar tools and there is no need for scripts to export data However slower speed means logging to a database may be unsuitable for tasks with large data throughput or high logging speed Also unlike the standard Datalog files there is no standalone viewer for instant viewing The ADO interface used to access Data Sources does not provide any mechanism for creating Databases or Tables therefore it is not possible to automatically create a data source Unpopulated data sources for use in Database Logging must first be created using the specific software for your choice of data source e g MS Access To configure CX Supervisor to log to a database Create an unpopulated data source or template for use in Database logging Create a Database connection in the Workspace Database editor to the database created above Add a recordset with a read write lock and fields with Field Property configured as Add so records can be added Create a Database Link in the Workspace Logging editor by selecting Add Db Link from the popup menu to show the Add Database Link dialog Create Field Links for each field to log by selecting Add Db Field from the popup menu to show th
121. M communications through the firewall either a Completely disable the firewall as follows Note can leave your computer vulnerable to attack so consult your computer documentation or IT administrator if you are unsure Start 1 Open Control Panel followed by Computers 2 Right click My Computer and select Security Center 3 Select Windows Firewall Ce 4 On the General tab choose option Off b Alternatively on the Exceptions tab you can configure specific programs to permit communications All other required settings are the same as for running standard Windows XP as explained below Release 3 0 Page 287 APPENDIX A Configuring a PC for remote connection OMRON Configuring a Client PC running Windows XP 1 2 Size 1 Start Component Services e g by running DCOMCNFG EXE by selecting Start RUN from the start button The default location is C WINDOWS SYSTEM 2 Select Component Services followed by Computers 3 Right click My Computer and select Properties 4 View the Default Properties tab Ensure that the Enable Distributed COM on this computer is checked Configuring a Client PC running Windows NT or 2000 TD Sixes 1 Start DCOMCNFG EXE e g by selecting RUN from the start button The start default location is C WINDOWS SY STEM 2 View the Default Properties tab Ensure that the Enable Distributed COM on this computer is checked Configuring a Server PC running Windows XP Service Pack 2 Windows XP S
122. O To create a transparent ellipse click the Ellipse Frame button Alternatively select a filled ellipse and click the Transparency Either click on the page to create a circle or click and drag to create an ellipse Ellipses cannot be edited but can be re sized Release 3 0 Page 57 CHAPTER 4 Objects OMRON Line To insert a line click on the Line button Click and drag on the page to draw a line of the required length To edit the line obtain the red grab handles Click and drag to change the line To finish editing click elsewhere on the page or press lt Esc gt Polygon E Polygons may be transparent or filled with a colour or pattern To create a polygon click the Polygon button Click on the page to draw vertices To finish creating the polygon either click the right mouse button press lt Esc gt or double click the left mouse button To edit the polygon obtain the red grab handles Click on an edge to add a vertex or click and drag a vertex to move it To finish editing either click elsewhere on the page or press lt Esc gt To split a straight line into two click at the point on the line where the split is required then drag the mouse CX Supervisor creates a new handle which may be moved to the desired point To remove a red handle and the vertex on which it rests click on it with the delete key held down on the keyboard Polyline To create a polyline click the Polyline button Click on the page to draw vertices To fin
123. ODBC DSN driver This is achieved by carrying out the following steps Release 3 0 Create a File DSN for the required Excel file with the following options see Chapter 12 Creating a Data Source Name file Select the Microsoft Excel Driver xls If this option does not exist you will need to install the Microsoft ODBC driver for Excel from the Excel setup Ensure that the Read Only check box is clear Load the Excel spreadsheet and create a table to access the data by creating a Named Range as follows Highlight the row s and column s area where your data resides including the header row On the Insert menu point to Name click Define and enter a name for your range Create a connection in the CX Supervisor Workspace specifying the File DSN as its source Page 217 CHAPTER 12 Databases OMRON Add a Recordset to the connection and select the Named Range which will appear in the list of available tables if the connection is live as the Table name Records in this table can now be added or modified as with any other database table Note If records are added to this type of table the Named Range will increase in size accordingly automatically The example below demonstrates a valid range selection named CustomerInvoice note the name displayed just above column A Page 218 Note Note Note Note gt Microsoft Excel Invdb_xls sal File Edit View Insert Format Tools Da
124. OF TERMS ADO AND Application Arguments ASCII Bitmap Boolean type COM Communications Driver Page 350 ADO stands for Active Data Objects and is data access technology which uses OLE DB to access data sources in a uniform way e g MS Access databases MS Excel spreadsheets and Comma Separated Variable files A logic operator used to interrogate Boolean type points AND returns TRUE if all arguments are TRUE An example of AND is that if a isa statement and b is a statement AND returns TRUE if both a and b are TRUE If one or both statements return FALSE then AND returns FALSE A software program that accomplishes a specific task Examples of applications are CX Supervisor CX Server and Microsoft Excel CX Supervisor and its development environment allows the creation and testing of new applications through a Graphical User Interface GUI Words phrases or numbers that can be entered on the same line as a command or statement to expand or modify the command or statement within the CX Supervisor script language The command acts on the argument In essence the command is a verb and the argument is the object of the verb An example of an argument in CX Supervisor is DDETerminate channel where DDETerminate is a command within the script language and channel is the argument upon which the command will act An old standard defining a set of characters Officially using only
125. OMRON CHAPTER 18 Connecting to Omron Industrial Components Communications Control Attributes Communications Control Attributes Server OMRONCXICCommunicationsControl E 3 Device E n Da ltem Po M gt Delete Array Size i Server This shows the name of the communications object to connect to the server i e OMRONCXICCommunicationsControl If you wish to use a different object make your selection from the drop down list To Add Modify or Delete an object click the Info button Selecting the Add option will open the Communications Control dialog From the list of control objects select the one to be added and click the OK button Communications Controls Select a control OMRON Cs Communications Control OMRON Cs IC Communications Control OMRON Cs OPC Communications Control OMRON Cs Superisor Communications Control Cancel Clicking the OK button in the Communications Controls dialog will open the Communications Control Properties dialog from where the details can be added or updated To edit these properties later select Modify from the Info menu CX IC COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL PROPERTIES Release 3 0 Page 275 CHAPTER 18 Connecting to Omron Industrial Components OMRON Page 276 OMRON CX IC Communications Control Properties Project IC Communication Control Settings Mame OMRON CsI CCormmunicatiansContral Project File Cancel Apply Help Name
126. Optimisations Allow internal optimisations for Output pointa Communication Packet Optimisations Use optimum Packet sizes Use specific Packet sizes Communications Failure Display Options Display bad quality values as Ht Le Server Project File Options Embed Le Serer Project within C Supervisor SA File Le Server Control Options Allow advanced script access to PLC via CxS erer control Click the settings to enable disable Internal Communication Optimisations and Communication Packet Optimisations Bad Quality values and results of calculations using bad quality values can be shown as characters This could indicate a communication failure or Bad Quality status in an OPC Server If you may need to option to edit the PLC settings in the runtime without recompiling in the developer then untick the Embed CX Server Project within CX Supervisor SR2 file option This is useful for example if it is possible the COM port driver number may change remote telephone number or network node number or even the PLC CPU model These settings can be edited by double clicking the CDM file in Explorer to edit the PLC settings without recompiling the software Allow advanced script access to PLC via CX Server control adds a new ActiveX control named CXServer no hyphen which can be accessed from any script to perform advanced PLC functions If you already have a graphical obj
127. Palette dialog Page 27 CHAPTER 2 Pages OMRON Basic colors Define Custom Colors gt cance 9 Either select a colour from the palette area or define a custom colour When the desired colour is displayed click the OK pushbutton to return to the Page Properties dialog 10 Alternatively to display an image or photograph as the background click the Background pushbutton and select the desired file and note the Display Background check box is automatically ticked Printing a Page Print Setup Before printing a page ensure that the printer has been set up correctly To check the printer settings select Print Setup from the File menu CX Supervisor displays the Print Setup dialog in response Page 28 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 2 Pages Print Setup Ei Printer Mame 5 Properties Statu Default printer Ready Type AdobePS HP Lasentet 55 Where SSHollyhp laserjet Sinn Comment Faper Orientation Size Ad T Portrait SOUICE AutoSelect Tray C Landscape The current printer selection is defined in the Name control box To alter the settings proceed as follows y a an ee 1 To change the current printer selection click the Name field and select from the list presented 2 To change the page orientation from portrait to landscape click the Landscape setting or vice versa 3 To change the paper size click the Size field and select the desired paper size
128. Press KepAscl KeyUp Keylode Shift W m Note In previous versions Event scripts could be added from the Animation Editor but the method above provides more efficiency as all event scripts are loaded just once on page initialisation Release 3 0 Page 87 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects This chapter describes the concept of projects It details procedures for creating and amending projects and the process of associating users with projects It also deals with the process of compiling a project Overview A CX Supervisor application consists of a number of pages linked together The pages may contain passive or active graphics text or animations and may be grouped together logically to form a project A project may consist of many pages or simply a single page Projects may be built and tested within the CX Supervisor development environment and run stand alone under the CX Supervisor run time environment Only one project at a time may be open for editing within the CX Supervisor development environment An attempt to open a second project forces CX Supervisor to close the current project prompting to save changes where there is unsaved information and open the second project Runtime Editions The Development package can create applications for different Runtime platforms The target system uses the same CX Supervisor Runtime software but needs a USB Dongle that matches the chosen target The
129. R2 file setting is turned off so the devices settings can be editing on the target platform Page 332 Release 3 0 OMRON APPENDIX F Obsolete Features APPENDIX F Obsolete Features This appendix provides a summary of features that are obsolete and have been removed from the standard documentation Details are included here to assist maintaining old projects still using these features These features should not be used in development of new solutions as it is likely support for the following features may and will be removed from the next or future releases Windows 98 Windows ME Windows NT This product no longer installs on Windows 98 ME or NT It is recommended to upgrade to Windows 2000 or Windows XP Professional Configuring a OPC DCOM Client PC running Windows 98 or Me I 2 See l Ensure File and Printer sharing is enabled by selecting Network from the Control Panel Add a service and click either File and print sharing for Microsoft Networks or File and print sharing for Netware Networks as appropriate WAStart 2 Start DCOMCNFG EXE e g by selecting RUN from the Start button The default location is C WINDOWS SYSTEM 3 View the Default Properties tab Ensure that the Enable Distributed COM on this computer is checked A CX Supervisor Client running on Windows 98 or ME also requires the Microsoft Remote Registry network service to be installed with the operating system and correctly configured on both th
130. Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print dialog Runtime Actions Script A script controlling the actions of an object page or project can be created and updated using the Script Editor dialog Page 152 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation The Script Editor allows script code to be created or amended which carries out the mechanics of the animation operation To access the Script Editor dialog to add an action select Execute Script from the animation list and click on the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Script Editor to modify an action select Execute Script from the animation list and click on the Modify Action button on the toolbar Refer to the Script Reference chapter 10 Objects for a list of the objects to which an Execute Script action is applicable Page Animations and Project Animations may have an Execute Script action On selection of the Execute Script action the Script Editor dialog is displayed MS Script Editor Edit Operators Control Actions Functions Special Execution Attributes Script Name Interval Trigger E vent On Regular Interval 3 Interval Time 100 Miliseconds Settings Script Code OVB Script C Supervisor Script _ Stretchable Balloons Demonstration een J Fish jumping script if FishJunmp then ELSE ENDIF if Fisha ngle 0 0 then Rang SSeS 1 Rings ibe TRUE Be endif Fishangle Fishangle 3 14 20 Lle if Fi sh ingle g
131. Release 3 0 OMRON lyi Aoz Release 3 0 CHAPTER 2 Pages Enter a title for the page in the Page Title field up to a maximum of 32 characters Add a description if required in the Page Description field Enter the co ordinates for the top left corner of the page in the Top and Left field This value must be in pixels and must be a positive integer between 0 and 2000 Alternatively click on the Full Size pushbutton to fill the runtime environment workspace Enter the height and width measurements for the page in the Height and Width fields These values must be in pixels and must be a positive integer between 0 and 2000 Click on the Centre pushbutton to centre the page to the graphics workspace Select the border style for the page from the Border Style settings The default for this is Sizeable as shown on the Page Properties dialog Changing the selection will update the shown preview To prevent the title from being displayed click the Display Title setting to remove the check mark The following change occurs in the dialog To change the display mode select Overlap Replace or Popup in the Display Mode setting Popup pages appear above all other page types Overlap pages can lie on top of other pages and Replace pages closes any pages that overlap To alter the colour of the page click in the Demo Page Window area or click on the Colour pushbutton CX Supervisor displays the Windows Colour
132. Supervisor script function attached to a graphical object on a page such as a push button The function call is UpLoadRecipe lt NameOfRecipe gt Release 3 0 Page 191 CHAPTER 10 Recipes OMRON m The other way to upload a recipe is to display the Recipe Viewer as described in the previous chapter Highlight the desired recipe from the recipe list and click the Upload Recipe pushbutton The Modify Save Upload Recipe dialog is displayed as follows Cancel Save Recipe Az Configuration Attributes Recipe Hame Coffee Irish Description Makes smooth creamy Irish style coffee Recipe Ingredients Ingredient Mame Editable Cream tml Whiskey rl Modify Target The Modify Target pushbutton allows the target value for an ingredient to be modified by means of the Modify Ingredient dialog An ingredient must already be selected from the list of ingredients for this recipe Any change to the target value is saved in the recipe definition Any number of ingredients may be modified in this way when the recipe is uploaded Selecting the OK pushbutton will upload the recipe If for some reason the recipe definition can t be found the following error message appears The recipe failed its validation checks Upload aborted Each recipe upload must be completed before another can be started If a recipe upload is already in progress when another is started the following
133. To access the Percentage Fill Vertical dialog to add an action select Percentage Fill Vertical from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Percentage Fill Vertical dialog to modify an action select Percentage Fill Vertical from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar Refer to chapter 9 Objects for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable On selection of the Percentage Fill Vertical action the Percentage Fill Vertical dialog is displayed Percentage Fill Vertical Ei E pression OK Cancel Active Expression Range Required Percentage Fill Browse iit Minimum Value Filled lo la Masimun Yale fioo Filled fioo Fill Direction f Bottom to Top C Top to Bottom To define the animation an expression consisting of a number of operators and operands which may be based on the status of a point must be entered in the Expression field The boundaries in which the object moves are inserted into the Active Expression Range Required Percentage Fill fields The Filled fields specify the percentage of the object to fill when the expression reaches its maximum and minimum values The flood fill also requires a direction This can be specified as top to bottom or bottom to top by selecting the appropriate Fill Direction setting To abort the Vertical Percentage Fill definition click the Cancel pushbutton By cl
134. VMONE akat Carine This dialog always shows the log listed in date and time order The widths of the alarm fields can be widened or narrowed as required using the 4 a l mouse to drag the column boundaries Time 09 56 15 09 56 11 The Print Contents of Alarm Log View toolbar button causes the messages in the Alarm History dialog to be printed Before printing ensure that the printer has been set up correctly The alarm log itself is simply a text file projectname UAL that may be examined or printed using any of the usual utilities available under Windows such as Microsoft Notepad When the alarm log becomes full it is copied to the alarm backup projectname UAB and a new alarm log file created This switch over system uses a quick append function for every alarm and prevents intensive write operations Release 3 0 Page 145 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation This chapter describes CX Supervisor animation and the procedures associated with the creation of a project animation page animation and object animation using the Animation Editing facility The active use of points and how points dictate animations is also described Associating Points with Actions and Events CX Supervisor provides a facility to greatly enhance the versatility of a runtime application by the use of actions and animations to execute commands and logical expressions based on specified criteria being met This can take many
135. Vannani a a aR 132 Chapter 8S Alar MS oann A Whatis an Alarm larriena didn pele atest elt drei aae 134 PATINA oO ONINO Ssa a oaneste eter ake deta a eia nee Glan cal teeta 134 Viewing the Contents of the Alarm Database ccccccccseeeeeseeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeees 136 Creating a New Alarm xiectiteko ccc icascebete Canoe le eee oaths 137 Upaating All EXISTING Alal IN es vac cine etiniu aa acta a ladda e 141 Copying an Existing Alarm Definition cccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseees 142 Deleting an Existing Alarm asrac cos centtena aiieatedsd otic dis teese cen ee eaciene heel oaderena eee 142 FFI AIIIM S eraa a sat aa sade coumeahees a a seine 142 Alarm Reporting In Runtime saiendesSexiuncsenrsacdevacarensintuacdsua cedar Sennalscasvucadensanduaiuuusuuter 143 Chapter 9 A MMA GON vissciscsssacsisccicrsactsoacsdsssseasstavassateostscasccaressan L40 Page 8 Release 3 0 OMRON CX Supervisor User Manual Associating Points with Actions and Event ccccccccceecceeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeneeenees 146 ANMWE QIO naar eters thee reac bebe ain a A a bokeh oteteo hse 146 PRUIIUIIM AAC UONNS moense eur edee Din te Rees aad tale ae Dee nae te Meek ee suk tle eta 152 Chapter 1 0 RECIPES isicing nioe ID Whar a amp i Recipe Seynin an a a a a 179 Recipe Components seiceacecerseis ccbeecdecsvvaads Menaden cat dodsantinadiauveaade Sisieedienndbaale me verales 179 Viewing Recipes in the Recipe Editor
136. Y OF TERMS CX Supervisor User Manual See also SVGA mode and VGA mode Programmable Logic Controller A point within the CX Supervisor script language that stores a value or string assigned to that point A point is used to hold a value of a predefined type Boolean Integer Text etc The contents of a point may be controlled by an object or I O mechanism such as PLC communication The contents of a point may control the action or appearance of an object or be used for output via an I O mechanism See also Boolean type Integer type point variable Real type and Text type A CX Supervisor application will consist of one or a number of pages linked together The pages may contain passive or active graphics text or animations and may be grouped together logically to form a project A project may consist of many pages or simply a single page Projects may be built and tested within the CX Supervisor development environment and run stand alone under the CX Supervisor run time environment Only one project at a time may be open for editing within the CX Supervisor development environment A type of point where the value of the point can be any number including those containing a decimal point A recipe is a set of pre defined steps used to perform a particular task A CX Supervisor project may contain zero or more number of recipes Recipes are defined in the development environment and executed or downloaded in the run time envir
137. a 1 sekund NOTE PLC en skal v re i Program eller Monitor Mode for at demo en kan virke sind mi R000700 verbunden InputO1 InputO2 und InputO3 Diese Punkte sind ebenfalls verbunden mit SliderOut Alle nderungen in SliderOut werden ausgegeben auf Datenadresse Bit 00 Bit 01 Bit 02 Bit 03 kontinuierliche berwachung der SPS Punkte mit einer Abtastrate von 1 Sekunde CX Supervisor Output punkter s rger CX Supervisor 4usqabe Punkte werden an die SPS gesendet CX Supervisor Punkt Sliderin Dieser Punkt ist ebenfalls verbunden mit IROOS aber IROO7O0 IROO 01 IROO702 and IROO FOS Die Eingabe Punkte sind IROO701 IROO7O2 und IR00703 in der SPS Eine Zustandsanderung von IROOS in der SPS Analoginstrument Bargrat und Kreis sind verbunden mit list ein Eingabe Punkt mit einer Abtastrate von 1 Sekunde NOTE Die SPS muss bei diesem Beispiel im PROGRAM oder MONITOR Modus arbeiten AUS Aus EIN Ein Espa ____ Finnish Frer A Sit01 BitO2 y BitO3 Estos puntos estan conectados al IR00700 InputO1 InputO2 y InputOS Estos puntos estan conectados a SliderOut Cualquier cambio en SliderOut se ver reflejado en el rea seleccionada Bit 00 Bit 01 Bit 02 Bit 03 Los puntos del PLC se monitorizan constantemente con un ciclo se actualizaci n de 1 segundo Los puntos de salida de CX Supervisor son e
138. ace Integer System Amount of free disk space in bytes S tG0lResources Integer System Percentage of GDI resources free OBSOLETE IN W20 AND ABOVE 5 tHighdlarns Integer System Number of active high priority alarms ml tl tee L L T L ee ed a re 4 F The typeface of the editor can be amended by selecting Preferences from the File menu This is especially useful when printing Release 3 0 Page 35 CHAPTER 3 Points OMRON Note To select a range of points click on a point to mark the start of the range and click again with the lt Shift gt key down to mark the end Note To individually select more than one point click whilst holding the lt Ctrl gt key down Note The short cut keyboard combinations for Cut Copy and Paste operations are valid within the Point Editor Highlight one or more points and type lt Ctrl gt X to cut or lt Ctrl gt C to copy use lt Ctrl gt V to paste Since the cut and copy operations store the information in the Windows Clipboard points may be pasted to another CX Supervisor application See also Chapter 3 Quick creation of many points Note If the I O type ends with and a number it is an array point with the shown number of elements Viewing Points in the Point Editor The Point Editor view of the points database can be tailored by filtering or sorting the available points Filtering the Points in the View by Group Points are separated into groups To select a
139. ach page can be selected independently from a drop down list Analyse Application i x Summary Warnings Network PLC Fage Count Comment E Total PLC Paints 36 Total Humber of PLC points E Always Updating 36 Number of PLC points constantly being refreshed 8 Inputs at 1 Sec 6 Inputs at 1 Sec 8 Inputs at 5 Sec 30 Inputs at 5 Sec E Total PLCs Number of PLCs E Total Points 36 Mumber of Ports 8 Max Points Sec 12 00 Has Points ec E Max Elements Sec 12 00 blas Elements Sec EP Maz Bytes Sec 25 00 Max Butes S ec E Total Alarms 16 Humber of Alarms E Total Pages Number of Pages E Total Regular Interval 1 Number of Regular Interval Scripts Total Graphical Objects 63 Number of Graphical Objects 8 Always Updating Byte 25 00 Always Updating Bytes Sec E Theoretical Max Band 11520 Theoretical Mas Bandwidth Bytes Ser 8 Always Updating Ue Always Updating 8 Max Bandwith Used O22 Maximum Bandwith Used Data Analysed This following information explains what data will be analysed when the Analyse Application feature is run Always Updating The total number of points that are always updating whether they are on display or not this should be kept to a minimum to reduce bandwidth use only use this if the point value is required by scripts or other actions on pages where this point is not otherwise used Release 3 0 Page 251 CHAPTER 15 Application A
140. age 77 CHAPTER 4 Objects OMRON Undo The Undo button on the toolbar allows the most recent action or actions to be undone To undo the action click the Undo button on the toolbar The number of undo operations stored by CX Supervisor for retrieval can be amended from the Preferences option on the File menu This is especially useful when constructing complex pages Mirror Image bd There are various ways of mirroring objects e Via the Mirror Horizontal and Mirror Vertical buttons on the toolbar e By selecting Mirror from the Edit menu and clicking on either Horizontal or Vertical e By clicking on a grab handle and dragging it across the opposite side Some objects like Text and Control Objects cannot be mirrored For further details of mirroring objects refer to chapter 1 Graphics Editor Orientation H gt Lines Rectangles Polygons and Polylines can be rotated To rotate an object click the Rotate button on the toolbar The Rotate Object dialog is displayed E Cancel Enter the angle of rotation in degrees in the value entry box and click the OK pushbutton Transparency MI Solid shapes polygons and text boxes can be filled with colours and patterns from the tools palette When they are created solid objects are filled with the colour already selected on the palette Further details on transparency are contained in chapter 1 Graphics Editor Group When there are a number of objects together they c
141. age 354 OMRON 2 A number of computers linked together with a central processing point known as a Server which is accessible to all computers Networks affect CX Supervisor in that further Network associated options are available if the computer is Network connected A point that is designated as non volatile 1s a point whose value is saved on disk and automatically reloaded when CX Supervisor resumes execution A logic operator used to interrogate Boolean type points which produces the Boolean inverse of the supplied argument An example of NOT is that if a is a statement and is FALSE then NOT returns TRUE If aisa statement and is TRUE then NOT returns FALSE In CX Supervisor an object can be text graphics a control a bitmap or ActiveX object as created in the development environment A complex object can exist as a combination of two or more objects of any of the above types Specifically graphical objects can be categorised as a line an arc a polygon including a square and rectangle a round rectangle an ellipse including a circle or a polyline A control is essentially a complex graphic object and is specifically either a pushbutton a toggle button a slider a trend graph a rotational gauge or a linear gauge OLE DB is the underlying database technology on which ADO relies OLE BD is designed to be the successor to ODBC The term used for constants or point variables A symbol used
142. ailable but for Text or CSV connections only one option is available namely SQL Text For convenience a facility is provided for automatically building the required SQL Text for this type of connection This facility is invoked from the Build SQL button shown below Modify Recordset Ea Recordset Properties OF ok Cancel Build SOL C TableName ServerQuey SOL Text Build 54L source SELECT FROM TablesHtst I Automatically open on connection Lock Read Only C Pessimistic C Optimistic This will bring up a dialog with a list of all valid files in the Directory specified for the Connection After choosing a file and exiting from the Build SQL dialog the required SQL Text is built In the above example the file Tables txt was chosen but this will be written as Tables txt in the SQL Text as most Providers will not accept the character because it is used as a delimiter Source The source field shows the Table name Server Query or SQL text as selected above which the Recordset is linked to Automatically open on connection If this checkbox is ticked the Recordset will be automatically opened when the Connection is opened If this is unchecked the Recordset must be open with a script command Lock The lock option enables the Recordset to be opened in either read only or read write modes there are two type of read write locks as defined below Read Only The def
143. alog can be turned off or turned back on from the Help menu Page 24 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 2 Pages CHAPTER 2 Pages This chapter explains the concept of pages The chapter covers creating amending printing and saving pages Creating a Page A project may consist of several pages but must contain at least one To create a new page CX Supervisor must currently have a project open If no project is currently open either click on the Open button from the toolbar to open a previously saved project or select New from the Project menu to create a new project Note When you first create a project CX Supervisor creates a new page for you automatically For more details concerning projects refer to chapter 6 Projects With a project open click the New Page button from the toolbar to create a new blank page An example of a new blank page is shown as follows CX Supervisor Untitled File Edit View Project Utilities Window Help BSH Peo MSAK GOS HEdS M F oO TimesNewRoman He alera ER e S RAH KN M ROCChIDAGC EAA hea J Project Scripts C Pages OPa Dy Logging For Help press F1 221 40 Z Release 3 0 Page 25 CHAPTER 2 Pages OMRON Amending a Page To amend a page it must first be open If no pages are open click the Open Page button from the toolbar A standard File Open dialog with the caption Open Page is displayed The layout and usage
144. alogs displayed vary according to the type of command being entered Points A point may be inserted into the script code in a number of ways Clicking the Browse pushbutton picking the point off the list and clicking the OK pushbutton Typing the name of the point System points form part of the points list Undo Last Action The last edit performed can be undone if required in a number of ways Selecting Undo from the Edit menu Pressing lt Ctrl gt Z in the script code text field Cut to Clipboard An area of script code can be moved to the Microsoft Windows Clipboard in a number of ways Selecting the script code to cut followed by Cut from the Edit menu Selecting the script code to cut in the script code text field and pressing lt Ctrl gt X Copy to Clipboard An area of script code can be copied to the Clipboard if required in a number of ways Selecting the script code to copy followed by Copy from the Edit menu Selecting the script code to copy from the script code text field and pressing lt Ctrl gt C Paste from Clipboard An area of script code can be copied from the Clipboard if required in a number of ways Placing the I beam cursor at the desired point in the script code field followed by Paste from the Edit menu Placing the I beam cursor at the desired point in the script code field and then pressing lt Ctrl gt V Insert Tab Code A tab character can be inserted into the
145. also Page Preview page Page Print page Page Setup page for printing Rate of change 139 Simple 139 Workspace 123 Alias Definitions 121 Alignment Manipulating objects 79 Alignment Toolbox Manipulating objects 79 Amending a Page 26 Amending a Project 89 Amending an Existing Point 45 Animation Editor About 146 Access 147 Alias definitions 121 155 Analogue Colour Change 151 166 67 Analogue Display Value 151 171 72 Analogue Edit Point Value 151 174 76 Analogue User Input 151 174 76 Blink 151 165 66 Browse 152 77 Close Page 151 32 Colour Change Analogue 151 166 67 Colour Change Digital 151 167 68 Colour palette 178 Create animation 152 78 Delete animation 148 Digital Colour Change 151 Digital Colour Change 167 68 Digital Display Value 151 170 71 Digital Edit Point Value 151 173 74 Digital User Input 151 173 74 Disable 151 168 Display Page 151 164 Display Status Text 151 170 71 Display Text Point 151 172 73 Display Value 151 Display Value Analogue 151 171 72 Display Value Digital 151 170 71 Display Value Text 151 172 73 Edit Point Value Analogue 151 174 76 Edit Point Value Digital 151 173 74 Edit Point Value Text 151 176 77 Enable 151 168 Execute Script 151 See also Script Editor Expression dialog 154 Expressions 352 Page 357 INDEX CX Supervisor User Manual Height Resize 151 161 6
146. an Old Style F Bookshelf Symbol 1 F Bookshelf Symbol 2 Bookshelf Symbol 3 S ample AabbTy z Script Western r This dialog is used to set the default font specification to be used for all text displayed on push buttons created using the graphics editor Any button can also have its font changed from the default using the relevant Wizard in the graphics editor See chapter 4 Objects Runtime Settings The Runtime Settings option is selected from the Project menu The settings discussed in the following paragraphs help to configure runtime environment applications and have no effect in the development environment Settings that affect the development environment are discussed in chapter 2 Pages Startup Conditions To open the Startup Conditions dialog select Startup Conditions from the Runtime Settings menu The dialog is displayed as follows Release 3 0 Page 103 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON Startup Conditions x General Startup Conditions M Enor E vent Loggng Enabled Cancel IY Display Main Window Maximized I Display Main Window Title Bar M Load All Pages into Memory l Dynamic Hand Cursor Enabled M Keyboard Control Enabled l Use Flat Toolbars T Use Large Touch Dialogs Communication Startup Conditions PLE Links Enabled DDE Links Enabled OLE Links Enabled Click the settings to enable disable General Startup Conditions and Communication Startup Conditions Click th
147. an be achieved by removing and replacing individual components in a system without any work needed to wire up the new pieces To illustrate the savings imagine the increase in cost if every household appliance had its own type of wall plug Eliminating customisation drastically reduces the cost of an automation system by saving money during acquisition installation and maintenance Release 3 0 Page 261 CHAPTER 16 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client OMRON Freedom of choice With the introduction of OPC compliant manufacturing automation products users are provided their due right to select and implement systems comprised of best in class components without the pain of custom interfaces This user benefit 1s sometimes referred to as freedom of choice For example both Netscape and Internet Explorer can browse the web equally well but people use the browser they like best As a result of this freedom of choice vendors will need to become more competitive and offer superior products and solutions to maintain their customers Besides freedom of choice the user also has vendor independence or freedom from a proprietary lock If the implemented control system is comprised of modules with proprietary interfaces any customer who desires to upgrade any component function of the integrated whole is entirely dependent on the vendor With OPC components only the module of interest must be upgraded and not the entire system The
148. an be moved around in a group keeping their relative position To group a number of objects select them activate the Edit menu and click on Group Page 78 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 4 Objects The selection is now regarded as one group with eight grab handles for the group rather than eight for each object the objects can now be moved together Once objects have been grouped they can be ungrouped by selecting the object activating the Edit menu and clicking on Ungroup Raise and Lower E Each new object inserted on a page is placed on top of the previous one Although they may appear to be on the same level objects can overlap so it may be necessary to raise an object so that it appears over the top of another object For further details on raising and lowering objects refer to chapter 1 Graphics Editor Alignment Objects inserted on a page can look messy unless they are aligned relative to each other CX Supervisor helps by allowing the contents of a page to align on a grid The grid can be turned on and off as required There are a number of different grid sizes available 4 8 16 32 and 64 pixels The Snap To Grid function snaps to the nearest grid To align page objects and view a grid select Grid from the View menu Select the required grid size or click on Snap to Grid to align the most recently entered objects on the chosen grid The grid can be turned off by selecting Off An example of the use
149. an every time the event occurs as per previous versions using the Animation Editor However this method 1s still supported to allow editing of old projects This difference is by design and is correct Release 3 0 Page 311 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions OMRON Q Why does CX Supervisor show different ActiveX properties to Visual Basic or Excel Properties of ActiveX controls shown in the CX Supervisor ActiveX Property Browser may differ from those seen in the Visual Basic or Excel property browser This can be for one or more of the following reasons e Both Visual Basic and Excel show their own container properties in this window as well as the object properties CX Supervisor does not show its container properties Examples of VBA container properties are Causes Validation DataSource DragIcon DragMode Height HelpContextID Index Left TabIndex TabStop Tag ToolTipText Top Visible WhatsThisHelpID Width e CxX Supervisor only shows properties with data types it can edit for example Boolean Integer Real String UserDefined and Colours Other data types 1 e Font type cannot be edited so are not displayed Also properties with multiple parameters are not listed in CX Supervisor as they cannot be edited e CxX Supervisor will show additional private object properties which Visual Basic and Excel choose not to display Q Is it possible to connect an external PLC to CX
150. and its various tools and controls Chapter 2 Pages This chapter describes the procedures involved in the creation and amendment of pages Chapter 3 Points This chapter describes the procedures involved in the creation amendment and removal of points The use of PLCs with points is also described Chapter 4 Objects This chapter describes procedures involved in the creation amendment and removal of objects Chapter 5 ActiveX Objects This chapter provides an overview of using ActiveX objects in CX Supervisor Chapter 6 Projects This chapter describes procedures involved in the creation amendment and removal of projects Chapter 7 Graphics Library This chapter describes the library of graphic objects and how to create and amend new libraries Chapter 8 Alarms This chapter describes the procedures involved in the creation and amendment of alarms Chapter 9 Animation This chapter describes the use of animations and how they can be applied to a CX Supervisor project Chapter 10 Recipes This chapter describes the creation of recipes and how they can be used Chapter 11 Data Logging This chapter describes the data logging facilities including setting up viewing and exporting Chapter 12 Databases This chapter describes the Database facilities including connections reading and writing data Chapter 13 Standard Web Pages This chapter describes the Standard Web Pages including their function co
151. animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar For a list of the objects to which this action is applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects Page 168 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation On selection of the Rotate action the Rotate dialog is displayed Expression OK pe o ooo Active Expression Range Required Aotation Minimum Walne lo Minimum Angle lo Maxinum Value 1100 Maximum Angle 360 Cancel Browse di Rotation Point f Top Lett Top Centre Top Aight Centre Lett Centre C Centre Right i Bottom Left i Bottom Centre f Bottom Right Specified Co Ords 23 Te 4735 Fix point on screen Enter an arithmetic expression in the Expression field The constraints of the rotation animation are specified in the Active Expression Range Required Rotation fields Rotation is clockwise and the angle is specified in degrees Enabling the Fix point on screen option ensures that the rotation point remains at the same location even if the object moves To abort the Rotate edit click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed Visibility Objects can be rendered visible or invisible Specify this using the Visibility dialog To access the Visibility dia
152. apply a colour to a previously created object select the object on the page and select a colour using the same method as before Note Colour may only be applied to some graphic objects It cannot be applied to embedded objects or bitmap graphics Custom Colours The colour picker displays 48 common colours along with a further 16 user defined custom colours A colour can be chosen from the common colours or the Other button can used to create a custom colour Clicking OK on the Custom Colour dialog will apply the current colour to the selected Graphic Object Clicking Add to Custom Colours will add the current colour to the custom colours list for easy re use later An example of the Custom Colour dialog is shown below Page 14 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 1 Graphics Editor Palette Basic colors Custom colors ae Red o mat 240 Green jo Detine Custom Colors gt E Lum fi 20 Blue 255 Cancel Add to Custom Colors ll SRR880 88 ll EEEREN ll ERER EE EE EE Line Style To create an object with a particular line style before selecting the object from the Tool Palette first select the line style by clicking on line style button to drop down the Line Style picker Note It is not strictly necessary to select a line style for an object before creating it however if no line style selection is made the object retains the default style of thin solid To apply a line style to a
153. appropriate number of lines per page are specified in the Number of Lines Per Page field 3 Specify a Line Terminator setting either CR Carriage Return LF Line Feed or CR LF 4 Click the OK pushbutton to accept the changes or the Cancel pushbutton to abort Event Error Messages To open the Event Error Settings dialog select Event Error Settings from the Runtime Settings menu The dialog is displayed as follows Event 7 Error Settings I High Priority Errors Cancel Automatically Display Event Error Log or P Medium Priority Errors T Low Priority Errors blasimum entries in Event Error Log 200 Set the Maximum entries in Event Error field and the Automatically Display Event Error Log on options as desired Click the OK pushbutton to accept the changes or the Cancel pushbutton to abort In the runtime environment the Event Error Log dialog can be displayed at any time Release 3 0 Page 109 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON ioj BY H 25 gt 8 o at Oo S 2 e 1907 2002 10 54 19 SystemManager Event Ce Supervisor System Start 19072002 10 54 20 fOManager Event Ce Server Project opened a 1sorlzo02 10 58 17 RecordManager Event Downloaded recipe 25 1soF 2002 10 58 55 SystemManager Event Operator logged in to C Supervisor igor izo02 10 59 32 SystemManager Event User Failed to log in to C Supervisor 1907 z002 10 59 37 SwstemManager Event User Failed to log in to Cs S5upervisor 1
154. apter 12 Creating a Read Write connection to an Excel file Connect on Application Start up The checkbox Connect on Application Start up provides the option of automatically connecting to the Database when the Runtime application is started Advanced Shows the Connection String dialog allowing the automatically generated connection string to be manually edited Release 3 0 Page 213 CHAPTER 12 Databases OMRON Testing Connections in the Development Environment A connection to a Database can be made in the Development Environment by selecting the required Connection in the Tree View and then selecting the right menu option Connect If a Connection contains Recordsets that are set to auto open these will also be opened by the Connect option If all goes well and a valid connection is made the Database Connection Icon will be adorned with a lightning bolt If not then this is probably due to an error in the Connection String Database Errors A detailed description of what type of error occurred supplied by the underlying Data Provider can be viewed by clicking that the right menu option Show Last Error Whenever an error is generated by a Data Provider a description of the error and its source will be displayed in a Dialog The Show Last Error option is specific to each Connection Example The following error was generated by the Jet Database Engine due to a typo in the
155. ar To access Blink dialog to modify an action select Blink from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar Refer to chapter 9 Objects for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable On selection of the Blink action the Blink dialog is displayed Digital E spressioni OF Cancel Colour Attributes Browse Blink Colour C dil Release 3 0 Page 165 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON Enter a Boolean expression in the Digital Expression field Arithmetic logical and relational expressions may also be entered as long as the result of the expression is zero or non zero 1 e the result equates to TRUE or FALSE When the result of the expression is TRUE the object s blinks To select a colour for the blink animation click in the Blink Colour field The Colour Palette dialog is displayed so that a colour can be supplied to the object The object blinks between its current colour and the chosen blink colour The Colour Palette dialog is described in chapter 9 Common Colour Palette Once completed click the OK pushbutton To abort the Blink operation click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Colour Change Analogue Objects can be animated so they change between a variety of colours at a variety of intervals This is achieved using the Colour Change Analogue dial
156. arching For miner Baker Intervalfcniptl 78 Mixer rotate angle Baker Intervalfcnpt 93 Miner rotatelangle 4 Haa LEI Find in Files 1 The window can be docked to any side of the screen or floated above other windows To enforce floating press lt Ctrl gt while moving the window or right click on the window title and uncheck Allow Docking Build results are shown automatically during building and remain on screen if there are errors or warnings Find results show the location including page name alarm name recipe script name object line number and animation as relevant followed by the occurrence itself Double clicking on any line opens the appropriate editor The output can be printed by selecting Print from the right mouse context menu Navigating Projects with the Workspace TA The Workspace is activated by clicking the Workspace button on the toolbar The Workspace dialog is displayed Gel WorkSpace Miel ga E Foject Scripts a Fages H H BAKERY PAG C3 Polygon 68 H Mixer C3 Polygon_165 Bees C3 Polygon 166 C4 Polygon 167 eg Group 22 vee C3 Polygon 67 C4 Polygon 47 aE flour E Polygon 3 Pases A Selecting the Pages Alarms Recipes Data Logging or Databases tab displays a list of the associated components that form part of the project Release 3 0 Page 123 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON The Workspace can be docked to any side of the screen or flo
157. ards 57 Editing Preferences 33 Ellipse Creating Editing Graphic Objects 57 Error Codes CX Server 328 Error Logging Points Point Import 52 Event Error messages 108 11 Column sorting 110 Disable updates 110 Display 109 Enable updates 110 Events 110 111 High priority errors 110 Information 111 Low priority errors 110 Medium priority errors 110 Show all events and errors 110 Exit Level 117 Page 359 INDEX CX Supervisor User Manual F FAQs 291 Fill Pattern Palette Graphics Editor 15 Filtering Points in the View via Group Point Editor 36 Filtering Points in the View via Point Type Point Editor 36 Find Points 121 122 Floating menu Runtime environment 105 Floating Menu Manipulating objects 82 Font Alarms 61 Charts 62 Default button 103 Gauges 66 69 Name 22 Pushbutton 67 Scatter graph 70 Size 23 Toggle button 72 Trend graph 75 Font Name Text Bar 22 Font Size Text Bar 22 Frequently Asked Questions 291 G Gauge Wizard See Wizard General Attributes Creating Points 39 General Preferences 34 General settings See Customising CX Supervisor General Settings Runtime Settings 103 Settings 103 General Settings Settings 103 Graphical User Interface See GUI Graphics Editor 13 24 About 13 Access 13 Bold 23 Control Bar 16 24 Fonts 17 23 22 23 Page 360 OMRON Gr
158. ared C W Blink C Style Attributes Background Colour Tithe Colour C C Frame Colour W Display Date W Display Time W Display Alarm Status W Display Column Titles W 3 D Frame I Highest Priority at Top W Display Group I Display Priority Width Date ja Time ja Group fio Priority fio Status jo Date Time Message Group Priority Status Date Time Message Group Priority Cleared Date Time Message Group Priority Acknowledged Date Time Message Group Priority Alarm Alarms are defined using the Alarm Editor refer to chapter 8 Alarms for information on using the Alarm Editor The Alarm Wizard allows entry of the alarm group filter alarm status colour codes and various style attributes The Alarm Wizard presents a preview of the alarm object which immediately updates to show the user selections as they are made Pe fon ee 1 Select the name of the alarm group by which alarm messages are to be filtered using the Group field to display the list of available groups The default selection is lt A Groups gt which displays all alarm messages To display more than one group use the wildcard character e g Group1 will include all groups starting Group 2 From the Acknowledge On Click options select the level of security that is required for acknowledgement The default is AU Users Page 60 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 4 Objects 3 From the Display Alarms from Selected Priorities options select the
159. arent Colour button on the Control toolbar and then clicking on a colour on the image you can select the colour that will appear transparent The Transparency button on the same toolbar toggles transparency on and off Resampling The Resample Pictures options available from the Edit menu can be used to reduce the file size of the CX Supervisor project and pages by intelligently re saving picture objects It is most efficient when a large source image has been resized on the page to be much smaller than the original Note resizing a previously resampled picture to much larger dimensions may cause the image to become blocky In this case it is recommended to reload the original image file and then resize resample as required Metafile Conversion to CX Supervisor Objects Picture objects with metafiles can be converted into CX Supervisor page objects This allows you to break apart the image and animate its sub parts Both Windows Metafiles wmf and Enhanced Metafiles emf can be loaded into a picture object and then converted to CX Supervisor objects To start the conversion select a picture object containing a metafile image and choose Convert to CX Supervisor Objects from the Edit menu The picture object will then be replaced with the corresponding CX Supervisor objects Note that for more complex metafiles this may take a few moments Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 4 Objects Arrow sign wim CA SUpervis or from the obje
160. array points used in multiple field associations for a particular Recordset are of the same size If arrays of differing length are used the smallest array size will be adopted as the page size Note Paging only operates on Field Associations that have the Property Type Value selected this enables you to have Field Associations with a Property Type of Name or Add associated with single points in the same Recordset without effecting the page size determined by the array points Note Paging is designed to operate at the Recordset level the concept of levels is explained in the chapter on DB Script functions If you perform a Read operation on a recordset that has paging in force then a page of records will be read into all the Field Associations connected to the Recordset In contrast to performing a read operation at the Field level which will override the page size and use the individual fields length Configuring Parameter Associations When a Recordset which is defined as a Server Query is opened the query is executed and the set of records produced The Server Query may be defined in the database as requiring parameters to be passed which allow criteria to be passed to the query Recordsets defined in CX Supervisor as Server Queries may have Parameter Associations added to the recordset Recordsets defined as a Table Name or SQL Text do not use parameters hence any Parameter Associations are ignored Parameter
161. art CX Simulator from the windows Start menu Select Create New PLC Select the required PLC Type No need to register I O gt Next Keep default Virtual Comms Unit gt Next Keep default Comm Port gt Next Create the data folder gt Finish In the work CX Simulator dialog connect to the virtual PLC Start the virtual PLC It must be started first for CX Supervisor to be able to open the device In CX Supervisor project set the PLC type as per CX Simulator or FinsGateway Set the communication type as per CX Simulator setup e g default is Controller Link Network 1 Node 10 Unit 0 When the CX Supervisor project is run communication with the virtual PLC will be established All PLC aspects of CX Supervisor will work with CX Simulator as if it were a real PLC Page 300 Release 3 0 OMRON APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions Q Why do I get Invalid Point error If this occurs on startup of the developer it can be due to a corrupt point definition Usually editing the Point and pressing OK is enough to correct the corruption If there are too many points select a large group and use the Multiple Edit function to assign some common attribute to them all e g OLE Access is Read Only This in effect edits each point also correcting the corruption If this error occurs in the Runtime is means the point has been deleted or renamed but a script or animation is still using the Point Run the Analyse Applica
162. art or all of a field and type lt Ctrl gt X to cut the text or lt Ctrl gt C to copy the text move the cursor to the desired field and type lt Ctrl gt V to paste the text Since the cut and copy operations store the information in the Windows Clipboard they may be pasted to another Wizard dialog or application Creating and Editing Graphic Objects For details on re sizing the graphic objects described in the following paragraphs refer to chapter 3 Editing Objects Arc Arcs may be transparent or filled with a colour or pattern To insert an Arc select the Arc button from the Graphic Object bar Click or click and drag on the page To edit the arc obtain the red grab handles Click and drag to change the angle subtended by the arc To finish editing click elsewhere on the page or press lt Esc gt Block Text To insert block text click the Block Text button and then click on the page Stretch the text object to resize it Standard text tools from the toolbar and the keyboard e g bold italic left justify can be used and their effect applies to the whole content of the object To edit block text double click on it A Text Editing dialog is displayed The text can then be changed as can the word wrap and border options Standard Windows cut copy and paste facilities can be used Ellipse O Ellipses may be transparent or filled with a colour or pattern To create a filled ellipse click the Ellipse button
163. as a function with infix syntax if it has two arguments e g or prefix syntax if it has only one argument e g NOT The CX Supervisor script language uses operators for built in functions such as arithmetic and logic A logic operator used to interrogate Boolean type points OR returns TRUE if any of the supplied arguments are TRUE An example of OR is that if a is a statement and b is a statement OR will return TRUE if either a and b are TRUE If both statements return FALSE then OR will return FALSE The combination and manipulation of pages containing objects within projects forms the basis of CX Supervisor More than one page can exist for each project The pages in a project provide the visual aspect of CX Supervisor corresponding to a display with the objects contained in each page providing a graphical representation of the system being monitored A Parameter Association enables values either constant or stored in a point to be passed to a Server Query A single displayable point on the screen from which a displayed image is constructed The screen resolution of the computer s Visual Display Unit VDU is defined by the number of pixels across and the number of pixels down e g 1024 x 768 Release 3 0 OMRON PLC Point variable Point Project Real type Recipe Run Time Environment SCADA Server Server Application Statement String Release 3 0 GLOSSAR
164. as follows ii ER aaudio dll alrsvc dl i a Z ShellExt Accwiz dll amddlg cll J drivers spool Acledit dll a armdnedet a JY viewers Achipry dll append ex 7 ee EI wins Advapi32 dll AppHecse gt E 546x_hbe dll Adypack all P Arp exe Filename WSS eas Files of type icon Files Cancel Release 3 0 Page 345 APPENDIX F Obsolete Features OMRON Both programs extension EXE or Dynamic Link Libraries extension DLL are listed in the Files of Type field The Browse dialog functions identically to the File Open dialog described in chapter 6 Projects except the file list offered shows icons as opposed to pages 1 2 3 1 On return to the Change Icon dialog select the required icon from those presented 2 Change the icon s label if required 3 Click the Open pushbutton to return to the Insert Object dialog 4 On return to the Insert Object dialog click the OK pushbutton to return to the current page and embed the selected object into it at the current insertion point Creating an Object From a File Creating an object from a file allows linking or embedding of objects created at sometime in the past As before select Insert New Object from the Edit menu and the Insert Object dialog is displayed Click the Create From File setting and the dialog changes to a format similar to that of the following Insert Object Fa Create New File Cancel
165. associations provide a means of supplying values to parameters whenever a Server Query is run Each required parameter defined within the query is associated with a point or constant value At the time the Query is run the current value of the point or the constant value is passed to the query Under the Development Environment the points default value is used Parameter Associations are added by right clicking the Recordset and selecting Add Parametet from the popup menu The following dialog is shown Release 3 0 Page 223 CHAPTER 12 Databases OMRON Add Parameter Parameter Properties Hame is tart Date Index li Data Type Date Time Value 3 93 Braise Use point to hold parameter value Name A unique Parameter Association name will be automatically provided This can be modified to provide a more meaningful name if required By convention this is made the same as the name of the parameter defined within the database but this is not essential Index The index is used to determine which parameter in the Query to associate the value with The index is automatically incremented for each parameter that is added to the Recordset Data Type The Data Type list will be populated with a selection of available data types The correct data type for the parameter being configured must be selected otherwise the Recordset will fail to open Use point to hold parameter value When unchecked the constant Va
166. ated above other windows To enforce floating press lt Ctrl gt while moving the window or right click on the window title and uncheck Allow Docking Project Editor E The Project Editor is activated by clicking the Project Editor button on the toolbar When activated the Project Editor may be displayed minimised at the bottom of the main CX Supervisor window Double click to view the contents of the Project Editor About the Project Editor The Project Editor provides a window into the contents of a project It lists all the pages currently comprising a project and allows for pages to be moved into or out of projects An example of the Project Editor dialog is shown as follows Project Editor Oy x All Relevant Pages a allel A Carb C Program Filest0OMRONS In Project J ENGINE C Program Files OMRON In Project HOARE C Program Filess OMAON In Project HCOOL C Program FilessSOMAON In Project HIGNI C Program Filest0OMRONS In Project HINJECT C Program Filest0MRONS In Project HSTROKE C Program Filest0MRONS In Project IGNITION C Program Filest0OMRONS In Project Index C Program Filest0MRONS In Project Displayed Loaded INFO C Program Filest0OMRONS In Project INJECT C Program Filest0 MRON In Project STROKE4 C Program Filess OMAON In Project TITLE C Program Files OMRONS In Project Displayed Loaded The Project Editor consists of a control bar and a display ar
167. ation stored in the OPC Server The Item Attributes dialog can be used to add or edit the items Note This dialog cannot be opened until at least one group is added i ITEM ATTRIBUTES The Item Attributes dialog enables you to define the attributes of each Item data point in the selected group Item Attributes x ltem Attributes Hame l Browse ltem ID Access Path DataType Long Array i Active On Startup Cancel Name This is the client name for an Item i e a point of data Item ID This is the OPC Server s name for the data If the server supports OPC item browsing facilities click Browse to browse the OPC Server to list the namespace groups and items to create the OPC Item ID Otherwise type the OPC Item ID in the format specified in the server documentation Access Path This is the full path name for the data point Consult the documentation for the server to determine the correct format Page 267 CHAPTER 16 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client OMRON Data Type From the drop down menu select the format used to record the data point information Active On Startup Checking this option will ensure the Item is active when the OPC server is started The default is checked 8 Having checked that all the parameters are correct bring control back to the Point Editor window by closing any attributes window that may be open ty 9 The application can now be run
168. ault lock is read only 1 e data cannot be changed Page 220 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 12 Databases Pessimistic Locks records when you start editing and releases the lock when Update or Cancel is called no need to worry about a conflict with other users but can cause records to be locked for long periods of time preventing other users from accessing the same records Optimistic Locked only when the Update method is called therefore changes can be made to records without creating a lock conflicts have to be catered for because someone else might have changed the record between the time you started editing and the time you called Update Note Ifthe Connection is open when a Recordset is added the Combo boxes for Table Name and Server Query will be automatically populated with valid entries for the selected Database When the Add Recordset dialog is closed an attempt will be made to open the newly configured Recordset Configuring Field Associations Field associations provide a means of connecting CX Supervisor Points with fields i e columns of data in a Recordset thus enabling data transfers to be made between Points and Records By creating a Field Association for each field in a record data can easily be read from a record in the database to its associated points and written from the points to the current record in the database Once a Recordset has been added to a Connection in the Workspace the
169. b User d 4dmin Password secreq Build Connection String If you make a mistake while editing the connection string the original string can be restored by selecting the Build Connection String button A new connection string will also be built automatically each time a change of Data Source is made Example Connection Strings Listed below are some example connections strings for the listed providers Jet Provider Microsoft Jet OLEDB 3 5 1 Data Source c dbname mdb SQL Server Provider SQLOLEDB Data Source server_name Initial Catalog dbname User Id user_id Password user_password Index Server Provider MSIDXS Data Source catalog_name DSN DSN data_source_name FILEDSN FILEDSN filename dsn MSDASQL Driver Microsoft Excel Driver xls DBQ c Database Invdb xls Release 3 0 Page 215 CHAPTER 12 Databases OMRON Data providers installed with ADO V2 0 Jet 3 51 Microsoft Jet OLEDB 3 51 For Microsoft Access databases Directory Services ADSDSOObject For resource data stored such as Active Directory this will become more important when NT5 0 is available Index Index Server MSIDXS For Microsoft Index Server B Drivers MSDASQL For existing ODBC Drivers this ensures that legacy data is not omitted Oracle MSDAORA Native Oracle driver simplifies access to existing Oracle data stores SQL Server SQLOLEDB For Microsoft SQL Server Data Shape MSDataShape For hierarchical recordsets this allow
170. bar The resultant dialog shows an overall summary and a breakdown on the number of alarms per type To exit the dialog click the Close pushbutton The Alarm Information dialog is shown as follows Alarm Summary Total Number of Alarms Number of Simple Alarms Number of Deadband Alarms Number of Rate of Change Alarms Creating a New Alarm Open the Alarm Editor dialog as described in chapter 8 Viewing the Contents of the Alarm Database To add a new alarm select the Add Alarm button from the toolbar This results in the Add Alarm dialog being displayed Cancel Browse General Attributes Alarm Marne aroup lt Default gt Priority Medium hi IY Acknowledge Box Play Sound T Auto Acknowledge Print Messages Description Alarm Type Alarm Attributes Expression Simple C Deadband C Rate of Change Alarm Messages Browse Raised alarm Raised Normal alarm Cleared Release 3 0 Page 137 CHAPTER 8 Alarms OMRON Once all the information has been provided for the new alarm selecting the OK pushbutton commits the new alarm to the alarms database whilst the Cancel pushbutton aborts this add operation Note The short cut keyboard combinations for Cut Copy and Paste operations are valid within the Add Alarm dialog Highlight part or all of a field and type lt Ctrl gt X to cut the text or lt Ctrl gt C to
171. by clicking on the Run Project button in the toolbar The CX Supervisor Point will now be connected to the OPC Server and can be used like all other CX Supervisor points i e to drive animations in alarm expressed in recipes for data logging etc Using with Omron s CX Server OPC l 2 3 4 5 Note that the Omron OPC server discussed is supplied as part of the CX Server OPC product Omron s OPC Server configuration is described in the CX Server OPC manual While launched the CX logo is displayed in the system tray For step 7 1 a i the correct Server Name is Omron OpenDataServer 1 For step 7 1 c i the Item ID should be the name of the point in the CX Server project CDM file configured in the server The Access Path is not used and may be left blank During step 9 the Omron OPC Server logo is displayed momentarily as the server starts Page 268 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 17 Connecting to a remote CX Supervisor application CHAPTER 17 Connecting to a remote CX Supervisor application This chapter explains how to connect multiple CX Supervisor applications together to form a distributed solution Point data from one application can be shared directly with other CX Supervisor applications across the PC network Depending on the requirements there are many reasons and topographies for interconnecting CX Supervisor applications Two Tier Client Server or Master Slave One application is configured as a S
172. case The user added should have Administrator rights on the local PC If not it may be necessary to add user groups INTERACTIVE and NETWORK as well b From the Applications tab configure the properties for required applications e g SCS OpenDataServer and OpcEnum On the Security tab add the required users to each of the Custom Permissions The users added should have Administrator rights on the local PC If not it may be necessary to add user groups INTERACTIVE and NETWORK as well Page 290 Release 3 0 OMRON APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions The appendix list some FAQs and of course their answers Q What is the maximum limit of number of points For Machine Edition projects it is possible to create an application with up to 500 user defined points In theory each of these could be an array of 1024 elements totalling 512 000 addresses For PLUS edition there is a limit of 8000 user defined points totalling over 8 million addresses if using arrays In practice the communications medium number of active points and their frequency of updates determine the maximum limit See What is the maximum limit of communication updates Q What is the maximum limit of communication updates The charts below show the number of simultaneous reads per second depending on each PLC and Network used The maximum number of CX Supervisor points depends on the update ra
173. cation s either requesting or sending point values For example a value could be entered into a cell in Microsoft Excel which would update a CX Supervisor point DDE Client Points A DDE client point sends data to or requests data from an external server application This chapter explains how to create points that make use of the CX Supervisor DDE Client capabilities In order for data to be transferred between a point and a server application the point must uniquely identify the application and the data that is to be used in the transfer DDE applications use a three tiered identification system to distinguish themselves from other DDE applications An application name is at the top of the hierarchy the application name refers to a server application e g EXCEL A topic name further defines a server application e g for Microsoft Excel the topic would define the worksheet to be used e g SHEET1 XLS a server can support one or more topics Finally each topic can have one or more item names which uniquely identifies a data item within a topic 1 e R1C1 or a cell name reference identifies a single cell within a Microsoft Excel worksheet Example A DDE Client point named DDE1 that connects to Microsoft Excel worksheet Sheet1 xls and cell R1C1 is created li a ae 1 Select the Add Point button from the Point Editor toolbar The Add Point dialog is displayed 2 Enter DDE1 in the Point Name fiel
174. cationsControl If you wish to use a different object make your selection from the drop down list To Add Modify or Delete an object click the Info button You will only need 1 communications object per OPC server but note you can connect to more server at a time if desired using this setting This field is initially blank and an OPC control should be added Select the Add option which will open the Communications Control dialog From the list of control objects select the one to be added and click the OK button Communications Controls X Select a control OMAON Cs Communications Control OMRON C IC Communications Control Cancel OMRON Ces OPC Communications Control OMRON Cs Supermisor Communications Control Note On adding the Communication Control Properties dialog is automatically shown as detailed below To edit these properties later select Modify from the Info menu Group Select the Group containing the required item from the dropdown list To Add Modify or Delete a Group click the Info button Items The Items within the selected Group are listed The Item Attributes dialog can be used to add or edit the items To Add Modify or Delete an Item click the Info button Selecting the Add or Modify option will open the Items Attributes Release 3 0 OMRON Release 3 0 CHAPTER 16 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client window from where the item details can be added or updated Array Size Enter the
175. ce Expressions and Colour Cancel Scaling Title Font Scale Fort Time Font PO Browse PO Browse PO Browse EEEn a oe C PO Browse The Wizard allows entry of Configuration Attributes and assignment of line colours and expressions ly 2i Sous Page 74 l 2 U 4 N Enter a title for the graph in the Trend Graph Title field Enter the frequency of data sampling in the Sample Rate field in this example it is every five seconds Enter the period displayed by the graph at any one time in the Visible Time Span field Enter the size of buffer for stored data of samples in the Total Time Span field Enter the number of samples on the X axis in the Time Label Every field Click on the background colour and select the required colour from the palette Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 4 Objects 7 Toggle the Display Time Labels Display Slider and Value Bar settings as desired Enabling the Value Bar allows the graph to be clicked during runtime to display the data value at that point 8 Enter an arithmetic trace expression for each point or select an expression via a Browse pushbutton An existing point can also be associated with the Wizard by dragging the point directly from the Point Editor See chapter 3 Points regarding adding a new point and dragging from the Point Editor 9 Change the fonts used for the Graph Title Scale and Time axis via t
176. ceive details of the required Registry changes Q How does Sleep work The CX Supervisor Sleep function is designed to create a short pause in script execution The parameter specifies the duration of the pause in milliseconds For example lt statements A gt Release 3 0 Page 309 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions OMRON lt statements B gt Sleep 100 lt statements C gt In this example statements B will begin executing immediately when statements A complete though statements C will not begin execution until 100ms after statements B have completed Note 1 In a well designed truly event driven system use of the Sleep statement should never be required Always consider if the statements after the Sleep should be in their own script executed when a Condition occurs Note 2 The Granularity or intervals differs between Operating Systems In Windows NT and 2000 expiration is checked every 10ms so Sleep 100 actually pauses for 100 to 109 99 milliseconds depending on when it was started For Windows 98 and ME the granularity is 55ms so Sleep 100 actually pauses for 110 2 times 55 to 164 99 milliseconds nearly 3 times 55 For this reason Sleep statements can act differently on different Operating Systems making the application OS dependant Note 3 Sleep should never be used as a delay for timing processes for the following reasons The actual time delay depends on the OS There is always a
177. character respectively Find The project can be searched to find occurrences of text or a point name It can also be used to search for text within script e g to find where a text message is generated from Release 3 0 Page 121 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON The areas which can be searched are The current page All pages Project scripts Alarms Recipes gt gt gt gt The project which includes Project scripts Alarms and Recipes By default all areas are searched i e Project and Pages To perform a Find operation Py ae re 1 Select the Find button on the toolbar or Find from the Edit menu L 2 Type the text to find in the Find What field or select a previous entry from the drop down list The Browse pushbutton can be used to select an item 3 Select the area to search Project amp Pages searches all areas 4 Choose the required options Output to pane 2 results in pane 1 to be saved for future use 5 Press the Find pushbutton to start the search or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation Find Find what miser Search Project amp Pages Cancel F Match whole word only Browse Match case T Output to pane 2 All occurrences of the text in the selected areas is shown in the Output window Output Window The output window shows output from the Build and Find functions Page 122 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects Ea Output Of x Se
178. click the Print pushbutton Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print dialog Alarm Reporting In Runtime An alarm condition which occurs during runtime is brought to the attention of the operator There are a variety of options available in the way alarms are reported These options are configured in the development environment During runtime there are essentially four ways of examining alarm messages the Alarm Acknowledge dialog the Current Alarm dialog the Alarm History dialog and the Alarm Object The Alarm Object is a graphical object which displays alarm messages in a similar way to the alarm status viewer Refer to chapter 4 Objects for an explanation of how to configure an alarm object to filter alarm messages by group name Alarm Acknowledge Whenever an alarm is raised during a runtime application a confirmation dialog is optionally displayed requesting acknowledgement of the alarm The dialog shows the alarm message priority and the date and time the alarm was raised Click the Acknowledge pushbutton to close the dialog Alarm Alarm Message i red paint use the reset button Alarm Occurred at 28 05 98 10 18 25 Medium Cancel Pricrity Alarm messages are queued so that as each message is acknowledged the next in the queue becomes visible If a new alarm occurs which has higher or equal priority the details are updated to show this newer more important alarm first The dialog di
179. cript or action ever runs Theoretical Max Bandwidth Bytes Sec This is a measure of all the points updating all the time and all points on display for the worst case page in the project This figure should be kept as low as possible and within the bandwidth of your network Total ActiveX Objects This is a count of the total number of ActiveX objects used in the project this includes objects which are used more than once Using ActiveX is a great way of adding advanced functionality to your application but it carries the risk that the component used may not be as reliable as required Total Alarms A count of the total defined alarms on the system this is limited in ME so this gives an idea of if the limit is being approached Many alarms also make an application harder to manage and maintain so keep this number as low as possible and avoid unnecessary alarms Total DDE Points DDE is an antiquated technology and is prone to problems especially when used with non English characters Any DDE points should be removed and an alternative used instead Total Graphical Objects The total number of objects used on all the pages in the project The more objects that are in the project the slower larger it is on disk and the longer it may take to re draw a page This is especially key when using an IPC where space and power are at a premium Total Memory Points The total number of points that are not on an external device These are the most effic
180. ct ID The object ID e g Text_1 is optional but can be supplied if specific text requires different translations for different objects For example Run in English could be used as a verb on a button and as static text for a run number In this case different translations can be supplied depending on the object 4 Get these files translated An editor like Notepad can be used to enter the translated text in the second column i e in between the quotes after the first comma 5 Copy the translated files back to the application directory The runtime should now automatically use these files Note Titles of pages cannot be translated If necessary the page title can be hidden in the Page Properties dialog and custom title using a static text object added which does support automatic translation Note Any text that includes a quote character cannot be stored so is automatically converted to single quote character Translations must also include single quote characters Note Any newline characters will be converted to n so that each translation always appears on one line in the file Translations should also include the n characters and never include carriage returns part way through the translation Configuring Windows for Language Support Windows XP Being the most modern operating system language support provided by Windows XP is the best If you are considering a Multilingual application this operatin
181. ct group with a Graphics Libary rotate animation applied to the arrow Limitations Metafiles contain a number of types of records for example Poly and Line Some of the less common metafiles or those that simply have no suitable representation in CX Supervisor are skipped during the conversion The result of this is that the CX Supervisor object group created may not look identical to the source metafile image Linear Gauge jy A Gauge provides a display of operational values Click the Linear Gauge button then click or click and drag on the page to insert the gauge To edit a Linear Gauge object double click on it The Gauge Wizard dialog is displayed as follows Release 3 0 Page 65 CHAPTER 4 Objects OMRON Gauge Style O Cancel l Browse Configuration Attributes Scale Font Gauge Title Exs upervisor Gauge Expressions Minimum Gauge Value jo Maximum Gauge Value ho Minor Display Urita io Major Display Unita jo Bar lndicator Colour a I Auto Size Fonts HHUA Title Font Style Attributes P Display Minor Units W Display Major Units Style Specitic Attributes Display Horizontal W Display Minor Ticks W Display Major Ticks W 3 D Frame The Gauge Wizard dialog allows entry of the Gauge Style Configuration Attributes Style Attributes and Style Specific Attributes fields To select a style click on an option from the
182. ctiveX controls simply click on the control to select it The values of the previous object will be replaced with those of the new selection Page 84 Release 3 0 OMRON an Properties Back Colour Borders tyle Title FontColour TithePosition CommeS erer ame PLCN ame ltem ame Updater ate Displayh ajar icks DisplayMinorT icks Displayh ajorL nits DisplayM nor nits Majorlickinterval Minorlickinterval Ming augey alue ha sels sn ed alte Actives Property Browser OMAON CK nobControll CHAPTER 5 ActiveX Objects 12632256 1 Raised U U Top Uniritialiged Not Set Hot Set 1 True 1 True 1 True hi 1 True L b 0 100 property Displayh ajorUnits In addition to editing properties with the Property Browser many ActiveX controls support their own custom Property Pages These may be accessed in design time by either double clicking the control or right clicking the control and selecting Properties from the Object s popup menu Tooltip Text Graphics Library Chrl L OMRON Cs 7 Segment Control Object Properties About Help Convert Release 3 0 Page 85 CHAPTER 5 ActiveX Objects OMRON Reading and Writing Properties at Run Time ActiveX properties can be read and written at runtime for example to change values or colours as required This can be achieved using the CX Supervisor script functions GetProperty and PutProperty or alternative
183. cts to which this action is applicable On selection of the Resize Width action the Resize Width dialog is displayed Resize width Expression oK l Cancel Active Expression Range Required Width Browse Minimum Walue lo Minimum Width jo Maximum alue 1100 Maximum width 1180 Justification ie Left Centre i Right Page 160 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation To define the animation an expression consisting of a number of operators and operands which may be based on the status of a point must be entered in the Expression field The boundaries in which the object moves are inserted into the Active Expression Range Required Width fields The Maximum Width specifies the required width in pixels of the object when the result of the expression reaches the Maximum Value The Minimum Width specifies the required width in pixels of the object when the result of the expression reaches the Minimum Value A value within the maximum and minimum values results in a proportionate width between the minimum and maximum widths The resizing also requires an anchor and direction in which to stretch or shrink This can be specified as the left of the object right of the object or centrally to the object by selecting the appropriate Justification setting To abort the Resize Width definition click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in cha
184. d Validation Code Recipe validation code is CX Supervisor script code which is used to check point values before downloading a recipe Download A recipe is downloaded during runtime This process involves identifying the appropriate recipe and executing the validation code if any exists The download is complete when each ingredient has set its point to the target value Release 3 0 Page 179 CHAPTER 10 Recipes OMRON Viewing Recipes in the Recipe Editor The Recipe Editor allows the creation editing copying and deletion of recipe definitions To use the Recipe Editor CX Supervisor must currently have a project open If no project is currently open select Open from the Project menu to open a previously saved project or select New from the Project menu to create a new project To open the Recipe Editor dialog click the Recipe Editor button on the toolbar Display the Recipe Editor as described in the previous chapter An example of the Recipe Editor dialog is shown below Access Level Validation Script e5 Coffee American Coffee British 5 Coffee European m4 Coffee Irish Recipes are displayed in three columns Recipe Access Level and Validation Script Recipes are usually listed in alphabetical order by recipe name although the ordering can be changed so that the entries are listed according to any of the three column titles For example to see the recipes listed alphabetically by securit
185. d 3 Set the V O Attributes setting to DDE and click on the Setup pushbutton The DDE attributes dialog is displayed DDE Attributes DDE Attributes Server Hame Excel Cancel Topic Hame Sheet als ltem Hame R1 Ci Array SIze 4 Enter Excel in the Server Name field This is the name of the external DDE server application Page 336 Release 3 0 OMRON APPENDIX F Obsolete Features Enter Sheet1 xls in the Topic Name field This is the required topic in this case it is a Microsoft Excel worksheet named Sheetl xls It is possible to specify a specific topic for instance in Microsoft Excel to specify a sheet within a book a colon is used to delimit the information e g Book1 sheet3 xls Enter R1C1 in the Item Name field This refers to the item name Enter 1 in the Array Size field Click the OK pushbutton to accept the settings in both the DDE Attributes dialog and the Add Point dialog Note Itis not necessary to give DDE Client Points DDE access via the Advanced dialog this field is only used in the creation of DDE Server Points If the DDE Access Read Write setting is set ON this point s value would then be exposed to change by external DDE server application s which may not always be desirable This process is repeated for any further DDE data transfers that are required DDE Server Points A DDE server po
186. d CX Supervisor version and confirming all characters are correctly shown Install the new CX Supervisor version and load the old project Open each page and select File menu Save Page to force the pages to be written in the new Unicode format 4 Select Project menu Save to force the project to be written in the new Unicode format and then run the project to recompile the application 5 Test the application fully in all supported languages and by entering text from different Locales Release 3 0 Page 247 CHAPTER 14 Multilingual Features OMRON Data Log Viewer The Data Log Viewer also supports the 16 runtime languages defined above The selected language can be dynamically changed from the Data Log Viewer options menu Standard Web Pages The Standard Web Pages offer the choice of 5 languages English French German Italian and Spanish The selected language can be dynamically changed from the Settings page within the web browser Adding Unsupported Runtime Languages Although an impressive number of runtime languages are supported you may require a language not listed A developer can easily add support for further languages to the CX Supervisor runtime 1 2 3 1 Copy the file English Ing in the installed application folder default is C Program Files Omron CX Supervisor and rename the copy with the language name e g American lng 2 Translate the text between quotes Note that fo
187. d on the CX Supervisor CD Trajexia Devices Trajexia devices are part of Omron s range of Motion Controllers Points are addressed in a similar fashion to points on a PLC To read or write table memory use the prefix T followed by the address For example to access address 1000 in table memory use the data location T1000 VR memory is addressed in a similar fashion but with the prefix VR For example to read address 500 the format is VR500 If a point in VR memory is configured as type IEEE float then all values will be rounded to integers since the communication protocol doesn t currently support floating point addressing of this memory area The following example describes how to read and write Trajexia TJ1 data in a CX Supervisor application It assumes that both CX Supervisor and the TJ1 driver are already installed on a user s PC Preparation Connect a TJ1 motion controller to an Ethernet network Setting up the points 1 Start CX Supervisor Release 3 0 Page 97 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON 2 Either create a new CX Supervisor project or open an existing project 3 Use the toolbar to select the Device Setup dialog and press the Add button 4 Select TJ1 Device as the device type and give the device an appropriate name A network of Ethernet should be automatically selected Ti x Device Hame My TJ Settings Network Type Ethernet Settings Commen
188. d the best responsiveness Release 3 0 Page 279 CHAPTER 19 Best Practices OMRON It is important to design the PLC program and SCADA application together This will naturally help create arrays of information and optimise communications allowing CX Server to collect data in the most efficient manner Consider the examples in the following 2 figures PLC Memory Page 1 1 sec Page 1 5 sec Page 2 1 sec Page 1 1 sec Page 1 5 sec Page 2 1 sec Page 1 1 sec Page 1 5 sec Page 2 1 sec Figure 1 Bad grouping example In Figure 1 we see the PLC Programmer has arbitrarily chosen to group data by its format Integers then BCD then Floats or even worse not at all When the SCADA is written this data is used by different pages and different update rates The different colours are to indicate that each block must be read individually totalling 9 communication requests which could be for as few as 9 memory addresses Page 280 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 19 Best Practices PLC Memory 1 sec Page 1 a 5 1 sec Page n Figure 2 Good grouping example However in Figure 2 we see the PLC Programmer and SCADA developer have reorganised the memory now there are only 3 blocks which would be the same for up to 3000 memory addresses This is clearly far better than just 9 memory addresses with 9 communication requests To achieve this design your application using the following rules
189. depends on your operating system so see your Microsoft documentation for details l2 dss 1 Locate the drive and directory where the desired page is stored 2 Select the desired page from the list presented 3 Click the Open pushbutton to load the page Note Loading a page does not automatically make it part of a project It is therefore perfectly feasible to load and edit pages from other projects Use the Project Editor to attach a page to a project For more details concerning projects refer to chapter 6 Projects The loaded page may now be edited as required using the CX Supervisor editing tools Defining the Properties of a Page A page has certain attributes or properties These properties may be viewed and edited in two ways The simplest way to access the properties of a page is to double click with the left mouse button in the background area of the page This causes CX Supervisor to display the following Page Properties dialog x Fage Properties Fage Title E ritither Page Description Border Style Cancel Colour Background OF IY DisplayTitle Display Background x Size Position Attributes Top E Height 420 Left jo width G40 Display Mode f Overlap C Replace C Popup C None Thin C Thick Sizeable Centre Full Size Keep Page in Memory The Page Properties dialog allows the viewing and editing of various attributes Page 26
190. ding Alarms toolbar button unconditionally acknowledges all outstanding alarms Any unacknowledged alarms become acknowledged This has no effect on alarms that are already acknowledged The Print Contents of Alarm Status View toolbar button causes the messages in the alarm status dialog to be printed Before printing ensure that the printer has been set up correctly Alarm History The occurrence of an alarm condition and any subsequent change of state is recorded in the alarm history log Alarm messages recorded in the log can be displayed using the Alarm History dialog The Alarm History dialog can be accessed in a variety of ways and is dependant on the setup of the runtime application Some applications may allow access to the dialog via the context sensitive floating menu whilst others may allow access via a pushbutton Refer to chapter 6 Projects or chapter 9 Animation as appropriate The Alarm History dialog is as follows Page 144 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 8 Alarms fj Alarm History Miel x Date and Time Message Priority Status 27 06 98 09 05 26 Opened CAS SMACSCSY 0Beta Demos 270698 09 07 44 Closed Alarm Log 27 06 98 09 08 44 Opened CAS YSMACSSCSY 0Beta Demos 270698 09 08 54 Closed Alarm Log 2706 98 09 09 06 Opened CAS SMACSCSY 20Beta Demos 270698 09 11 27 Closed Alarm Log 2005 98 10 11 18 Opened CAS SMACSSCSY 0B eta Demos 200598 10 15 08 Closed Alarm Log SOUR AOO 101672 Omened CACYOMACKOCO
191. directory called C CX Supervisor Project Data Logging will be created to hold the data log files Data Logging Files Each Data Set has its own set of files The following conventions have been adopted in order to identify the various files and add time and date information Data Log files are assigned the file extension dlv Data Log Values and the format of the filename is lt Data Set Name gt lt Time Stamp gt dlv The Time Stamp is in the format YYYY MM DD HHP where YYYY Year in the form 1999 MM Month in the form 01 January DD Day of the month in the form 01 31 HH Hours in the form 00 23 Daylight time saving is automatic For example Data Set 1 Miller 1999012015 dlv A new log file will be created automatically whenever the preceding file has expired the timestamp The timestamp is also used to distinguish between files in the same Data Set The time period for each file is determined by the options selected when the Data Set was created The minimum time period for a Data Set file is one hour commencing on the hour Page 198 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 11 Data Logging Note Do not rename any log files while they are in the Data Logging directory or the File Management System will not work correctly The File Management System relies on the strict format of the Data Log files to determine which file to open as Live and which file s to delete during purging and also for performing previous nex
192. download No permanent change is made to the recipe definition itself Release 3 0 Page 189 CHAPTER 10 Recipes OMRON The Save Recipe As pushbutton displays a simple dialog prompting for a name to use for the new recipe Save Recipe As EI Recipe Mame l Cancel Clicking the OK pushbutton creates a new recipe with the name specified Choosing the Cancel pushbutton aborts the save operation A recipe created using this dialog is added to the available list of entries displayed in the recipe dialog The newly saved recipe is also available in the development environment using the Recipe Editor Note that it is possible to change the name of an existing recipe in runtime simply by typing a new name in the Recipe Name field of the Modify Recipe dialog and then clicking the OK pushbutton The re named recipe appears in the available list of entries displayed in the Recipes dialog and is also available in the development environment using the Recipe Editor wl To download an existing recipe highlight the recipe from the recipe list and select the Download Recipe button from the toolbar See chapter 10 Downloading a Recipe for more information t To upload an existing recipe highlight the recipe from the recipe list and select the Upload Recipe button from the toolbar See chapter 10 Uploading a Recipe for more information g Click the Print Recipe toolbar button to send a copy of the recipe to the printer See chapter 10
193. e Page scripts are concerned with manipulating points and graphical objects that are used or included within that page Actions cannot refer to graphical objects that appear in other pages In other words page scripts are used to drive a number of actions on the occurrence of a particular event An example of page script code is as follows Release 3 0 REM move the car and transport IF start THEN Position position speed ENFIF REM if the car is at the start then reset the REM position and reset the car colour IF position lt OTHEN position 800 POLYGON 11 colour dark grey ENDIF REM setup the paint spray colour IF position lt 300 position gt 400 amp amp changepaint THEN IF paintblue THEN POLYGON 34 colour dark blue ENDIF IF paint green THEN POLYGON 34 colour Dark green ENDIF IF paintred THEN POLYGON 34 colour red ENDIF IF paintpurple THEN POLYGON 34 colour purple ENDIF IF paintyellow THEN POLYGON 34 colour yellow ENDIF IF paintwhite THEN POLYGON 34 colour white ENDIF Page 149 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON ENDIF Refer to the Script Language Manual for explicit details regarding the construction and syntax of script code 10 3 Runtime Actions describes the creation of script code using the Script Editor The script is defined using the Execute Script entry in the Animation Editor list Objects One object or a selection of objects defined as a
194. e Add Field Link dialog Add Database Link Dialog The Add Database Link dialog show below is show when the Add Db Link menu option is selected from the Data Log editor and the identical Modify Database Link dialog when the Edit menu is selected Add Database Link x Database Link Link Mame DBLink2 Cancel Connection CoV Recordset Dataset Sample Rate Change Interval 30 Seconds M Start Logging on Application Startup Page 208 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 11 Data Logging Link Name For convenience a unique Database Link name is created automatically This can be changed to give a more meaningful description if required Connection Select the Database Connection to link to from the list showing configured Database connections Recordset Select the Recordset to create a link to from the list showing Recordsets configured in the selected Connection Sample Rate Select whether field links defined within this Database Link are logged when their expression changes or on a regular interval for example every 30 seconds Start Logging on Application Startup When unchecked logging must be started and stopped using script commands When checked the logging of all associated fields starts automatically when the application is started Add Field Link Dialog The Add Field Link dialog show below is show when the Add Field Link menu option is selected from the Data Log
195. e Device Type field e g ESAF AH See also Chapter 14 for details on other models Clicking the Setup pushbutton results in the Device Type Settings dialog being displayed allowing the device type of the PLC to be configured Release 3 0 Page 91 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON i Device Type Settings CS1G Note The possible settings for PLC configuration depend upon the type of PLC selected this applies also to the Read Only and Timer Clock fields On completion click the OK pushbutton to continue or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation Values specified may be set as default by clicking the Make Default pushbutton A network may be specified for the selected PLC by selecting from the Network field The networks available are dependent on the device type selected Clicking the Setup pushbutton results in the Network Settings dialog being displayed Network Settings SYSMAC WAY EG EHS SoueE dales aA lt on a Kaa Page 92 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects The Unit Number is the identifier for the network being configured The Destination Network Address and Destination Node Number identify the connection point to the network A PLC can be selected to act as a gateway to the PLC being edited this list is restricted to the PLCs contained in the current project Selecting the Driver tab results in the Driver Configuration view being displayed this part of the Network Settin
196. e OK pushbutton to accept the settings or the Cancel pushbutton to abort When Keyboard Control is enabled a focus rectangle becomes visible around the currently selected object The cursor keys and lt Tab gt key can then be used to navigate around the selectable objects on a page Once an object is selected certain actions can then be applied depending on the object s type The most common action is to simulate a left mouse button click The following list shows all the possible facilities with Keyboard Control enabled Page 104 Moving Around Selectable Objects Using Cursor Keys The cursor keys can be used to move around the objects in the respective direction With an object selected 1f the right cursor key is pressed then the closest object is selected from within an area bounded by lines drawn diagonally upwards and diagonally downwards and to the right from the centre of the object If no object is found then the current object remains selected A similar rule also applies when using the left cursor key and the up and down cursor keys Note Selectable items must have a left mouse button event defined or have a default action Moving Around Selectable Objects Using lt Tab gt Key The lt Tab gt key can be used to move around all the objects in the order in which they are drawn this can be varied using the raise object and lower object editing facilities The lt Shift gt lt Tab gt key can be used to move
197. e dialog to modify an action select Enable Disable from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar For a list of the objects to which this action is applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On selection of the Enable Disable action the Enable Disable dialog is displayed Enable 7 Disable x Digital E pression Ok ptei o ooo Enable Disable State Enable while TRUE Disable while FALSE C Disable while TRUE Enable while FALSE Cancel Browse PRE To specify a change in the enabled disabled state of an object enter a Boolean expression in the Digital Expression field Non Boolean expressions may be entered as long as the result is TRUE or FALSE Whether the object is enabled or disabled when the expression is TRUE is chosen with the Enable Disable State settings Once completed click the OK pushbutton To abort the Enable Disable operation click the Cancel pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Rotate An object can be rotated about its centre Specify this using the Rotate dialog To access the Rotate dialog to add an action select Rotate from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Rotate dialog to modify an action select Rotate from the
198. e e 103 RUNM SECUN niari tevere adelante dasteliacnaem edema tadsectet conte bennattds 114 Release 3 0 Page 7 CX Supervisor User Manual OMRON EI OVC lds teot tatoo dead a a a a a uation demanlaecuentale 117 Compiling and R nning a Project anesan naonana a aiioe 118 Running a Project with CX SiMUIator cccccccecccseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeaeeeeaes 119 Save RUNUME AS sirpis aa a eaa touted AEE 119 Create Runtime Install DISC cccccccccccseeceececeeeeceeecceeceueeceueessueeseusessueesaaes 120 Project IMOrmatiO Merari a a a a A T 120 Alas DeNNtONS aaan a a a a a a T 121 E o ee dee E E EA AA TE EE E E A ae mown E eee 121 OUTDUE VVINGOW craps e a a N A 122 Navigating Projects with the WoOrkSpPace ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeseeeeeeees 123 PTOJOCCE GOR orercgeiee inne aa a a acon tate durations 124 Frinting trom the Project Edito ranneke a a a eee ee 126 Navigating Pages using Workbook Mode cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeneeeseeeeeeeeeeees 126 USING Full Screen Mode frase ceo sccuces ia suhesscediawediiuddcadsesetwediixestauedievatideid paula satandes 127 Chapter 7 Graphics Library ccccccccsssssssssssscccccssssessssees L28 OV OR VIOW dieses cette erect a aie acetic ea ade a tee even tect eels 128 Graphics LIDI Agee Rene ONE eet aR Ras ee ve O 128 Manipulating QODICClS west ed a acs s ede ue codes snl ele E was ede esac ierean ate 130 Printing the Graphics LIBA
199. e from different vendors to be used together Based on Microsoft s OLE now ActiveX COM component object model and DCOM distributed component object model technologies OPC consists of a standard set of interfaces properties and methods for use in process control and manufacturing automation applications The ActiveX COM technologies define how individual software components can interact and share data Backed by Microsoft s NT technology OPC provides a common interface for communicating with diverse process control devices regardless of the controlling software or devices in the process The goal of the standard is Plug and Play a concept developed by Microsoft and a number of other companies a few years ago By using a standard way of configuring computer hardware and software interfaces automatically a device will easily connect to another and immediately work without the need for lengthy installation procedures or complex configuration Instead of having to learn how to use 100 or more custom toolkits users will only have to learn one set of tools because all OPC drivers will work the same way OPC s purpose is to compel the automation industry suppliers to push all device drivers toward a standard form Essentially OPC defines a common interface that permits interface development work to be performed once and then easily reused The OPC standard requires hardware suppliers to provide front line data collection and distribution Th
200. e maximum that the Windows OS supports and are correctly installed on the PC We have successfully tested eight Q How do I create Reports and HTML reports CX Supervisor provides a simple yet powerful report generation facility Using the same Points Substitution format a text based template file may be used to generate a report Good formats are TXT RTF and HTML Binary formats like Word DOC can be problematic although RTF can usually be used in these cases These generated files may then be viewed or distributed using a file server or web server Note that although information may be textual or graphical in nature these reports are intended for non real time output of data only and not for monitoring or control See documentation for GenerateReport script function for more information and the Coffee Tutorial Step 12 in the CX Supervisor Getting Started Manual See gt How do I make an HTML report update and refresh automatically Q How do make an HTML report update and refresh automatically CX Supervisor supports the generation of dynamic text and HTML reports from a static template see GenerateReport script function for details However Web Browsers views all pages as static pages There is a very simple HTML trick that will force the browser to reload or Refresh the HTML report that would then show any updates assuming GenerateReport had been called again e g On Condition when the data changes To an
201. e most recent messages are displayed in preference to older messages The Alarm Sound pushbutton allows the selection of an audible warning which are heard when an alarm is raised The Open Waveform File dialog is shown below Release 3 0 Way coh eceveUbetademos Open Waveform File Ea File Hame Directories DK SCSV20Beta 4 Bakery CG Balloon i hd Play 3 Comms DDE a ma List Files of Type Drives waveform file wary Sc Network Cancel a Page 135 CHAPTER 8 Alarms OMRON Choosing a waveform file with this dialog does not in itself cause the warning sound to be heard when an alarm is raised To hear the audible warning for any alarm the Play Sound setting in the alarm definition must be ticked Also the PC on which CX Supervisor is running must be equipped with a suitable sound card and audio capability Viewing the Contents of the Alarm Database To open the Alarm Editor dialog click the Alarm Editor button on the toolbar An example of the Alarm Editor dialog is as follows Alarm Editor _ Oe x kal Groups e G E EEE aaa a Cee ET hel FlourLow Deadband FlourT ank lt 60 Medium Flour getting too low ra OvenTempHigh Simple OvenTemp gt 200 Medium a OvernTenplow Simple Oven emp 100 Medium FA Wi aterLow Deadband Water lt 40 Medium Alarms may be segregated into groups To select a group pick an entry from the Group field Al
202. e quicker than the time taken to update 50 individual points Creation of an Array Point An array point can be created by specifying a value greater than 1 in the Elements field of the Setup PLC Connection dialog The Data Location field specifies the memory address from which the array of data begins Note Elements of an array point are located at consecutive addresses after the address specified in the Data Location field Accessing Elements of an Array Point Direct access to array points can be achieved by applying a subscript to the pointname e g pointname index For more information refer to the CX Supervisor Script Language Reference Manual Point Import To import PLC points from other applications click the Import PLC Points button from the toolbar This results in the Import PLC Points From Another CX Server Project dialog being displayed The Point Import tool can be used to import point information into the CX Supervisor project that has already been configured The symbol name symbol type and PLC address is imported from the CDM file generated by other applications The CDM file can be generated from CX Programmer by linking the project to the CDM file The CDM file can also be generated by exporting from a SYSWIN project to a CDM file Refer to the documentation supplied with the package for information on how to export or link the data to the CDM file Release 3 0 Page 49 CHAPTER 3 Po
203. e required steps to reproduce the problem Information necessary to send to Support If all these diagnostic suggestions fail and it becomes necessary to contact support please have the following information Page 326 Release 3 0 OMRON Release 3 0 APPENDIX C Troubleshooting Your software licence key The software version and build number e g 1 2 12 Also state if the project was upgraded from a previous version The EXACT wording and spelling of any error message If an application is being sent it should be possible to remove unnecessary pages objects scripts points alarms recipes datalogging and database connections Clear description of the function that the Manual says the software should provide Clear precise repeatable steps to recreate the issue on a new application Page 327 APPENDIX D CX Server Error Codes OMRON APPENDIX D CX Server Error Codes When errors occur in the communication package CX Server an error code may be displayed in the CX Supervisor Error Log To explain the cause of this error In the CX Supervisor Error log press the Display Code Converter toolbar button to launch the Error converter and show further details See Chapter 6 Projects Events Error messages for more details H Start Or launch the Error Code converter from the Start menu under the CX Supervisor menu and type in the code displayed Alternatively the full list of causes is below Note
204. e server and client machine To check start the Control Panel and view the Network settings In the list of network components look for Microsoft Remote Registry If it does not exist follow these steps to add it ae ie ee 1 In the Network settings ensure User level access control is selected on the Access Control tab 2 From the Configuration tab click Add to add a Network component Choose Service from the type list and click Add 3 Click Have Disk and browse your Windows CD Select the path Admin Nettods remotReg for Win95 CD or Tools ResKit NetAdmin RemotReg for Win98 and select regsrv inf Follow the screen prompts to complete installation and reboot if necessary On the server machine select Passwords from the Control Panel Ensure the Enable remote administration of this server option is checked ee Add all required user ids to the Administrators list by clicking Add Release 3 0 Page 333 APPENDIX F Obsolete Features OMRON Note Windows ME no longer includes the Microsoft Remote Registry network service on the product CD but this can still be installed and used from any Windows 95 or Windows 98 CD ROM using the above steps Configuring a DCOM OPC Server PC running Windows 98 or Me 1 25 Sees l start Ensure File and Printer sharing is enabled by selecting Network from the Control Panel Add a service and click either File and print sharing for Microsoft Networks or File and pr
205. e that backups are taken before purging occurs If the Keep all files check box is checked no automatic purging will take place and the System will store all the Dead files created until the disk is full Dead files can be copied moved deleted etc as they will not be written to again by the System Live files may be copied i e backed up to another directory while the Log file is open but they cannot be moved or deleted as they are locked by the System In order to delete or move a live file it must first be closed See Opening and Closing Log Files Invalid Data Log Files Data log files generated during one project sessions will continue to be used in subsequent sessions if they are still live For example if a system runs during the day and is shut down at night then a Data Set with a duration of 7 days will use the same file for the whole 7 days Release 3 0 Page 199 CHAPTER 11 Data Logging OMRON If a session is halted and Data Set Items changed deleted or new ones added it is not valid to continue using the existing file When the session is restarted and Data Set file opened CX Supervisor checks to see if there are any differences between the current Data Set and the Data Set stored in the file If any differences are detected the System will mark the existing file as invalid by altering the Timestamp brackets from to and create a new file For example if a file Batch1 2000032922 dlv_ is de
206. ea The control bar includes controls to filter the pages to be displayed add and remove pages from a project and open pages Viewing the Contents of a Project The Project Editor is used to view the pages within a project Individual listed pages are sorted based on the designated page name page path project status runtime display or load status By selecting the Page Name field the pages are sorted alphanumerically by name The Page Type Project Status Runtime Display and Load Status fields once selected react in the same way The Project Editor display shows the projects listed in page name order Page 124 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects a The widths of the editor fields can be widened or narrowed as required using the mouse to drag the column boundaries Hime _ The typeface of the editor can be amended from the Preferences option in the File n9 5G 1 menu This is especially useful when printing Opening a Page via the Project Editor To open pages via the Project Editor click the Open Page button on the toolbar Adding Pages to a Project When a new page is created it is automatically registered in the Project Editor but its details are not saved When the page is saved as a PAG file a message is displayed requiring confirmation to add this page to the project Click the Yes pushbutton to add the page or the No pushbutton to save the page without adding to the project If the page was not added to the
207. easy to navigate even if they have many pages e Create a Main overview navigation page This can include basic information like company logo and date time If the application will be using security levels provide buttons to login e Add links from the main page to detailed system areas with either buttons or schematic diagram e g Process 1 Process 2 e Add links from the main page if required to pages dedicated to Alarms Diagnostics Reports Data Logging Statistics etc e Ifthe system has repeated functions e g 5 similar machines instead of creating 5 pages think about creating page that can show data for any machine This can be achieved using indirection and or keeping data in arrays and just setting the index to display the machine you require Minor differences e g a button for Process 1 only can be shown or hidden depending on the index This will speed up development and also help when the application is maintained Organise the pages sensibly on screen Make sure that only the pages that are necessary are open When a page is no longer needed close it CX Supervisor will update all pages that are open therefore if lots of pages are open then it may be doing a lot of unnecessary work that will slow down the application For pages that are displayed in the same place set the Display Mode property to Replace This allows pages to automatically be closed when a new page is loaded e Use Logical Point names instead of ph
208. eate professional looking applications by prevent unsightly errors quickly using Align Top Left and Make Same Width Height e Draw perfect circles Quickly draw perfect circles by holding lt Ctrl gt while drawing an Ellipse e Use meaningful object names Instead of accepting the default object and group names rename them to something more helpful e g Conveyorl InstrumentPanel StartButton etc Scripts This section covers some good practices for writing scripts Page 284 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 19 Best Practices Data e Never use On Regular Interval scripts You should almost never need to use On Regular Interval scripts Always question e Ifitis used for logging use the logging facilities instead e Ifitis used for timing use PLC ladder instead as this is much more reliable e When they start with or contain IF lt condition gt THEN you should probably be using an On Condition script using lt condition gt from the IF statement e When they perform calculations on PLC or memory points e g Z X Y use On Condition to recalculate when the source data changes e g with a condition X Y TRUE which forces execution even if value changes to value 0 This will guarantee the calculated is up to date with the latest source information plus stress the system much less while the value doesn t change e Never use Sleep command You should almost never need
209. ecaeiuediauieman sale ete ahdaumiudh ounce wecwudeeuse lente 35 Viewing Points in the Point Editor 2 2 0 0 cccceceseeeceeeee esse eeseeeeeeeeaeeesaeeneeeneeenes 36 Creating a PROINT ven ete eet ae et tent CE CANT a eee et OE eR a 39 Amenaing an EXISNG POM escena aia ee ceeds head E EE 45 Deetng an EXISINO POIMI creaciones a ee aiadsleneiauetundiaaed 46 Quick creation Of many points nannnennnannennnnnnnnnnnrrrnnnnrrsnrrnnrrnnrnnrrsnrrnnrnnrrennne 47 Runtime Point Maintenance ccccccccecceeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeaeeseeeseeeneeenaeenes 48 SAO lA a 610 i aeennenen en Mer erernnrne tet n er arent ten arte et nr r erent arc ttnr mr Mires nnernt eo er eee enc nte ay 49 Page 6 Release 3 0 OMRON CX Supervisor User Manual System FONS Seda ate te aa e a da edie danse ented iedigteat 50 PINUNO OIDIS inanin Thbasaue toute hsaemtn a a a E a a 53 Embedding Point Values in TeXt ccccecceccsececeeeseeeceeeceeeceeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeas 54 Chapter 4 ODjECtS se scesisisiccceacecahcakceatesacescieesievacsanessievaceeotsenarwveseed OO ODJICC naana a Ore ee AC RCE eC PEA PR OR a Rr oe ee a 56 GING DIC CUS sar sats sre aciee cat aa salt seeeandteeeteda a sald oteeendee 56 Creating and Editing Graphic Objects cc ceccccececeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeaeeesaeeess 57 Creating and Editing Control Objects ccc ccccceeccseeeceeeeceeeseecseeeseneesaeeessaeess 59 Wiel Ul avinG ODOC Sack creics
210. ecified all selected objects are rotated An illustration of the Control Bar is as follows Gauge_1 m AE T Page 16 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 1 Graphics Editor The Control Bar may vary slightly from this according to the display resolution currently in use the number of buttons displayed depends on the available space at higher resolutions more buttons are displayed The Control Bar can be removed from the display at any time by selecting Control Bar from the View menu A tick next to the name indicates that it is currently displayed CX Supervisor saves the settings when it is exited and restores them when it is next run The specific operation of the controls on the Control Bar is described in the following paragraphs Object Identification When an object is created CX Supervisor gives it a unique identifier This identifier consists of the object type and a sequential number starting at 1 For example a text object could have an identifier of TEXT 1 a polygon object could have an identifier of POLYGON 3 etc The Object Identification field displays a list of all current objects on a page The identification of an object can be changed by clicking on the entry in the Object Identification control typing over the entry and pressing lt Return gt A confirmation box is provided to double check the operation click the OK pushbutton to proceed with the name change or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operat
211. ect unchanged Bar Chart th Click the Chart button then click or click and drag on the page to insert the Chart To edit a Bar Chart double click on it The Chart Wizard dialog is displayed as follows Release 3 0 Page 61 CHAPTER 4 Objects Chart Wizard Ea OMRON Configuration Attributes OF Chart Tithe Chart Style E Bar vertical Chart Background Colour a If Project Colours W 3 D Frame Je Auto Size Font Auto Fit Bars Cancel Scaling Font Wd Bar Colours Labels and Expressions m pooo oo O Browse C pooo Poo Browse al Ee Browse oOo pooo Poo Browse E pooo Poo Browse C ooo O O Browse The Chart Wizard allows entry of configuration attributes and assignment of expressions Ty Ly Sass l 2 3 4 Enter a title for the chart in the Chart Title field Select the chart style from the Chart Style field Select the colour of the chart background Toggle the Project Colours 3 D Frame and Auto Fit Bars fields as desired The Project Colours option allows the user to change the colour of the axis using the toolbox The 3 D Frame option enables the chart to appear with a 3 D frame The Auto Fit Bars option forces the configured bars to resize themselves to occupy all of the available chart area Change the fonts used for the chart via the Font pushbutton The font size used for the chart can be automatically calculated by
212. ect called CXServer then turn this option off Click the OK pushbutton to accept the settings or the Cancel pushbutton to abort Release 3 0 Page 113 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON Runtime Security Configured Users In a runtime application it 1s possible to apply security measures in the development environment so that only sufficiently privileged users of the runtime application can access certain elements It 1s also possible to housekeep security information within the runtime environment with privileged users able to add amend or remove users There are four levels of user privilege available in CX Supervisor Operator level privilege Supervisor level privilege Manager level privilege gt gt Designer level privilege User configuration in the development environment is handled by the Configured Users dialog Select Configured Users from the Runtime Security menu The Configured Users dialog is displayed as follows Configured Users i Users Close MBNGNNNANENENNNANRNENNNEANENNNNEANNNANENSENNANENENNNENNENNNNENNNNANNEENNNNSENENNENSNNNENNEENNNASEEENNNANENENNENNNNNMNNENENSSNEENNNNNENENNENEENNEMEEENEENEEENNNENEENNNN Operator Operator SUPervigor SUPervisor Modity webuser Designer Delete dd bd User Attributes Full Hame Design ss Login Hame Designer ss Bassman Designer Store Security Level Designer Eancel P Allow web access for this user Page 114 Release 3 0
213. ect from new proceed as follows 1 2 3 1 Scroll through the list of object types presented in the list box until the desired type is highlighted 2 Click the OK pushbutton to insert the object into the current page and display it as it would look from within the application in which the object was created M DisplayAsiceon To display the object as an icon click on the Display As Icon setting The icon displayed is the first one which is stored in the icon resource table for the application which created the object in the case of the example shown a Paintbrush icon If another icon is required clicking the Change Icon pushbutton displays the following dialog Page 344 Release 3 0 OMRON APPENDIX F Obsolete Features Labet Paintbrush Picture 1 2 3 1 Select either the current or default icon by clicking either the Current or Default setting and click the OK pushbutton to return to the Insert Object dialog Should a different label be required to display beneath the inserted icon delete the contents of the Label field and type in a new label the default label offered is the filename of the file containing the inserted object 2 Type the full path of the target application or DLL ending with the application or DLL name into the From File field To locate an existing file name or a different path click the Browse pushbutton to display the Browse dialog An example of the Browse dialog is shown
214. ed across several machines One or more Client applications collect the data from the distributed servers This can be useful to help performance by distributing the communication on the device connections and server processing It can also provide different security for different clients and offers limited protect against failures as remaining servers still function Client Applications Display only PC Hetwork Ethernet Device Connections Server Applications HM Devices Page 270 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 17 Connecting to a remote CX Supervisor application Redundant Server Several applications are configured as Servers for direct connection to the same Devices or Device network The same data is collected by all Servers One or more clients can collect the data from any single Server and in the event of a Server failure can be written to switch to data from an alternative Server Client 1 Client 2 Client Applications Client 3 Display only PC Network Ethernet Device Network 2 Server Applications Backup HMI iene Devices A distributed solution may be any of the above or a combination of the ideas Once your topography is defined the steps to connect each Client or Server are the same Creating a CX Supervisor Server application A Server application must collect device data and allow clients to access it It may also have other elements like gra
215. ed Click the OK pushbutton to accept the change or Cancel to abort Startup Preferences Startup Preferences eer ee eee eich ee ates Cancel Editing Preferences The Editing Preferences dialog provides a number of switches to enhance the use of the Graphics Editor and CX Supervisor animation Itis accessed by selecting Editing from the Preferences menu The number of undo operations in the Graphics Editor can be set in the Number of Available Undo Operations field To make the Graphics Editor return to Select Mode after every drawing operation click in the Revert to Select Mode after Drawing Operations setting The use of double clicking on an object can be defined when a check mark is present in the Enter Edit Mode field a double click on an object of that type causes it to enter Edit Mode When a check mark is present in a Display Animation Editor field a double click on an object of that type activates the Animation Editor Click the OK pushbutton to accept the changes or the Cancel pushbutton to abort Release 3 0 Page 33 CHAPTER 2 Pages OMRON Editing Preferences General Preferences General Preferences allow the default script language to be chosen When new scripts are added CX Supervisor will default to saving scripts in the select language General Preferences ae Page 34 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 3 Points CHAPTER 3 Points This chapter describes CX Supervisor points
216. ed a style State 0 text and State 1 text to signify its purpose It also allows selection of a Boolean point To select a style click on an option from the list box To enter button text type in the Text fields for States 0 and 1 or select ON and OFF the Style Attributes dialog is automatically updated Some toggle buttons can have an On Off colour associated with them The text font can be changed via the Font pushbutton To select a Boolean point click on the Browse pushbutton and click on a point from the displayed list The Select Required Item dialog is displayed as illustrated below Page 72 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 4 Objects Select Required ltem Cancel Point Hames Add Alias 4ctivedlarms 4 larmCount Add Point available emon 0 ayOfMonth tDavOFi ear ltem Displayed Dermokode Aliases Disk Space a GD Resources Paints Highdlarms HighE rors M Boolean Se M Integer Description a Text Exclude System Points Only viable points can be viewed from a Select Required Item dialog The list of items in the Point Names field can be refined by selecting an option from the Group field Click the OK pushbutton to accept the new point or click the Cancel pushbutton to leave the point unchanged Clicking the Add Point pushbutton or Add Alias pushbutton allows a new point or alias to be created prior to association with the Wizard An existing point can also be associated with
217. ed the first version of CX Server OPC which provides Client and Server software for the CX Automation Suite software range The current version of Omron s CX Server OPC is compliant with version 2 05 of the Data Access specification Other OPC Specifications Since the first OPC Data Access specification was produced in 1995 the OPC Foundation have addressed a number of additional areas of control and automation normally associated with SCADA The original specification for Data Access is now just part of a whole series of specifications that include such areas as Alarms Events and Batch control although the DA interface is still far more commonly supported than the others Release 3 0 Page 259 CHAPTER 16 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client OMRON The figure below shows some of the current areas covered by OPC Interface Specifications OPC Security OPC Common OPC amp XML Interface Definition OPC OPC Data OPC Alarms amp Events OPC Historical Data Access Interface Access Interface OPC Batch Interface Figure 1 OPC Interface Specifications Key Technologies used by OPC This section provides for convenience a brief introduction to some key technologies that are used by or that form part of OPC Some of these are described in more detail in the appendices plentiful reference books are available elsewhere describing all of them in any required level of detail A Brief Introduction to DCOM Microsoft d
218. ed tool to select it and then clicking and dragging to the appropriate point in the page This is not the case with the text polygon or polyline tools however the operation of these tools is fully discussed in chapter 4 Objects Moving the mouse pointer over any of the tools causes CX Supervisor to display a tooltip to describe the tool By default the cursor returns to Selection mode an arrow after drawing an object If you would prefer it to remain in its current state clear the Return to select mode checkbox in the Editing Preferences dialog which is found on the CX Supervisor file menu For further details concerning the tools contained within the Graphic Object bar refer to chapter 4 Objects Control Bar CX Supervisor provides a Control Bar containing formatting and object manipulation tools The Control Bar can be activated or de activated from the View menu To activate the Control Bar select Control Bar from the View menu CX Supervisor places a check mark next to it signifying its active status To de activate it repeat the procedure the check mark is removed and the Control Bar is no longer displayed The various tools on the control bar allow the properties of objects to be modified A control may be activated with more than one object selected to change a particular attribute of all of the selected objects e g when all graphical objects on a page are selected and the Rotate button is pushed in and the desired angle sp
219. eeseeeeseeeseeeeseeeeseees 269 CGI LO GOI aaie a e e 270 DISTIID UTE C SONO ariano a eae a a tk Sesatace ico eck Saaeued es 270 Redundant SOIV OCR cenean ea a e ae EEEE 2 1 Creating a CX Supervisor Server Application ccccccceeccceeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeaes 271 Creating a CX Supervisor Client Application cccccceccseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 272 Chapter 18 Connecting to Omron Industrial Components 274 Adding a Point Linked to a Parameter ccc ccccceeceaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaees 274 Chapter 19 Best PRACtcCeS scssssvscsscacossevsseussesseassasssccssceossasavesiee 27 0 DESIT anaa i erintica teats ie reeetcanieente Laverna a iaeinn eu wnwenianemorgneumans enine rs 2 78 FI CFIOMMANGE eina oan ia Dinjenlec acaba a a A a 279 POIS Gaan a a a a oat america eats 282 DOWD Oea uals ogdeahe wast concen seetet at anaes Seen a 283 DCHIOUS ete ie tee le a cc a e a 284 Bata Loggins a a a S 285 Appendix A Configuring a PC for Remote Connection 287 Configurating a Client PC running Windows XP Service Pack 2 0068 28 Configurating a Client PC running Windows XP ccceeccseeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeees 288 Configurating a Client PC running Windows NT or 2000 c ccccceeeeeeeeeeees 288 Configurating a Server PC running Windows XP Service Pack 2 0668 288 Configurating a Server PC running Windows XP cccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees
220. eld by either typing in the point name or by selecting the Browse pushbutton which results in the Select Required Item dialog being displayed at the position where a point should be inserted Select Required Item x eo Cancel Point Hames Add Alias 4ctivedlarmns tAlarnCourt 4dd Point 4yailableMermary D av Month D ayOfy ear ltem Displayed D emoblode C Aliazes DiskSpace GD0 Resources Points HighAlarms tHighE rors V Boolean ae M Integer Description F Real Text Exclude System Points Only viable points can be viewed from a Select Required Item dialog The list of items in the Point Names field can be refined by selecting an option from the Group field Click the OK pushbutton to accept the new point or click the Cancel pushbutton to leave the point unchanged Clicking the Add Point pushbutton or Add Alias pushbutton allows a new point or alias to be created prior to association with the expression Points are discussed in chapter 3 Points whilst expression syntax is discussed in the CX Supervisor Script Language Reference Manual Alarm Messages A message pertaining to a raised alarm is entered in the Raised field The content of the field should be descriptive to provide the user with a reasonable basis for an alarm solution The Alarm Editor provides a default raised message The name of the alarm is substituted for the character in the message text when the OK
221. ely not visible The Medium Priority button lists all errors designated as a medium priority only Other errors and events are not deleted from the log they are merely not visible The High Priority button lists all errors designated as a high priority only Other errors and events are not deleted from the log they are merely not visible The Events button lists all events Errors of all priorities are not deleted from the log thar ara maraly nat wicthla Bvamnlac af avranta ara owotam catartin arvrotam chiutdawum SEE E LE Ee Page 110 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects they are merely not visible Examples of events are system startup system shutdown and user security notices The Print button prints the current contents of the error and event log Ensure that the printer is correctly set up before printing The Display Result Code Converter launches the CX Server error code converter and if a CX Server error is currently selected displays further details about possible causes ek E The Error Information Dialog button once pressed displays a summary of error information including a detailed count of errors and PLC communication information Click the Close pushbutton to remove this dialog Error Information E4 Error Counts Low Priority Errors a Medium Priority Errore jo ES High Priority Errors PLC Communications Status Communication Errors Communications Busy No fi
222. ent dialog as follows Cancel Browse Ingredient Attributes Ingredient Hame rill ral Link to Point milk Quantity E xpression AU J Editable Value at Runtime Enter a suitable ingredient name in the Ingredient Name field This name should be unique and meaningful and identify the particular ingredient being added to the recipe Enter the name of a point which is initialised by this ingredient in the Link to Point field The adjacent Browse pushbutton may be used to display the Select Required Item dialog which provides a list of points from which the selection may be made The Select Required Item dialog also provides an Add Point pushbutton which allows a new point to be added See also chapter 3 Points The Quantity Expression field is used to define the value which is assigned to the point by this ingredient This may be a fixed value such as 50 as in the above expression or it may be any valid CX Supervisor script language expression featuring one or more point names Page 182 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 10 Recipes Select Required ltem Cancel Point Hames Add Alias 4ctivedlarms 3 larmCount Add Point available emon tD ayOfMonth E ap frear Items Displayed tDemoMode Aliases Dick Space a GD Aesources Paints Highdlarms HighE rors M Boolean ae IM Integer Description a Text Exclude System Points The Editable Value at Runtime
223. ent is as follows Select the Burner pushbutton to go Using the Floating Menu Clicking the right mouse button within CX Supervisor brings up a context sensitive menu known as the Floating menu There are two such menus one in the development environment and one in the runtime environment The development environment Floating menu contains short cuts for many operations discussed in this chapter Page 82 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 5 ActiveX Objects CHAPTER 5 ActiveX Objects This chapter describes the process of using ActiveX objects within CX Supervisor applications Overview The Microsoft Windows ActiveX technology allows objects called components to be developed and are used by inserting them into an ActiveX container like CX Supervisor ActiveX components may perform many different functions which can be graphical or non graphical but they follow standard rules for defining their Properties Methods and Events Properties are like settings for example a control s colour would be a property Methods are like functions or actions that can be called for example a control might support a Redraw method Events are actions the control may create like OnLeftClick Following these standard rules allows any ActiveX control from any manufacturer to work in any container Inserting a new object A new ActiveX control may be inserted on the page as follows TDs Sie 1 Click on the page in which the object is to be
224. enu to create a new project Facilities exist to add an alarm modify an existing alarm copy an alarm remove an existing alarm following confirmation and display the alarm list in name type or description order Alarm Settings G To open the Alarm Settings dialog select the Change General Alarm Settings button from the Alarm Editor toolbar The dialog is displayed as follows Page 134 Release 3 0 OMRON Alarm Settings x Cancel Alarm Sound On Alarm Automatically Display Alam Status Viewer Alarm Histon Log Maximum entries in Status Viewer 20 Masimum entries in History Log 200 Log system start stop messages Alarm Status Messages C Use Language File Text Raised Test larm Cleared Text eae Acknowledged Text Jacknowledged Auto Acknowledged Text Automatically Acknowledged CHAPTER 8 Alarms In the On Alarm Automatically Display area set the Alarm Status Viewer and Alarm History Log settings as required When these options are set the Current Alarms dialog or Alarm History dialog respectively displays automatically in runtime when an alarm occurs Set the Maximum entries in Status and Maximum entries in History Log fields to the desired values The numbers specify how many messages are displayed in the respective viewer dialogs in runtime Select the Log system start stop messages setting to ON if required If more messages exist than are requested to be displayed th
225. error message appears A recipe Upload or Download is currently in progress The upload may fail at this stage if there are problems communicating with a PLC A communications failure results in the error message Uploading recipe failed A delay in response from the PLC of more than one minute results in the error message Recipe transfer timed out When the recipe upload is complete all the ingredients are saved and the CX Supervisor runtime environment continues to run in the normal manner An event is logged stating that the recipe was successfully uploaded Page 192 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 11 Data Logging CHAPTER 11 Data Logging This chapter describes the CX Supervisor data logging facilities including how to configure items to be logged the logging of data and the viewing and exporting of recorded data What is Data Logging The concept of the Data Logger is the ability to define a number of points and expressions during development which may be recorded while the CX Supervisor project is being executed in runtime These events may be viewed at runtime and recorded for future evaluation They may also be exported to other programs such as Microsoft Excel The recorded events are stored in one or more Data Sets which can then be viewed using the Data Log Viewer The events to be recorded are defined by the developer and any number of Data Sets may be used to record specific areas or types of events either aut
226. erver application or Master The Server is often the main station and is permanently switched on and often used locally for HMI for example but could have no graphical element which is termed a Blind Server It has direct access to the Devices or Device network and is responsible for collecting the data from the devices Other applications may connect to the Server to read and even control values in the Server These applications are called Client applications or Slaves Clients are often used remotely and therefore are often configured display only applications transferring the data from the Server using the corporate PC network The Clients do not talk directly to the devices and often only connect when required Client 1 Client 2 Client Applications Client 3 Display only ag Ethernet Server Server Applications HMI Device Network Sinare j wpa 7 i i Devices Release 3 0 Page 269 CHAPTER 17 Connecting to a remote CX Supervisor application OMRON Peer to Peer Several applications are written to share data with each other Actually an application is written as a Server to connect directly to a device but is also a Client using other Servers to connect to other devices through the corporate network PC Hetwork Ethernet _ Device Connection Devices Distributed Server Several applications are configured as Servers for direct connection so the data for the system is distribut
227. ervice Pack 2 includes a communications Firewall to protect your computer from malicious communications By default this firewall is turned on and so will block all OPC and DCOM communications E pee To allow OPC or DCOM communications through the firewall either a Completely disable the firewall as follows Note this can leave your computer vulnerable to attack so consult your computer documentation or IT administrator if you are unsure start 1 Open Control Panel followed by Computers e 2 Right click My Computer and select Security Center 3 Select Windows Firewall 4 On the General tab choose option Off b Alternatively on the Exceptions tab you can configure specific programs to permit communications All other required settings are the same as for running standard Windows XP as explained below Page 288 Release 3 0 OMRON APPENDIX A Configuring a PC for remote connection Configuring a Server PC running Windows XP l 2 Bass 1 Start Component Services e g by running DCOMCNFG EXE by selecting Start RUN from the start button The default location is C WINDOWS SYSTEM 2 Select Component Services followed by Computers 3 Right click My Computer and select Properties 4 View the Default Properties tab Ensure that the Enable Distributed COM on this computer is checked 5 From the Default Properties tab configure the Default Authentication Level to Connect and the Default Impersonation
228. escribes DCOM as The Distributed Component Object Model DCOM is a protocol that enables software components to communicate directly over a network in a reliable secure and efficient manner Previously called Network OLE DCOM is designed for use across multiple network transports including Internet protocols such as HTTP DCOM 1s based on the Open Software Foundation s DCE RPC spec and will work with both Java applets and ActiveX components through its use of the Component Object Model COM Page 260 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 16 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client In other words DCOM is an object programming model for the implementation of distributed applications using a client server pattern A client can use several servers at the same time and a server can provide functionality to multiple clients simultaneously Translating that into plainer English COM basically allows software components to be written in such a way that they can be used by all COM aware applications e g C later versions of Visual Basic without those applications needing to know anything about the internals of the object DCOM is simply the distributed version of COM 1 e the objects can be spread across a network It is a very powerful system although some machine level and security configuration may be required to allow it to work correctly and reliably Central to the capability of a DCOM object are its interfaces All communicati
229. et default messages for Raised Text Cleared Text Acknowledge Text and Auto Acknowledge Text can be applied If the Use Language File Text option is set the alarm status messages default to the supplied language file The Alarm Sound pushbutton allows the selection of an audible warning which may be played when an alarm occurs in runtime The Open Waveform File dialog is shown below Open Waveform File E4 File Name Directories SWAY c MeceveUbetademos Cancel l ont F a C Bakery Cg Balloon C Comms Eg DDE E List Files of Type Drives waveform file way C Network Note If the PC installation of CX Supervisor is on a networked machine a Network pushbutton is added to the dialog For further information of the function of the Network dialog refer to the Microsoft Windows User Guide Alarm Message Printer Settings To open the Alarm Message Printer Settings dialog select Alarm Message Printer Settings from the Runtime Settings menu The dialog is displayed as follows Page 108 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects Alarm Message Printer Settings Printer Hame SHOLLYSH P_LASERJET_ SSM ance Printer Type Humber ornes Ber Bage 30 Line Terminator C CR i LF C CR LF ly 2 Dues 1 Select the target printer in the Printer Name field 2 Ifthe printer type is a Page Printer ensure the Page Printer setting is set ON and the
230. ets and fonts multiple keyboard layouts for input and to switch between them To achieve this follow these steps 1 Start Windows in the normal way 2 Open Control Panel and select Regional Options 3 The Numbers Currency Time and Date tabs settings do not affect the language support but can be set as required 4 On the General tab select ALL the languages that may be required in the Language settings for the system section Note If some extended characters in standard Windows controls like listboxes editboxes etc appear as solid boxes it may be necessary to change the default System Locale Click the Set Default button and select the required language Note In some circumstances like Russian or Greek support it has been noted Thai language also needs to be selected Microsoft does not document the reason for this 5 Add all the required languages in the Input Locales tab and set the preferred default These affect how the keyboard is mapped for typing letters and can be changed as CX Supervisor is running by the box in the task bar 6 OK all dialogs and install new OS files from CD if requested Reboot if required Loading old projects Projects and pages created in CX Supervisor 1 25 and earlier use Microsoft s Double Byte Character Sets known as DBCS or sometimes MBCS for multilingual features The formatting of character tables in MBCS is not the same as Unicode However old projects and pages are automatica
231. existing HTML page add the following line This must be inserted between the lt head gt and lt head gt markers lt meta http equiv refresh content 5 url Report htm gt s Release 3 0 Page 305 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions OMRON This will force the page to be reloaded every 5 seconds The value after the content e g 5 is the refresh rate in seconds Be aware that 5 seconds may practically be the fastest update as some pages may take several seconds to download Also the value after the url is the name of the page to refresh Q Can CX Supervisor be used with Industrial Touchscreen PCs IPCs Absolutely CX Supervisor is designed for use with Omron s DyaloX Touchscreen IPC but can be used with other manufacturers It has special features especially for Touchscreen PCs e Edit animations have option to enter data from a popup keyboard to allow typing direct on the screen e CxX Supervisor Login dialog has a popup keyboard e Project setting for Large dialogs to increase font size on high resolution touchscreens giving a larger contact area Projects can be built on a development machine and deployed using Create Runtime Install Disk to copy required files to a shared drive or USB memory stick It is also commonplace to copy a shortcut to the SR2 application to the Startup folder If the keyboard is to be detached see also How To Enable Automatic Login in Windows Q How do you enable aut
232. ext like numbers product names or formatting e g 1 0 Microsoft Windows or 4 can be left blank to use the original translation or Copy and Pasted from other columns When completed exit the Translation Tool and save the changes The User Defined Text will now be loaded when you change languages at Runtime Note If some development text with translations is changed or corrected the translations will be shown in Red as below as if the Application text is missing Note Where there are translations for text that is not in the Application Text the whole row is shown in Red To correct this problem either copy the old translations to the correct row or just delete the unwanted translation When all columns are corrected you can save and close the Translation Tool When reopened the highlighted rows have been deleted Alternatively you can delete an entire highlighted row by right clicking on the row header with the row number and selecting Delete Selected Row Note Where older USL files exist they will be loaded if no corresponding UDT file exists and converted to Unicode When saving new Unicode UDT files are always written Note If you need translations for the same text in different contexts Show the Object ID column and select the Add new object ID string button Select the application text for the new translation and the object context for this special case This is in the format PageName followed by a dot
233. ey are the most familiar with how to access the device s internal data efficiently These devices then become OPC servers providing data to OPC client applications consistently Application developers can then write code in any language deemed appropriate The latest version of the OPC standard is version 2 This replaces the earlier version 1 standard CX Supervisor uses an OPC version 2 interface to connect to an OPC Server which is version 2 compliant Note that the OPC version 1 interface has been superseded and is not supported Users of CX Supervisor may need some basic understanding of OPC For more information on OPC see the OPC Foundation web site at For instructions on configuring your DCOM settings for connection to remote PCs see Appendix A Page 258 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 16 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client A Brief History of OPC Data Access In the early 1990s a group of people from several important companies involved in the creation of SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition systems began meeting at Miucrosoft s headquarters in Redmond Their interests focused on the use of the Windows operating system within the factory automation environment in particular for the acquisition of real time data Microsoft at the time were working on the development of OLE 2 0 Object Linking and Embedding and it was apparent that this new technology would replace that of DDE Dynamic Data Exchange which up until
234. fied is invalid The open User handle specified is invalid The Key specified is invalid or cannot be found The device or function is locked by another user or application The name specified does not exist or cannot be found The specified PLC name does not exist The specified Project cannot be found or created Oxnn16 The operation cannot be performed as the correct access permissions have not be obtained This usually indicates another host currently has the PLC access rights The function or CDMPLCCommand is not supported in this version of CX Server Oxnn18 The PLC could not be opened or the operation failed because the PLC is open for communications Check the communication settings and that another application is not currently using the connection method e g Mouse configured and using COM 1 port communications Attempt to delete a currently selected User Oxnn1lB Communications to the device could not be established or the connection has been broken Check the communication settings and connection method to the device An executing command was aborted by the execution of another command or action Oxnn1D CX Server is currently processing the maximum number of requests This error indicates the application is thrashing the maximum possible communications The Point could not be opened or the operation failed because the Point is open for throughput of the device s connection CX Server has reached the maximum limitation
235. fit of the application developer the CX Supervisor Development application may be run in any major European language 1 e English Spanish Italian German and French This means all menus dialogs and error messages displayed by the Development program are shown in this language which provides a more comfortable and more efficient development experience To choose between languages at the beginning of the installation select the required language Note the installation program runs in your selected language and also the Development application resources are installed in this language In the unlikely event you ever need to change your language selection simply uninstall CX Supervisor in the normal manner and then reinstall selecting the desired language Choose Setup Language amp Select the language for this installation from the choices below English al EF riglish French Canadian French Standard German Italiar Spanish Of course the designer enters all application data like page names on screen text button captions etc and these all form part of the runtime application Translation of the runtime application is covered in the next section Note Remember the choice of development language is entirely separate to the language the end user will use and has absolutely no impact on the runtime application Runtime Language Features The developer will be required to create the runtime application to
236. for the specified function OxnnlF Communications Error occurred because of a Network Routing Table problem Check the routing tables in all devices are correctly configured In Alpha C series PLC s ensure the Allow Routing Table flag is set The specified Point name or key is invalid Device setup information or settings configuration is incorrect Device configuration information or data is incorrect The Unit number specified is invalid or does not exist Release 3 0 Page 329 APPENDIX D CX Server Error Codes OMRON The data cannot be converted to BCD as it contains Hexadecimal values between OxA and OxF Page 330 Release 3 0 OMRON APPENDIX E Using with the Omron DyaloX APPENDIX E Using with the Omron DyaloX The CX Supervisor Runtime can be installed on an Omron DyaloX Industrial PC which can also be purchased with the Runtime software preinstalled The preinstalled bundle will run Machine Edition projects without a USB Dongle but a PLUS dongle must be purchased to run PLUS projects If installing the Runtime manually or other application software make sure there will be enough disk space If not the software can be installed on an additional compact Flash drive within the IPC General Use The DyaloX IPC is designed to be a run time end user platform and is ideal for running the CX Supervisor Runtime Only package Runtime applications can be created on a workstation with the CX Supervisor Ful
237. for two reasons A Applications like Excel seem to complain about them being there B Less likely to be confused will dlv files during searches purges During the generation of files then obviously duplication of names can occur To avoid this the following convention is used 66 nnn will be appended to any duplicate filenames to make them unique where nnn 1 to 999 If you run out numbers the export will fail tidying up will remedy the problem Generated names depend on whether a single item or multiple items are selected for export Page 206 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 11 Data Logging Single Selections If a single item is selected for export i e Item3 in the root directory of MyData Set then the following file will be generated MyData Set1999011214Item3 csv Multiple Selections On Interval Items If a multiple selection of on interval items with the same interval is made then the name of the parent directory will be used e g if the items live in Group the following file will be generated MyData Set1999011214Groupl csv The file will contain a column for each item selected and they will share the Date and Time fields Note The milliseconds field will only be valid for one of the Items and should therefore be filtered out for this type of grouping If a multiple selection of on interval items with different intervals is made then any items with the same interval will be
238. forms for instance pressing a button opening or closing a page or changes in the positioning of objects on a page CX Supervisor achieves this enhanced functionality in two ways by assigning an expression to a pre defined action or executing commands on a linear basis as a basic programming language In addition such functionality can be carried out on three levels object page or project with different objectives at each level Animations are actioned using the values or states of one or more points For example an integer point is assigned to an object the colour of the object is black when the value of the point is 0 The system causes the value of the point to be changed to the value 5 which changes the colour of the object to red To demonstrate an object s colour can be changed in the runtime environment from black to white This can be achieved using actions and animations in the two ways described with the additional use of points Firstly using a pre defined action the object can be associated with the Change Colour pre defined action runtime action When a Boolean point s value is 0 the colour is black when the point s value is 1 the colour is white The same result can be achieved using the basic programming language script This time a single command can change the colour from black to white Finally either instance can be initiated by the user in the runtime environment e g the use
239. g system offers the best solution It is possible to install language support for multiple languages multiple character sets and fonts multiple keyboard layouts for input and to switch between them To achieve this follow these steps 1 Start Windows in the normal way 2 Open Control Panel and select Regional and Language options 3 The Regional Options tab settings do not affect the language support but can be set as required 4 On the Languages tab click Details Page 244 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 14 Multilingual Features 5 Add all the Input Locales required and set the preferred default These affect how the keyboard is mapped for typing letters and can be changed as CX Supervisor is running by the box in the task bar 6 OK all dialogs and install new OS files from CD if requested Reboot if required Note If some extended characters in standard Windows controls like listboxes editboxes etc appear as solid boxes it may be necessary to select the required language on the Advanced tab for Language for non Unicode programs Microsoft does not document the reason for this Note In some circumstances like Russian or Greek support it has been noted Install files for complex script needs to be selected on the Languages tab Microsoft does not document the reason for this Windows 2000 Windows 2000 language support is reasonable It is possible to install language support for multiple languages multiple character s
240. ge or Project actions Release 3 0 Page 147 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON Individual listed Runtime Actions are sorted based on a designated field type either Runtime Actions or Trigger Event Expression By clicking on the Runtime Actions pushbutton the points are sorted alphanumerically by Runtime Actions The Trigger Event Expression pushbutton once selected reacts in the same way The Animation Editor dialog shows the actions associated with Polygon 1 sorted in runtime action order The typeface of the editor can be amended by selecting Preferences from the File menu This is especially useful when printing The widths of the animation fields can be widened or narrowed as required using the mouse to drag the column boundaries A new action can be added to the list of current actions by clicking the Add Action button in the toolbar An existing action can be removed from the current actions by clicking the Delete Action button in the toolbar whereupon a confirmation dialog is displayed Click the OK pushbutton to delete the action or click the Cancel pushbutton to abort the delete operation An existing action can be modified from the current actions by clicking the Modify Action button in the toolbar Note The short cut keyboard combinations for Cut Copy and Paste operations are valid within the Animation Editor dialogs Highlight part or all of a field and type lt Ctrl gt X to cut the text or lt Ctrl gt C to copy t
241. group pick an entry from the Group field All points can be displayed by selecting lt A Groups gt from this list Filtering the Points in the View by Point Type i s asa A selection of points can be displayed based on the point type Selection of the All Points button from the toolbar displays points of all types The Boolean Points button only displays points of a Boolean type The Integer Points button the Real Points button and Text Points button once selected react in the same way Sorting the Points in the View by I O Type Helleg Points can also be filtered by I O type Respectively these toolbar buttons display All Points Memory Points Input Points Output Points or Input Output Points Sorting the Points in the View Individual listed points are sorted based on a designated field type name type input output type or description By clicking on the Name button the points are L Type l gi sorted alphanumerically by name The Type button the I O Type button the Integer Address button and Description button once selected react in the same way In the Integer previous Point Editor example the list is sorted by Name The widths of the point fields can be widened or narrowed as required using the Page 36 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 3 Points mouse to drag the column boundaries A double click on the text boundaries causes the column to autosize Changing the Viewing Mode Select the View Se
242. group are animated in a number of ways refer to chapter 1 Graphics Editor for applicable objects gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt o o o An object can be seen to be blinking An object can be removed from the page An object can change colour A value associated with the object can be displayed Text associated with the object can be displayed An object can appear enabled for selection or disabled for selection An object can move horizontally or vertically An object can be flood filled An object can change its size horizontally or vertically An object can rotate An object can have associated user interaction An object can be displayed on the page However it is not feasible for all the objects to be capable of all forms of animation For instance a toggle object can only be animated so that it is enabled or disabled visible or invisible whilst a text object can be resized moved change its colour blink rotate await user interaction be made visible or invisible or display an associated value A list of objects and their available animations is as follows Page 150 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation NS EG b bki kE i i laa ala e E ee E ere AT S i S Al pt tstst fst A group object possesses the animation functions common to all objects within the group The ticks denote whether the animation function is available for the object The blank ce
243. grouped together in the same file The same convention will be used as above except using the duplicate filenames rules described above If an item does not share any interval with any other Item then its name will be used in the filename For example If Items I1 12 I3 I4 15 16 are selected from Group of Data Set MyData Set and Items 11 I3 amp 16 share intervals and I2 and I5 share a different interval then the following files will be generated MyData Set1999011210Group1 csv contains 11 13 amp 16 MyData Set1999011210Group1i 1 csv contains 12 amp 15 MyData Set199901121014 csv contains 14 On Change Items All on change items will have their own filename generated regardless of any multiple selections made because it is not possible to determine any common time interval with these type of Items If a multiple selection of On Interval and On Change Items is made then the above conventions still apply Generation of Text Files Whereas CSV files only contain limited information e g Breaks Date Time Milliseconds and Value Text files contains all the information stored on selected Items Groups 1 e the expression label deadband etc The multiple selection rules apply as described in the previous paragraph with the exception that On Change items can be grouped together Release 3 0 Page 207 CHAPTER 11 Data
244. gs dialog helps to ensure that data is transmitted correctly over the network Network Settings SYSMAC WAT Network Driver Modem Connection Fort Mame Data Bits i Baud Aate 9600 Parity Even Baud Flate Auto Wetect Stop Bits 2 Make Default Cancel Apply Help Note The possible settings for the Baud Rate Parity Data Bits and Stop Bits fields depend upon the port selected If a timeout occurs the communication is not complete Where necessary increase the Timeout Offset value in milliseconds to ensure that the device does not cause a timeout Values specified may be set as default by clicking the Make Default pushbutton Modifying a PLC Connection From the Setup Devices dialog a PLC name may be modified by selecting the PLC name from the Device List on the Setup Devices dialog and clicking the Modify pushbutton This results in the Change PLC dialog being displayed Release 3 0 Page 93 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON Change PLC r Device Type cs1G Settings Network Type SVSMAC WAY Settings r Comment Cancel A new name can be entered in the PLC Name field If an invalid PLC name is entered an error message is displayed on clicking the OK pushbutton Removing a PLC Connection From the Setup Devices dialog a PLC name may be removed from the PLC Name field by selecting the PLC name from the Device List on the Setup Devices dialog
245. h appear in a project a number of times Libraries are not project dependant so objects can be copied from one project to another Graphics Library Activating the Library ts To activate the Library click on the Graphics Library button on the toolbar If the Library is already open but displayed as an icon double click on the Library icon An example of the Graphics Library Editor 1s illustrated as follows but note that actual library names and contents may differ from that shown in the following chapters Graphics Library Oy x Create Library Each Library has a unique name which is entered when the Library is created iii To create a library click on the Add Library button on the Graphics Library Editor toolbar The Add New Library dialog is displayed as illustrated below Page 128 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 7 Graphics Library Add New Library Library H ame Fumps_1 7 Cancel Enter the name of the new Library file and click the OK pushbutton or cancel the addition of the Library by clicking on the Cancel pushbutton If an object is dragged into the Library without a Library file open then the Add New Library dialog is displayed Refer to chapter 7 Manipulating Objects for details on dragging objects into the Library Opening a Library The Graphics Library Editor consists of a number of Libraries which are selected from the drop down list box in the toolbar of the dialog Click on the Library
246. haracters double round brackets by default Examples of the way in which text is changed The shift foreman was ShiftForeman becomes The shift foreman was Fred Smith and The shift output was ShiftOutput litres becomes The shift output was 5000 litres Using Format specifiers Format specifiers can be used similar to the Format script command s for text string points 6d for integer points f for real floating points Where MyTextpoint Hello The text of My text point is s Mypoint becomes The text of My text point is Hello Where MyRealpoint 5467 7658 To two decimal places the value of MyRealpoint is 4 2 MyRealpoint becomes To two decimal places the value of MyRealpoint is 5467 76 Combinations of format specifiers are possible s to two decimal places the value of MyRealpoint is 4 2 MyTextpoint MyRealpoint becomes Page 54 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 3 Points Hello to two decimal places the value of MyRealpoint is 5467 76 The can be used in various fields for example e In Alarm Raised and Cleared Messages e g Alarm Raised Boiler Temperature too high Current value is 1d BoilerTemp e As captions for popup edit box animations This is useful as the captions are then dynamically translated e g Caption CaptionString e As parameter to MessageBox This is useful to help convert numbers to strings e g Message
247. have pre defined Parameters which allow criteria to be passed to the query at runtime e g values to filter allowing one query to be used to produce different results Each pre defined parameter must have a Parameter Association defined Because these queries are stored in a compiled and tested form they are more efficient and therefore preferential to running a SQL Query A Database SQL Query or SQL Query for short is interpreted dynamically at runtime The SQL Text can be modified at runtime enabling different Queries to be run for varying situations however the SQL Text has to be compiled on the fly every time it is executed and consequently is less efficient than a Server Query Page 351 GLOSSARY OF TERMS CX Supervisor User Manual OMRON DBCS DCOM DDE Development Environment DLL Download Executable Expressions Field association Page 352 DBCS stands for Double Byte Character Set and is a Microsoft extension of ASCII which uses 2 bytes 16 bits to define character codes With this larger range it can include accented characters extended ASCII characters Nordic characters and symbols DCOM is a distributed version of COM that allows components on different PCs to interact over a network Dynamic Data Exchange A channel through which correctly prepared programs can actively exchange data and controls other applications within Microsoft Windows DDE technology was notoriously unstable and was rep
248. hbutton Close Page CX Supervisor allows the specification of pages within a project to be removed from the display This is set up using the Close Page dialog To access the Close Page dialog select Close Page from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Close Page dialog to modify an action select Close Page from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar Refer to chapter 9 Objects for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable Page 164 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation On selection of the Close Page action the Close Page dialog is displayed Close Page Available Pages Pages to be Closed OK BALLDIE BALLHELFP Cancel BALLWELL lt Remove To specify a page for removal select a page from the Available Pages list and click on the Add pushbutton The page now appears in the Pages to be Closed list Multiple pages can be selected for removal If a selected page for removal is no longer required for that purpose select the page from the Pages to be Closed list and click on the Remove pushbutton Once completed click the OK pushbutton To abort the Close Page edit click the Cancel pushbutton Blink Objects can be animated so that they blink This is achieved using the Blink dialog To access the Blink dialog to add an action select Blink from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolb
249. hd E m i i Local intranet a Release 3 0 Page 235 CHAPTER 13 Standard Web Pages OMRON Access To access the standard web pages navigate to http IPADDRESS 4140 Where IPADDRESS is the IP address of the PC running the CX Supervisor runtime application Example http 10 0 0 1 4140 Pages A number of pages are included in the standard set see the table below for a summary of their usage status of all configured devices Alarm Log View the alarm history Event Error Log View the events and errors log Application Restart or replace the running CX Supervisor Application Settings Configure user preferences including page refresh rates and user language Configuration At least 1 of the users configured for a CX Supervisor application must have web access rights in order to log on to the standard web pages To configure web access for a particular user the Allow web access for this user option must be ticked within the Configure Users dialog This user will then be able to log on to the web pages remotely using their login name and password Default Port The default port for the standard web pages is 4140 If this conflicts with another application on your machine it can be changed by running the Standard Web Page Configuration tool Page 236 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 13 Standard Web Pages DCOM Settings The CX Supervisor runtime and the web server program use Windows DCOM
250. he appropriate font button Alternatively font sizes can be automatically calculated by selecting the Auto Font Size option 10 Exit the Wizard by clicking the OK pushbutton to accept the new Trend Graph attributes or click Cancel to leave the Trend Graph unchanged The units of measurement of time are selected from the associated field To select graph scaling click the Scaling pushbutton the Trend Graph Scaling dialog box is displayed as follows Configuration Attributes Minimum Scale Yale E Masimum Scale Value f Oo Minor Display Units Cancel Style Attributes W Display Minor Ticks W Display Major Ticks Display Minor Units W Display Major Units Configuration Attributes can be altered by typing over the existing entries The Style Attributes can be amended by clicking on the settings Major Display Units Scale Units Exit the Trend Graph Scaling dialog by clicking the OK pushbutton to accept the scaling attributes or click the Cancel push button to leave unchanged An example of a trend graph is illustrated as follows Release 3 0 Page 75 CHAPTER 4 Objects OMRON Dakabar Daktabar Value 09 10 39 540 100 Tine Date Stamp Web Browser Object a The Web Browser object allows web files like HTML JPG or AVI files to be added to a CX Supervisor page These files may be stored locally on a File Server or be distributed from any Web Server The Web Browser ob
251. he palette can be mixed by using the red blue and green scroll bars to the right of the palette Each colour in the colour palette is numbered from 0 to 65 number 0 located in the top left position of the palette with numbers reading consecutively across then down with colour number 65 in the bottom right position of the palette Additionally colour numbers 0 to 19 are named for instance colour number 0 is named black Colours 0 to 15 inclusive are system colours and cannot be mixed Although it is possible to mix new colours using the scroll bars it is not possible to save such changes from this palette To ensure new colours are saved use General Settings from the Project menu Note Using a 16 colour based screen resolution consult the Microsoft Windows documentation for further information colours 16 to 65 are dithered from the sixteen base colours Higher colour based resolutions are not dithered Page 178 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 10 Recipes CHAPTER 10 Recipes This chapter describes CX Supervisor recipes and the procedures associated with the creation amendment and removal of recipes using the Recipe Editing facility The use of recipes during the running of a project is also described What is a Recipe A recipe is a means of preparing a sequence of steps which can be repeated verbatim as and when required A typical use for a recipe is to initialise some point data values prior to the commencement of
252. he ODBC DSN driver This is achieved by carrying out the steps as above using the CSV Text file instead Note the Excel provider is still used and a named range in Excel must still be created Configuring Recordsets The Recordset is the heart of the Database facility it contains all of the columns and rows returned from a specific action The Recordset is used to navigate a collection of records and update add delete or modify records Once a Connection has been added to the Workspace the right menu option Add Recordset will be enabled Selecting this option will invoke the following dialog Add Recordset Recordset Properties Recordset TableName SerwerOuem C SOL Text Source M Automatically open on connection Lock Read Only Pessimistic Optimistic Name A unique Recordset name will be automatically provided This can be modified to provide a more meaningful name if required Recordset Type The Recordset can be 1 of 3 types Table Name The Recordset is the name of an actual table in the Database Server Query The Recordset is the results of a pre defined Server Query stored in the database SQL Text The Recordset is the results of an SQL query executed when the Recordset is nnana Release 3 0 Page 219 CHAPTER 12 Databases OMRON opened Note Itis more efficient to run a Server Query than an SQL query Note For Database connections all three of the above options are av
253. he Title Font pushbutton The text font used for the gauge scale can be changed via the Scale Font pushbutton The font size used by the gauge can be automatically calculated for the user by selecting the Auto Font Size option Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 4 Objects Exit the Wizard by clicking the OK pushbutton to accept the new gauge attributes or click the Cancel pushbutton to leave the gauge unchanged Scatter Graph ea Click the Scatter Graph button then click or click and drag on the page to insert a graph To edit the graph double click on it The Scatter Graph Wizard dialog is displayed as follows Scatter Graph Wizard a Configuration Attributes Title Title Sample Aate poo Seconds l Max Samples ho Scatter Symbol Type x Cross Scatter Symbol Colour C Scatter Background Colour ooo I Project Colours W 3 D Frame Iv Auto Size Font Cancel EMMIS PANS FEEL Font Expressions HARIS Browse Asis Browse The Wizard allows entry in the Configuration Attributes and Expressions fields a an ee 1 Enter the frequency of data sampling in the Sample Rate field in this example the sample rate is every thirty seconds 2 Enter the maximum number of samples to be displayed on the scatter graph in the Max Samples field Select the type of symbol to represent the data Select the colour of the symbol representing the data Select the colour of the scatter graph backgro
254. he actual performance figures and provides analysis based on how your application actually works with your network and PLC program Application Analysis An application can be analysed using the Analyse Application option from the main Project menu in the Development package After the application has been analysed the following dialog will be displayed Summary Tab The Summary tab provides an overview of the application data including any warnings or errors found Warnings Tab The Warnings tab identifies specific problems found with the application and may offer suggestions for resolving the problems It many cases it will also be possible to go straight to the source of the problem by accessing the popup menu associated with the item allowing the problem to be resolved directly from the Analyse Application dialog Network Tab The Network tab provides information specific to the selected network configuration Where more than one network is configured each network can be selected independently from a drop down list PLC Tab The PLC tab provides information specific to the selected PLC Where more than one PLC is configured each PLC can be selected independently from a drop down list Page 250 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 15 Application Analysis Performance Monitor Pages Tab The Page tab provides information specific to the selected page Where more than one page is configured e
255. he following attributes are displayed Alarm Type Alarm Attributes l Simple Expression _ Browse fe Deadband Biolertemp gt 100 C Rate of Change s Deadband E A KoA a a An expression based on a point is entered in the Expression field The alarm is raised once the point meets the expression The alarm is cleared when the point value falls outside the expression value plus the specified deadband percentage For the example above an alarm is raised when the boiler s temperature exceeds 100 and is cleared when the boiler temperature falls below 95 100 minus 5 For a Rate of Change alarm the following attributes are displayed Alarm Type Alarm Attributes i Simple este Browse EA Biolertemp gt 100 T Base Direction ROC E 32 Minutes up An expression based on a point is entered in the Expression field The alarm is raised if the value exposed by the expression increases or decreases at the speed based on the values of the ROC field the T Base field and the direction based on the Direction field The alarm is cleared when the rate of change is less than the critical rate For the above example an alarm is raised when the boiler s temperature increases by 5 or more per minute and clears when the boiler s temperature increases by less than 5 per minute Release 3 0 Page 139 CHAPTER 8 Alarms OMRON A point may be inserted into any of the alarm types Expression fi
256. he limit of points in a group There is no imposed limit but it is recommended to limit about 1000 points per group There are two main reasons for this Release 3 0 Page 307 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions OMRON e There is a physical limit on how many lines of text the actual list can display This is dependent on the height of the text With large text you may even find that 1000 is too many e When a group is selected the point list is refreshed and re sorted The sort algorithm takes longer if it has a large list to sort This is normally quick but if the list is large and the points are already in the correctly sorted order in the database then it can take a while because of the way the sorting algorithm works Q Why does setting slider value result in erratic movement of slider action The movement of the slider bar can appear to return to its previous setting once it has been re set After setting the slider to a value it will read the actual value from the PLC this value is then shown in the slider resulting in the slider moving from the re set value to the old value the slider then starts to move towards the re set value This actually better reflects the current value in the PLC but can be undesirable In this case de select the Immediate update on slide move option in the slider wizard to prevent it Q How do optimise my use of animations Animation actions from the Animation Editor can be applied direc
257. he percentage of the network used in the worst case Theoretical max bandwidth scenario This is based on an assumption of bandwidth for the particular network and does not take into account network traffic or other variables Max Bytes Sec This is the theoretical maximum number of bytes per second of updating points this is a better gauge of bandwidth use Max Points Sec Max Elements Sec This is the theoretical maximum number of points that will update each second the higher this number the greater chance of comms problems this value is very dependent on data type though so is not the best reflection on bandwidth use Some points are arrays so the element count reflects the number of elements updated per second Again this is independent of data type but when compared with Max Points Sec can give an idea of how many points are actually array points Outputs On Change The total number of points that are output to the device whenever the value has changed Page 252 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 15 Application Analysis Performance Monitor Outputs On Request The total number of points that are only output to the device when request this can be more efficient if the value changes frequently but the device doesn t need to be notified of this frequently References to non existent points This indicates a big problem you are using a point in a script or in some other action which doesn t exist this will fail if this s
258. he required height in pixels of the object when the result of the expression reaches the Minimum Value A value Release 3 0 Page 161 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON within the maximum and minimum values results in a proportionate height between the minimum and maximum heights The resizing also requires an anchor and direction in which to stretch or shrink This can be specified as the top of the object bottom of the object or centrally to the object by selecting the appropriate Justification setting To abort the Resize Height definition click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed Horizontal Percentage Fill Closed objects can be flood filled along a horizontal axis This can be specified via the Percentage Fill Horizontal dialog To access the Percentage Fill Horizontal dialog to add an action select Percentage Fill Horizontal from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Percentage Fill Horizontal dialog to modify an action select Percentage Fill Horizontal from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar Refer to chapter 9 Objects for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable On selection of the Percentage Fill
259. he selected entry Ga WorkSpace Miel a s Dataset 1 Miller 2 Group 1 Grain i Grain Weight 8 Grain Size Edit Las eF lonr hilled Cut Group 2 Delivery a P DataSet 2 Mixer z n aste O Group 1 Flour J Group 2 Water Delete EA B Volume d Water On Add Data Set i Temperature Add Group a T Water Mix Add Item po K DataSet 3 Dump a d DataSet Moulder Vey Pages oy Alame Fecipes T Logging The functionality of the Items is determined by their expression If the expression is a single point name the item is shown as the same type as the point as configured in the point editor 1 e memory input output or input output If the expression contains calculations constants and or multiple point names the item is shown as a script calculation Adding Editing Data Set Properties The Add Modify Data Set properties dialog is displayed when either the Add Data Set or the Edit an existing Data Set option is selected from the menu Add Data Set Data Set Properties Data Set Name Dataset 1 Miller Period li Monthts ooh nes ta keep 24 M Keep all files M Start Logging on Application Startup Cancel Page 194 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 11 Data Logging Data Set Properties The Data Set Name field enables the Data Set to be referenced with a meaningful description both in the Workspace view and also from the script language
260. he text insert the cursor at the desired dialog field and type lt Ctrl gt V to paste the text Since the cut and copy operations store the information in the Windows Clipboard it may be pasted to another dialog or application View Mode The list of runtime actions can be viewed in a number of ways providing simple or comprehensive details as follows D Select the Large Icons button to view details with large icons z Select the Small Icons button to view details with normal icons Select the List button to view details as a list Select the Details button to view details as a list including runtime actions trigger event expression and access The details can be sorted in ascending order by clicking once or in descending order by clicking twice in the appropriate field Project Graphical objects have no relevance at Project level as they cannot be referenced Scripts can be applied to a project to manipulate points These scripts are associated with events that occur throughout the operating session A script is made up of one or more simple statements that together make script code Page 148 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation Refer to the Script Language Manual for explicit details regarding the construction and syntax of script code Chapter 10 Runtime Actions describes the creation of script code using the Script Editor The script is defined using the Execute Script entry in the Animation Editor list Pag
261. hes the Maximum Value The Minimum Offset specifies the number of pixels to the left from its initial position that the object moves when the result of the expression reaches the Minimum Value A value within the maximum and minimum values results in a proportionate movement between the left and right positions To abort the Horizontal Move definition click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed Vertical Move Objects can be animated by moving either up or down This can be specified via the Move Vertical dialog To access the Move Vertical dialog to add an action select Move Vertical from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Move Vertical dialog to modify an action select Move Vertical from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar Refer to chapter 9 Objects for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable On selection of the Move Vertical action the Move Vertical dialog is displayed Release 3 0 Page 159 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON Expressions Cancel Active Expression Range Required Position TS Minimum Yalue fo Minium Offset 100 Maximum Value 100 Maximum Offset oO To define
262. iant Foro a ee build 313 Foro Applicom hana IO 2A anna as 2 1 1000 e International AXEDA Systems OPC DA Server l L002 0 2 Pass CimQuest OPC Server for 2 25 00 01 reported as 2 25 1 Pass Allen Bradley CimQuest OPC Server for 2 25 00 01 Pass Omron Cyberlogic MBX OPC Server 5 00 02 Pass Technologies Inc although noted not OPC compliant KW Software KW Software 2 0 Pass GmbH ProConOS OPC Server Server Server 3 10 INAT GmbH INAT OPC Server 2 05 37 Pass TCPIPH1 S5 and S7 MPI PPI Wonderware Matrikon OPC Server for 1 1 3 230 Pass Page 302 Release 3 0 OMRON APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions Server Name Product Version National 4 5 3 beta Pass Instruments OSI Software Inc OPC Data Access 1 0 0 14 Pass amp Historical Data although Access Server for noted not the PI System OPC compliant Phoenix Contact Interbus OPC 2 12 Pass GmbH amp Co KG Server Rockwell Software 2 30 00 beta SMAR OPC amp Conf 3 3 0 0 Pass Server for DFI302 SS SS DH OPC Server 1 6 16 T T ControlNet OPC 1 3 0 Pass Server Siemens AG Simatic WinCC V6 0 SP2 Beta Pass although noted not OPC compliant Siemens AG Simatic Net OPC 6 1 Pass Servers IndustrialDataBrid 6 0 3007 ge Siemens Moore APACS OPC 1 00 K beta Pass Device Server Release 3 0 Page 303 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions OMRON The following products have not passed
263. ibute is set by using the appropriate button The following illustration shows the control in de selected state Times New Roman The following illustration shows the control in selected state Times New Roman Woodkype Urnaments 2 aptChancery aptDingbats The Font Name field displays the current font attribute for the selected object s To change the font for a block of text highlight it and click either the down arrow adjacent to the edit part of the control or into the edit part of the control itself for the Font Name field The control then displays a list of available fonts from which the desired typeface may be selected If more than one block of text is selected with each having different font attributes the edit part of the control is empty However selecting a font from the supplied list still sets the font attribute for all the selected group of text blocks Fonts and font families are printer dependent therefore changing the printer within the Printer Setup dialog accessed from the Fi e menu changes the fonts which are available within the Font Name field Font Size The Font Size field contains a list of point sizes available on the host version of Windows for the selected font The list 1s presented in numerical order The following illustration shows the control in de selected state fio Page 22 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 1 Graphics Editor The following illustration shows the
264. ically This can be changed to give a more meaningful description of the connection if required Data Source Enter the database file to be used as a Data Source or locate using the Browse button The following data source file types are supported 4 4 MS Access Files mdb MS Excel Files xls Text Files txt csv FoxPro Files dbf Data Source Names dsn A Data Source Name file stores information about a database connection in a file See Creating a Data Source Name file for more information Note Note Note Connecting to CSV or Text files is slightly different from an actual Database connection Only the Directory that contains the required files should be supplied as a Data Source if a file is selected the connection will fail The actual file to be used is specified later when configuring the Recordset For example if a collection of text or csv files are contained in the directory C Text then a valid connection Data Source is C Text Connections to CSV or Text files using the Provider installed with ADO version 2 0 are read only Records can not be added or amended To create a read write connection to a CSV or Text file see chapter 12 Creating a Read Write connection to CSV Text file Connections to Excel files using the Provider installed with ADO version 2 0 are read only Records can not be added or amended To create a read write connection to an Excel file see ch
265. ick the Close pushbutton Printing S To print a page click the Print Page button from the toolbar The Print dialog is displayed Page 30 Release 3 0 OMRON Print CHAPTER 2 Pages RIES Properties S hats Default printer Ready Type Epson Stylus Pro L Wher 4 S Holly rernote printer 1 Comment Print to file Frint range Copies All Humber of copies li fi i D from to el sk T Collate Selection PEET l Set the print range by clicking one of the settings in the Print range settings The Selection setting is only enabled when an item or items are selected on the page prior to starting the print process Click the Pages setting and enter a range of pages in the from and to fields To change the number of copies to be printed enter a new value in the Copies field If multiple copies are selected click the Collate setting to instruct the printer to collate the copies as they are printed To print to file click the Print to file setting Click the OK pushbutton to activate printing Whilst printing is in progress a dialog is displayed showing the status of the print job Clicking the Cancel pushbutton at this point aborts the printing Once printed the dialog disappears The final printed version should be similar to that shown in the Print Preview dialog with a header describing the project and a footer describing the page with a page number and date stamp Note The Prope
266. icking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed Release 3 0 Page 163 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON Display Page CX Supervisor allows the specification of pages within a project for display This is set up using the Display Page dialog To access the Display Page dialog to add an action select Display Page from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Display Page dialog to modify an action select Display Page from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar Refer to chapter 9 Objects for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable On selection of the Display Page action the Display Page dialog is displayed Display Page Pages to be Displayed OK BALLHELP Cancel Available Pages BALLOONS BALL ELL To specify a page for display select a page from the Available Pages list and click on the Add pushbutton The page entry now appears in the Pages to be Displayed list More than one page can be selected for display If a selected page is no longer required select the entry from the Pages to be Displayed list and click on the Remove pushbutton Once completed click the OK pushbutton To abort the Display Page edit click the Cancel pus
267. id Major Display Units Scale Units Scale Units Colour Configuration attributes can be altered by typing over the existing field entries The style attributes can be amended by clicking on the settings Exit the Axis Scaling dialog by clicking the OK pushbutton to accept the scaling attributes or click the Cancel pushbutton to leave unchanged oa Sliders allow values associated with them to increase or decrease between certain limits They can also ensure that values do not exceed previously set limits Click the Slider button then click or click and drag on the page to insert a slider To edit the Slider double click on it The Slider Wizard dialog is displayed as follows Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 4 Objects Slider Wizard x Slider Style Proportional Slider ae Windows 3 style slider Cancel Browse Style Attributes Configuration Attributes Integer Real Point Minimum Slider Value E E Maximum Slider Yalue 100 W Minimum alue at Left Bottom W Immediate update on slide move Display Vertical The Wizard allows entry of in the Slider Style Style Attributes and Configuration Attributes fields To select a style click on an option from the list box The Style Attributes can be either Display Vertical or Display Horizontal To select a Boolean point click on the Browse pushbutton and select a point from the displayed list Click the OK pushbutton to accept the p
268. id 24 Italics 23 Justification 23 24 Library using the Graphics 131 Lower down one 18 Mirroring 19 Object identity 17 Object identity modify 17 Objects 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 23 Overview 13 Palette 13 Raise up one 18 Status Bar 24 Text 17 24 Text bold 23 Text italics 23 Text underline 23 Tools Palette 16 Transparency 20 Underline 23 Graphics Library See Library Activating the Library 128 Creating Library 128 Modify a Library 129 Opening a Library 129 Graphics Objects Tool Bar 16 Graphs See Trend Graph Grid Graphics Editor 24 Group Manipulating objects 78 Group Attributes 266 GUI 353 A Horizontal Mirror Control Bar 19 I I O Attributes Creating Points 42 I O Types Creating Points 41 I O Update Rate Creating Points 42 Icon 353 Industrial Components Connecting 274 Release 3 0 OMRON Internal Points Point Import 51 Item 353 Item Attributes 267 J Java Script See JScript JScript 353 JVM 353 K Keyboard only control 104 175 176 L Language Setting default 240 Language settings 111 Languages Adding runtime 248 Library About 128 Access 128 Adding a new object 130 Copying an object from a library 130 Creating a library 128 Creating a new library file 129 Default objects 132 Editing library attributes 129 Graphics Editor using the 131 Icon
269. ient points as they don t consume network bandwidth Total OPC Other Points The total number of points that are external to CX Supervisor using a comms interface such as OPC or on another CX Supervisor runtime Total Pages This is the total number of pages in your project including pop up pages This is limited in ME so this gives an idea of when you are approaching this limit Too many pages can make a project hard to maintain so this should be kept to a minimum Release 3 0 Page 253 CHAPTER 15 Application Analysis Performance Monitor OMRON Total PLC Points The total number of points in the application that are on a device Total PLCs The total number of PLCs in this project Any PLCs used on the same network will obviously share bandwidth If there are more PLCs here than you expect check the PLC configuration and make sure you ve not defined a duplicate PLC Total Points The total number of points in the project Obviously for simplicity and performance this should be kept to the minimum you require Total Regular Interval Scripts Regular interval scripts indicate poor design decisions Running a script on a regular interval can be inefficient and cause a significant increase on local CPU usage If regular interval scripts also update points on devices this can lead to increased bandwidth use Consider using an on condition script instead Total Sleep commands The sleep command has been shown to cause pr
270. ierarchical recordsets differ from a JOIN in that with a JOIN both the parent table fields and child table fields are represented in the same recordset With a hierarchical recordset the recordset contains only fields from the parent table In addition the recordset contains an extra field that represents the related child data which you can assign to a second recordset variable and traverse Hierarchical recordsets are made available via the MSDataShape provider which is implemented by the client cursor engine A new clause SHAPE is provided to relate SELECT statements in a hierarchical fashion The syntax 1s summarized below Page 230 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 12 Databases SHAPE parent command AS name APPEND child command AS name RELATE parent field TO child field child2 command Note By default the child recordsets in the parent recordset will be called Chapter 1 Note Note Note Chapter 2 etc unless you use the optional AS name clause to name the child recordset You can nest the SHAPE command The parent command and or child command can contain another SHAPE statement The parent command and child command do not have to be SQL SELECT statements They can use whatever syntax is supported by data provider A child recordset will be automatically opened closed whenever its Parent recordset is opened closed A child recordset is effectively a field of its parent reco
271. ight rate the expression is height rate where the result yielded from the expression is used for the value Or bate Outside of the script language expressions consisting of operators and operands can be used to control objects through actions A field association enables a link to be made between a CX Supervisor Point and a particular field 1 e column within a recordset Release 3 0 OMRON Graphic Object GUI I O type Icon Ingredient Integer type Item JScript JVM Microsoft Excel Microsoft Windows Microsoft Word for Windows Nesting Network Release 3 0 GLOSSARY OF TERMS CX Supervisor User Manual In CX Supervisor a graphic object is created in the development environment and can be a line an arc a polygon including a square and rectangle a round rectangle an ellipse including a circle or a polyline A complex object can exist as a combination of two or more graphic objects Graphical User Interface Part of a program that interacts with the user and takes full advantage of the graphics displays of computers A GUI employs pull down menus and dialog boxes for ease of use Like all Microsoft Windows based applications CX Supervisor has a GUI Input Output type An attribute of a point that defines the origin and destination of the data for that point The data for a point can originate be input from and is destined is output to to the internal computer memory or PLC Pictorial
272. ilar notation Release 3 0 Page 231 CHAPTER 12 Databases OMRON Compound Relation Hierarchy example This sample illustrates a three level hierarchy of customers orders and order details SHAPE SELECT from customers APPEND SHAPE select from orders APPEND select from order details AS rsDetails RELATE orderid TO orderid AS rsOrders RELATE customerid TO customerid In addition to the Simple Relation Hierarchy example the Order ID is now used to create a recordset containing the order details for the shown order Hierarchy with Aggregate example SHAPE select from orders APPEND select od orderid od UnitPrice od quantity as ExtendedPrice from order details As od RELATE orderid TO orderid As rsDetails SUM ExtendedPrice AS OrderTotal This example creates a Recordset of all the orders and their details and adds a field called ExtendedPrice to store the total order value for each record and sums all the ExtendedPrice values which is stored in Order Total Group Hierarchy example SHAPE select customers customerid AS cust id orders from customers inner join orders on customers customerid orders customerid AS rsOrders COMPUTE rsOrders BY cust id Group Hierarchy with Aggregate example SHAPE SHAPE select customers orders orderid orders orderdate from customers inner join orders on customers customerid orders customerid APPEND select od orderid od unitprice
273. ill be reported in the output window and double clicking on a specific error will usually take you directly to the source of that error During a full rebuild all pages that are successfully recompiled will optionally be saved automatically All pages that fail to recompile are not saved This means that it will still be possible to build and run the application after a Rebuild All has been carried out if it was possible to build it and run it before the Rebuild All operation Note the rebuild all recommended warning message can be disabled via the Editing Preferences dialog Due to a change of syntax in a previous release of CX Supervisor the Display and Close script functions CX Supervisor Script will NOT compile if they use the old syntax e g Display Page They must be changed to the new syntax e g Display Page If an application with these issues is not recompiled then it will continue to run correctly in the Runtime Running a Project To run the current project click on the Run button on the toolbar This will automatically build the project if required The CX Supervisor runtime environment starts and automatically runs the project in a separate dialog which is given the name of the project It allows examination of project alarm details and the run history Page 118 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects Running a Project with CX Simulator The Run with Simulator option enables you to test
274. in a dropdown listbox To abort the Edit Point Value Digital edit click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed During runtime selecting the user input object by clicking the left mouse button results in the digital value being edit either with the runtime User Input Digital dialog being displayed or the in place listbox based on the contents of the development version Release 3 0 Page 173 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON Select ON or OFF Current State Off Select New State The user is provided with an instruction based on the Runtime Display Attributes field in this example Select New State and On and Off settings based on the State 0 Text and State 1 Text fields The user clicks the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation Edit Point Value Analogue The value of a Real or Integer point may be issued to the user for amendment during runtime defined using the User Input Analogue dialog To access the User Input Analogue dialog to add an action select Edit Point Value Analogue from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the User Input Analogue dialog to modify an action select Edit Point Value Analogue from the animation li
275. in the runtime environment To modify an existing recipe highlight the recipe from the recipe list and select the Modify Recipe button from the toolbar The Modify Recipe dialog is displayed as follows Page 188 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 10 Recipes Configuration Attributes Recipe Name otfee Cancel Descriptior Save Recipe As Black coffee Recipe Ingredients Ingredient Hame Luantity E xoression Editable T Black Coffee Modify Target This runtime version of the dialog is rather more limited in the power it offers than the equivalent dialog in the development environment this is so that recipes which have been painstakingly created in the development environment cannot be accidentally overwritten or destroyed in the runtime environment The two pushbuttons unique to the Runtime of the dialog are Modify Target and Save Recipe As With the appropriate ingredient selected from the list clicking the Modify Target pushbutton allows the target value to be modified by means of the Modify Ingredient dialog shown below Modify Ingredient Quantity Ingredient Attributes Ingredient H ame Milk Cancel New Quantity E Keyboard The target value for this ingredient may be changed by entering the new value in the New Target field Selecting the OK pushbutton accepts the change choosing the Cancel pushbutton aborts the change Note The new target value is applied only to this recipe
276. ing it CX Supervisor always has access to the most up to date copy of the object every time the page containing it 1s opened Placing a check mark in the Link field forges a link between the page and the file containing the object All other activities are carried out in an identical manner to those explained previously The following illustrates a Microsoft Excel Chart object which has been inserted in a page tele ay st S eastlo o Ael est E O R z v gt A wie ete amp B fal i Chart2 4 b Funning c program M2 5 61 Mog 4 Release 3 0 Page 347 APPENDIX F Obsolete Features OMRON Activating an Object To activate an embedded or linked object merely double click using the left mouse button on the object s graphical representation on the page either a true representation of the object or an icon If the object is a document or image Windows activates the application that created the object and places it ready to be edited In the following example the bitmap image when activated launches the Format Chart Area application to allow editing Joe E Say sBBs o o elz Ma B BIZ u 8 3 EE H W ho SERIES Sheet1 C 2 Sheet1 B3 B 6 Sheetl C 3 C 6 1 A 21x Format Data Series Patterns Axis Y Error Bars Data Labels Series Order Options Border Area Automatic Automatic None f None C Custom ETELE EE se
277. ing the appropriate box in the Advanced Point Settings dialog when the point is created or modified Note All CX Supervisor System points are given OLE2 read access by default CX Supervisor exposes the following Runtime functions via OLE2 Automation SetValue stringPointName Value Enables any point with OLE Read Write access to be modified value may be Boolean integer long or string GetValue stringPointName amp Value Enables any point with OLE Read access to be monitored value may be Boolean integer long or string QueryCount Returns the total number of points in the CX Supervisor database Queryld stringPointName Returns the WORD id of a given point name The id is an integer in the range between 1 and the total number of points in the CX Supervisor database QueryOLE wordID Returns the Read Write access rights of a point as an integer 0 represents no access type 1 represents Read Only 2 represents Read Write 3 represents an invalid access type QueryType wordID Returns the points data type as an integer from a given id 0 represents a void datatype represents a digital datatype 2 represents an integer datatype 3 represents a real datatype 4 represents a text datatype 5 represents an invalid datatype QueryName wordID Returns the points name string from a given identity CX Supervisor provides OLE Automation helper routines and code examples in the OLE2AUTO subdirectory Refer to the file OL
278. inserted Release 3 0 Page 83 CHAPTER 5 ActiveX Objects OMRON 2 Turn on the ActiveX toolbar from the View Toolbars menu 3 Ifthe control you require already exists on the ActiveX toolbar a Select the required control or if the required control is not on the toolbar 35 b Click Configure ActiveX Toolbar button and select the required component from the dialog Customize ToolBox JCSSEdP TitleB ar PCT ree iew Control Currenty MCI Class CXGaugeCtl Class Data Command Control Data Range Footer Control Data Range Header Control DataForn izard6 cth izard DE Grid Control 4 Draw a rectangle in the desired position Editing Properties at Design Time The properties of ActiveX objects can be edited during the design stage using the following procedure I 2 3 1 Open the ActiveX Property Browser by clicking the ActiveX Property P Browser button in the toolbar or by selecting the ActiveX Property Browser option from the Utilities menu 2 With the ActiveX Property Browser displayed select the appropriate ActiveX control This will list the full range of property names available for that control in the browser and their values 3 The Value of each Name can be changed as required by clicking in the value box and entering the new value Some options require you to enter specific information others provide a choice of entries from a drop down menu 4 To edit the values of other A
279. int receives data from or receives a request for data from an external Client application This chapter explains how to create DDE Server Points these points are exposed to DDE Client applications either for Read Only or Read Write access In order for a point to take part in a conversation with a DDE Client it must be given DDE Access The following dialog demonstrates how to give a Real memory point DDE Read Write access A DDE Server point is created as follows y 2S i l 2 a Release 3 0 Select the Add Point button from the Point Editor toolbar The Add Point dialog is displayed Enter a meaningful name for the DDE Server point in the Point Name field Click on the Advanced pushbutton The Advanced Point Settings dialog is displayed Advanced Point Settings Ea OLE Access M ReadOnly Read Write Cancel DDE Access M Non Volatile Validate Bont ie within Specitied Menge Page 337 APPENDIX F Obsolete Features OMRON 4 Ensure the DDE Access Read Write setting is set to ON 5 Click the OK pushbutton to accept the settings in both the Advanced Point Settings dialog and the Add Point dialog Note The DDE Access group s Read Write box in the Advanced Point Settings dialog is checked this is the only action required to expose DDESVR3 to a DDE Client application for read write access Note Any CX Supervisor point can be given DDE Access even DDE Client
280. int sharing for Netware Networks as appropriate Start DCOMCNFG EXE e g by selecting RUN from the Start button The default location is C WINDOWS SYSTEM View the Default Properties tab Ensure that the Enable Distributed COM on this computer is checked View the Default Security tab and check the Enable remote connection check box From the Default Properties tab configure the Default Authentication Level to Connect and the Default Impersonation Level to Identify Setup the access permissions by either a On the Default Security tab adding the user to the Access list by clicking the Edit Default button in each case The user added should have Administrator rights on the local PC If not it may be necessary to add user groups INTERACTIVE and NETWORK as well b From the Applications tab configure the properties for OPC Server and OPC ServerList Class On the Security tab add the required users to each of the Custom Permissions The users added should have Administrator rights on the local PC If not it may be necessary to add user groups INTERACTIVE and NETWORK as well Third party servers and clients running on Windows 98 or ME may require the Microsoft Remote Registry network service to be installed with the operating system and correctly configured on both the server and client machine To check start the Control Panel and view the Network settings In the list of network components look for Micro
281. ints OMRON It is possible to import points from the CDM file of another CX Supervisor project but this is not recommended as only the name type and address are imported A better method is to copy the points from one application to the clipboard and paste them in the required application This way all point information is copied Steps to import from another CDM file 1 Open the Import PLC Points From Another CX Server Project dialogue 2 Press Open Project and find the project to import from 3 Select the tab depending upon the I O type required 4 Click the Add button and select the symbols required 5 Add these to the CX Supervisor project by clicking the Add button 6 Press OK to return 7 Repeat for other I O types 8 Press OK to finish System Points System Points are those points that are pre defined within CX Supervisor They cannot be edited or deleted but their attributes can be viewed All system points can be selected from the System Point dialog System points are listed in the points list and are denoted by a symbol preceding the point name To view system points only select System Points from the Group field Once listed the Boolean Points Integer Points Real Points Text Points and All Points pushbuttons on the toolbar are unavailable for selection To view other points select All Groups from the Group field Time Points The following table describes system points for use with time based operatio
282. ion It can at times be difficult to select a particular object if it is mostly obscured by other graphic objects The Object Identification control allows an object to be selected by simply selecting its name from the presented list Click on the arrow button to display the list and select the desired object On selection the object is highlighted The following illustration shows the Object Identification control in de selected state Polygon_1 The following illustration shows the Object Identification control in selected state Raise Up One CH The Raise Up One button allows an object which forms part of an overlapping group of objects to be moved nearer the top of the group one layer at a time With an object selected clicking the pushbutton once moves the object up one layer This continues until the object Release 3 0 Page 17 CHAPTER 1 Graphics Editor OMRON is at the top Clicking the pushbutton with the object at the top of a group has no effect The following example illustrates the state of a group of two objects before and after clicking the Raise Up One button with the black round rectangle selected Before After Lower Down One re The Lower Down One button allows an object which forms part of an overlapping group of objects to be moved nearer the bottom of the group one layer at a time With an object selected clicking the button once moves the object down one layer This continues until the object
283. ipt code to re evaluate the expression They do this whenever a point changes value or is re evaluated e g a value is received from the PLC at the point s usual scan rate This removes any sampling error associated with polling and also makes CX Supervisor very efficient Q How do display Real Numbers and Decimal Places In graphics editor select text tool from palette and type text e g Temperature C The after the decimal point indicate the precision of the real number display e g to 3 decimal places Finally select animation editor and animate with Display Value Analogue and assign the point name e g TEMP Q Which Operating system should I use Windows XP Professional Windows NT Windows 2000 and Windows XP Professional all offer the best stability reliability multitasking security and DCOM support On the same spec machine Windows NT is actually up to 10 faster probably as it has the least developed code although Windows 2000 and XP are faster on their appropriate minimum specification machines Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows ME are no longer supported Q How do l optimise the use of Files When closing a file using the CloseFile script function if TRUE is passed as a parameter e g CloseFile TRUE then the blank spaces at the end of each line will be removed thus reducing the size of the file Care should be taken if the file is being used by multiple systems over a network drive Q What is t
284. ish creating the polyline click the right mouse button To edit a polyline obtain the red grab handles Click on an edge to add a vertex Press the lt Delete gt key whilst moving a vertex to delete it To finish editing click elsewhere on the page Rectangle DE Rectangles can be transparent or filled with a colour or pattern To create a filled rectangle click the Rectangle button fecal To create a rectangle frame click the Rectangle Frame button Alternatively select a filled rectangle and click the Transparency button from the toolbar Click on the page to draw a square or click and drag to create a rectangle of the required size Once created rectangles can be edited exactly like polygons To finish editing click elsewhere on the page Round Rectangle Rounded rectangles can be transparent or filled with a colour or pattern To create a filled rounded rectangle click the Round Rectangle button from the Tool Bar Page 58 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 4 Objects To create a rounded rectangle frame click the Round Rectangle Frame Alternatively select a filled round rectangle and click the Transparency button from the Control Bar Click on the page to draw a rounded square or click and drag to create a rounded rectangle of the required size To edit the rounded rectangle obtain the red grab handles The radius of curvature of the rounding can be adjusted by clicking on the single red grab handle and dragging
285. it as illustrated below ee ee eee eee ene oOo IK Text A To insert text click the Text button Click on the page and type inside the red edit box The cursor is moved round the text using the arrow keys Standard text editing tools from the toolbar and the keyboard can be used and their effect applies to the whole content of the object To edit text double click on it A box is displayed round the text Press lt Return gt to finish editing and create a new text object on the line below To finish editing click elsewhere on the page Creating and Editing Control Objects Alarm Object Z Click the Alarm button then click or click and drag on the page to insert the alarm object The Alarm object displays alarm messages in runtime These messages may be optionally filtered by an alarm group and can be formatted to include the date time and status of the alarm If there are more alarms to view than the space provided then you can scroll the alarm view To edit an Alarm object double click on it The Alarm Wizard dialog is displayed as follows Release 3 0 Page 59 CHAPTER 4 Objects OMRON Alarm Wizard Display Alarms From Selected Groups Acknowledge Un Click Group Filter kan Groups all Users Cancel Display Alarms From Selected Priorities Pan From Friority Lowest To Highest Alarm Status Colours Alarm indon Colours Into Alarm C M Blink E Alarm Ackd C M Blink Alarm Cle
286. ject before and after clicking the Mirror Vertical button with the object selected Before After Transparency On Off I The Transparency button changes an object from solid to outline and from outline to solid With an object selected click the button and the object toggles from solid to outline or vice versa Release 3 0 Page 19 CHAPTER 1 Graphics Editor OMRON The following example illustrates the state of an object before and after clicking the Transparency button with the object selected Before After Set Transparent Colour The Set Transparent Colour button allows the optional transparent colour of picture objects with bmp and gif file types to be set By clicking the Set Transparent Colour button and then clicking on a colour on the image you can select the colour that will appear transparent The following example illustrates the effect of using the transparency colour in conjunction with the transparency mode to remove the unwanted parts of the image Status Bar CX Supervisor provides help and status information in a Status Bar located at the bottom of the main window The Status Bar has two main active areas the Help Message area and the Cursor Co ordinates area The Help Message area is used by CX Supervisor to display helpful information concerning menu selections and controls It is located at the left hand end of the Status Bar and can display messages similar to the following Page 20
287. ject includes a Java Virtual Machine JVM allowing execution of Java Script and Java Applets Double click the object to show the property page and enter the file to be displayed either as a filename or a fully qualified URL for example with http prefix Manipulating Objects Once inserted objects can be manipulated to give the required results An object must be selected before it can be manipulated Select To select an object either click on it with the left mouse button or select it from the object identification control for further details on this control refer to chapter 1 Graphics Editor Eight grab handles are displayed around the object To select several objects within a rectangular area use a rubber band by clicking the left mouse button and dragging over an area as illustrated below It is also possible to select all the objects a rubber band intersects by holding down the lt Ctrl gt key whilst rubber banding a selection as illustrated below Page 76 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 4 Objects Multiple objects can be selected by holding the lt Shift gt key down and clicking on each object in turn Objects can also be de selected in similar fashion Grab handles are displayed for each selected object The most recent object to be selected from the group is denoted by its green grab handles all other grab handles are cyan The co ordinates of the most recent selection are displayed in the status bar
288. ke most areas CX Supervisor provides this functionality in an easy to use way with a few simple dialogs The CX Supervisor Multilingual features can easily be divided into two clear sections Development and Runtime Users of each section have different needs and so these sections function completely separately For example it is possible to develop an application in any language but this does not affect which language the user must use at runtime in any way Note Note Note Page 238 The distinction between the development program and runtime program and their respective target users is very important to understand and will help you understand the following sections CX Supervisor is designed and tested for use with European versions of Microsoft Windows Every language permutation is not tested and no testing is performed on other versions like Russian Japanese or Chinese etc as this is simply standard Microsoft functionality However you should ensure your translated application can be correctly deployed before starting full development for example by creating a small test application The formatting of character tables used by CX Supervisor for multilingual features is the worldwide standard Unicode format This product therefore only runs on Unicode compliant Operating Systems i e Windows 2000 Windows XP and later products Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 14 Multilingual Features Development Features For the bene
289. l pushbutton to abort Alarm Settings To open the Alarm Settings dialog select Alarm Settings from the Runtime Settings menu The dialog is displayed as follows Alarm Settings On Alarm Automatically Display Alarm Status Viewer Alarm Histor Log Cancel Alarm Sound Maximum entries in Status Viewer 20 Masimum entries in History Log 200 Log system start stop messages Alarm Status Messages C Use Language File Text Raised Text alarm Cleared Text Bead Acknowledged Text Jacknowledged Auto Acknowledged Text Automatically Acknowledged Release 3 0 Page 107 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON In the On Alarm Automatically Display area set the Alarm Status Viewer and Alarm History Viewer settings as required When these options are set the Current Alarms viewer or Alarm History viewer respectively 1s automatically displayed in runtime when an alarm occurs Set the Maximum entries in Status Viewer and Maximum entries in History Log fields to the desired values The numbers specify how many messages are displayed in the respective viewer dialogs in runtime Select the Log system start stop messages setting to ON if required Note If more messages exist than are requested to be displayed the most recent messages are displayed in preference to older messages The values shown above are sensible defaults In the Alarm Status Messages area if the User Defined Text option is s
290. l Package installed and then saved to a network drive solid state flash disk or USB key and transferred to the IPC Note Right mouse clicks can be simulated using the Event Selector mouse icon on the System Tray When clicked the next touch screen press is a right click This is sometimes required for accessing context menus Note Windows Explorer has Folder Options to allow a single icon click to open the item This can enhance usability Note The touch screen confirmation sound can be controlled and turned off from the Advanced tab on the Pointer Devices settings in the Control Panel Note Running the CX Supervisor Runtime Only package on the DyaloX IPC is recommended CX Supervisor Developer Package can be run although some features are easier to use with an external keyboard and mouse be fitted The Full developer package also requires more disk space Installing CX Supervisor To install CX Supervisor Runtime only package manually l First install CX Server manually by launching Setup exe from the CX Server folder on the installation CD If required for space reasons change the install folder from the default e g to drive D 2 Install CX Supervisor Runtime Only package If required for space reasons change the install folder from the default e g to drive D and choose NOT to install CX Server as part of the installation as it has already been done in step 1 above 3 Install any ActiveX c
291. l alarm definitions can be displayed by selecting lt A Groups gt from this list Individual listed alarms are sorted based on a designated field type name type or description By selecting the Name field the alarms are sorted alphanumerically by name The Type and Description fields once selected react in the same way The Alarm Editor dialog shows the alarms in name order zalf The widths of the alarm fields can be widened or narrowed as required using the mouse to drag the column boundaries Ra The typeface of the editor can be amended by selecting Preferences from the File gg 5g4 menu This is especially useful when printing ie C The Change General Alarm Settings button on the toolbar displays the Alarm Settings dialog which allows global alarm settings to be modified Refer to chapter 8 Alarm Header Information 2 Select the Large Icons button to view details with large icons ee Select the Small Icons button to view details with normal icons e7 Select the List button to view details as a list Select the Details button to view details as a list including name type expression priority and description information The details can be sorted in ascending order by clicking once or in descending order by clicking twice in the appropriate field Page 136 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 8 Alarms aj A summary of alarm information is available by selecting the Display Information on Alarms button from the tool
292. laced with OLE technology See also Item Server server application and Topic SCADA applications are created and tested using the development environment within CX Supervisor On completion the finished application can be delivered as a final customer application to be run by the run time environment Dynamic Link Library A program file that although cannot be run stand alone as an executable can be utilised by one or more applications or programs as a common service DLL files have a DLL extension DLL s comprise a number of stand alone functions In CX Supervisor a DLL containing icons can be accessed to represent the display part of an OLE object One such DLL MORICONS DLL is provided in the standard Microsoft Windows installation A recipe is downloaded during runtime This process involves identifying the appropriate recipe and executing the validation code if any exists The download is complete when each ingredient has set its point to the target value A file that contains programs or commands of an application that can be executed by a user or another application Executable files have a EXE file extension CX Supervisor provides two executable files one for the development environment CXSUPERVISORDEV EXE and one for the run time environment SCS EXE In the CX Supervisor script language expressions are a construct for computing a value from one or more operands For instance in the example lift he
293. ld libraries by dragging from one dialog to another Once a library object is added to the Graphics Editor it can be further modified since each library object is simply a group of objects As an example a page can be enhanced by using one of the gauges provided in the Gauges 1 default graphic library Graphics Library Library Release 3 0 Page 131 CHAPTER 7 Graphics Library OMRON The gauge object can be stretched to suit the needs of the page and other objects can be applied on top of or in addition to the gauge A library object can also be ungrouped by selecting Ungroup from the Edit menu at E3 El The Cut Copy and Paste buttons on the toolbar can be used as an alternative to dragging Point Substitution If the library object includes animation actions the Point Substitution dialog will be automatically displayed This allows the points associated with the object to be quickly updated for use in the current project For full details on Point Substitution refer to Chapter 4 Objects Default Graphic Library Objects CX Supervisor contains default ready to use libraries They cannot be added to this is denoted by the READ ONLY statement at the bottom of the Graphics Library Editor although they can be applied to a page and tailored in the usual way Conversion to Individual Page Objects The majority of items in the default CX Supervisor Graphics Libraries are metafiles and so support conversion int
294. lick the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed Edit Point Value Digital The value of a Boolean point may be issued to the user for amendment during runtime defined using the User Input Digital dialog To access the User Input Digital dialog to add an action select Edit Point Value Digital from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the User Input Digital dialog to modify an action select Edit Point Value Digital from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar For a list of the objects to which this action is applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On selection of the Edit Point Value Digital action the dialog is displayed Edit Point Yalue Digital Boolean Point OK Runtime Display Attributes Cancel dili Browse Caption Select ON or OFF State O Text OFF State 1 Tert JON In Place Edit A Boolean point must be entered This is typed into the Boolean Point field A text string to use as the caption of a user dialog can be entered in the Caption field The range of input for the value and the representations of Boolean State 0 and Boolean State 1 are specified in the State 0 Text field and State I Text field If In Place Edit is not checked a popup dialog performs the edit If it is checked the option is edited on the page with the options
295. lling DBExecute with the BeginTrans command From that point any request to add modify or delete records are stored instead of being immediately processed The Transaction is completed either by calling DBExecute with the CommitTrans command which processes all the stored requests in one go or by calling DBExecute with the RollbackTrans command which discards all the stored requests leaving the database as it was when the Transaction started Nested Transactions Transactions may be nested that is a new transaction may be started before the preceding transaction has been completed In this case any CommitTrans or RollbackTrans commands relate to the most recently started transaction and any further CommitTrans or RollbackTrans commands relate to the transaction begun before it Note Care should be taken to ensure that each BeginTrans is matched with a CommitTrans or RollbackTrans to ensure that your work is saved or discarded as required If there are any pending transactions when a connection is closed the user will be prompted to either commit or rollback these outstanding transactions A DBExecute command TransCount is available which returns the number of pending transactions Note Not all Providers support use of Transactions Release 3 0 Page 229 CHAPTER 12 Databases OMRON Saving Recordsets as XML Using the DBExecute Save command any Recordset may be saved as an XML file to be imported in to
296. lls denote the animation function is not available for the object The icons within the table header denote the object created by that icon Refer to chapter 1 Graphics Editor for further details In addition an object can be animated in the form of a script A script is made up of one or more statements An example of object script code is as follows REM SET UP THE COLOUR FLAGS Release 3 0 Page 151 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON Paintblue TRUE paintgreen FALSE paintred FALSE paintpurple FALSE paintyellow FALSE paintwhite FALSE REM SET UP THE VALVE POSITION Bluevalve TRUE greenvalve FALSE redvalve FALSE Changepaint TRUE Refer to the Script Language Manual for full details regarding the construction and syntax of script code The script is created by selecting the Execute Script entry in the Animation Editor list Chapter 10 Runtime Actions describes the application of object animations Printing the Animation Editor Print Setup The Animation Editor can be printed in the same way pages can Before printing ensure that the printer has been set up correctly To check the printer settings refer to chapter 2 Pages Print Preview To preview the page before printing select Print Preview from the File menu Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print Preview display Printing To print the contents of the Animation Editor select the Print button from the toolbar
297. lly converted to Unicode when they are loaded and will then be saved in Unicode This works without problem if the project is English or contains no extended characters However there can be problems converting old MBCS that use extended German Spanish Finnish and especially MBCS Russian characters Follow this section to load and convert these types of projects properly Release 3 0 Page 245 CHAPTER 14 Multilingual Features OMRON Note As always when updating the format of the project file to a new file version always keep a copy of the old project for backup purposes Note For the conversion process to work properly and all extended characters to be correctly converted it is vital that the conversion takes place while the computer is configured to correctly display these characters Failure to follow these steps will result in extended characters being substituted for the nearest suitable character which is likely to be incorrect and cause errors Once saved the conversion error cannot be undone so any occurrences will need to be edited manually This can be time consuming and should be avoided These settings are only required temporarily during the conversion process Once converted to Unicode the Operating System can be reconfigured and the Unicode characters will be displayed correctly Windows XP To configure Windows XP to correctly display extended characters to allow conversion to Unicode 1 Open Control Panel
298. lly placed in the correct position in the Data Set and given a default group number New or existing Groups can be renamed by first high lighting the current group name and then selecting the Edit option from the popup menu When the edit box is displayed the name can then be edited in the normal way A maximum of 26 characters is allowed Unwanted groups can only be Deleted they can not be cut and pasted Release 3 0 Page 197 CHAPTER 11 Data Logging OMRON Data Logging at Runtime Overview All data logging is performed on Items which are stored in a Data Set The System can contain many Data Sets and each Data Set can contain many Items Each Data Set will have its own set of files when the System is run see the chapter 11 File Management The amount of data that is stored in a single Data Set file 1s determined by the specified period when the Data Set is created File Management Data Logging Directory All data log files are stored in the directory Data Logging separate from the CX Supervisor files This directory is created automatically when the project runs for the first time A sub directory is used as a safeguard against the accidental deletion of important files by the automatic purge mechanism and to prevent the project directory from becoming cluttered with data files For example if the CX Supervisor project is in a directory called C CX Supervisor Project then when the project runs for the first time a new
299. log to add an action select Visibility from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Visibility dialog to modify an action select Visibility from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar For a list of the objects to which this action is applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On execution of the Visibility action the Visibility dialog is displayed Release 3 0 Page 169 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON Visibility Ea Digital Expression Cancel Cancel Visibility State Browse Invisible while TRAUE Visible while FALSE Visible while TAUE Invisible while FALSE To specify a change in an objects visibility enter a Boolean expression in the Digital Expression field Non Boolean expressions may be entered as long as the result is TRUE or FALSE Whether the object is rendered visible or invisible when the expression is TRUE is specified with the Visibility State settings To abort the Visibility edit click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed Display Value Digital The state of a Boolean point may be displayed using the Display Value Digital dialog To access the Display Value Digital dial
300. lue specified is passed as the parameter to the query When checked the current value of the point is passed as the parameter Point The name of the point to be used The Browse button may be used to select a current point or add a new one Value The constant value to be used Page 224 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 12 Databases Configuring Schemas Schemas enable information about a Database to be obtained from a Provider There are a large number of Schema Types available The most useful feature of schemas is the ability to obtain Table and Query names from the Database in fact schemas are used by the Development Environment to populate the Combo boxes when working with live connections The information to be returned from the Provider is determined by specifying a Schema Type and a Criteria The Criteria argument is an array of values that can be used to limit the results of a schema query Each Schema type has a different set of Criteria that it supports A Schema is configured by selecting the desired Connection and choosing the right menu option Add Schema to invoke the following dialog Add Schema Association E Schema Association Properties Hame T ables Cancel Point tat able ames Browse Type IT ables Preview Criteria TAB LE NAME Filter TAB LE M Read on Connection Name A unique Schema name will be automatically provided This can be modified to provide a
301. ly in VBScript using the normal dot syntax for example VBSCRIPT Displayl Value 100 ENDIF For more details see the CX Supervisor Script Language Reference Manual Calling Methods at Run Time ActiveX methods can also be called at runtime This is achieved by using the Supervisor script function Execute or alternatively in VBScript using the normal dot syntax for example VBSCRIPT CommonDialogl ShowOpen ENDIF Again for more details see the CX Supervisor Script Language Reference Manual Responding to Events Some ActiveX components are written to generate events on certain conditions like mouse clicking or user input or error conditions You can write a script to execute whenever any event occurs These scripts are defined as subroutines in the page initialisation script as they may be called any time the page is open To easily add these subroutines from the ActiveX property browser click the Events tab This shows all the event types for this control and any parameters the event may pass for example the code number of the key pressed Select the event name to add or edit the script for and click the square edit button Page 86 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 5 ActiveX Objects Actives Property Browser Scrollbar Properties Events gt BeforeDragO ver Cancel Data 1 Y Drag gt BeforeDropOrPaste Cancel Action Data 8 Change Error Humber Description SC keD own kepCode Shift Key
302. m Attributes 267 With Omrons OPC Server 263 274 Release 3 0 OMRON V VBScript 356 Vertical Mirror Control Bar 19 VGA 356 Video Graphics Adapter 356 Viewing Points 36 Viewing Project Details Project Editor 126 Viewing the Contents of a Project Project Editor 124 Views Details view 37 126 136 148 180 Large icon view 37 125 136 148 180 List view 37 126 136 148 180 Small icon view 37 125 136 148 180 Visual Basic See VBScript W What is a Point 35 What is OPC 258 Release 3 0 INDEX CX Supervisor User Manual Windows Desktop 356 Windows Scripting Host 356 Windows Taskbar 356 Wizard 356 Gauge Wizard 66 68 Pushbutton Wizard 67 Slider Wizard 70 71 Toggle Button Wizard 71 Trend Graph 74 Wizards Editing Objects 57 WSH See Windows Scripting Host Z Zoom Manipulating objects 80 Page 367
303. mErrors 53 Millisecond 50 Minute 50 Month 51 MonthName 51 MouseX 52 MouseY 52 PLCBusy 53 PLCFailures 53 ScreenSizeX 52 ScreenSizeY 52 Second 51 SecurityLevel 53 SecurityName 53 ShortMonthName 51 ShortWeekDayName 51 ShortYear 51 Time 51 UnacknowledgedAlarms 52 UserName 53 WeekDay 51 WeekDayName 51 WeekOfYear 51 Year 51 Description of 50 System Points 50 Page 366 OMRON T Temperature Controllers See Industrial Components Text Creating Editing Graphic Objects 59 Text Editing text on a page 57 59 Text Bar 21 Font Name 22 24 Font Size 22 Text Bold On Off 23 Text Centered 24 Text Italic On Off 23 Text Justified 23 Text Underline On Off 23 Text Bold Text Bar 23 Text Centered Text Bar 24 Text Italics Text Bar 23 Text Left Aligned Text Bar 23 Text Right Aligned Text Bar 24 Text Underline Text Bar 23 Time Points Point Import 50 Toggle Button Wizard See Wizard Toggle Button Control Objects 71 Transparency Manipulating objects 78 Transparency On Off Control Bar 19 Trend Graph Inserting a trend graph 74 Wizard See Wizard Trend Graph Control Objects 74 Troubleshooting 320 Two Tier Client Server or Master Slave 269 U Undo Manipulating objects 78 Unicode 238 245 356 Using CX Supervisor 238 258 Group Attributes 266 Ite
304. mation Editor dialog lists all possible animation actions in the Runtime Actions column Attributable objects for the Runtime Actions are listed in the Trigger Event Expression column Animations can be instigated on a Project Page or Object basis by selecting Object Actions Page Actions or Project Actions from the Actions field When opening the Animation Editor whilst an object within a page is selected the Actions field defaults to Object Actions and the selected object is shown in the Animation Editor When accessing the Animation Editor with a page selected this field defaults to Page Actions When opening the Animation Editor whilst no selection is made the Actions field defaults to Project Actions The actions that may be applied to an object are dependant on the type of object selected Only one type of action Execute Script can be applied to a Page or Project script The Users field allows selection of which users can use the selected page in the Runtime environment This is used in conjunction with allocating users and allowing them permission to perform tasks for further information on allocating users refer to chapter 6 Projects If Object Actions 1s the current selection for the Actions field an object becomes active in the Object left most field An object within the current page can be selected from the Object field The Runtime Actions list is dependant on the object selected from this box The Object field is disabled for Pa
305. metafiles wmf Enhanced metafiles emf JPEG jpeg jpg and GIF files gif Click the Picture button then click or click and drag on the page to insert a picture placeholder To insert a picture double click on the placeholder The Picture Wizard dialog is displayed as follows Picture Wizard File Hame Directories bmp wmf coh MOMron CcH Supervisor EE gt oc PROGRAM FILES OMRON fee LA SUpervisar C cdm C5 scsy2o x Ei List Files of Type Drives Picture Files bmp yr E c Network Display picture at original size Release 3 0 Page 63 CHAPTER 4 Objects OMRON Page 64 TD Sess 1 Locate the drive and directory where the desired picture is stored using the Directories and Drives controls 2 Select the file type and then the picture from the list presented 3 Use the Display picture at original size setting to specify whether the picture is to be displayed at original size or scaled 4 Click the OK pushbutton to load the page Note If the PC installation of CX Supervisor is on a networked machine a Network pushbutton is added to the dialog For further information on the function of the Network dialog refer to the Microsoft Windows User Guide An image can be selected and resized just like many other graphical objects Transparency Picture objects with gif and bmp file types support optional transparency By clicking the Set Transp
306. mplete Enter Login Name x E A Jd ed EA a Fd PS 2a YS a FD ER Fc ad cd PO es ME cd PS Pe PoE fis fea Pia Ja 2 pa pee nc J E E Enter A user can detach from specialised user privileges by logging out Access is again dependant on the application There is no dialog associated with logout once logout is activated privileges are immediately discontinued Whilst one user is logged in it is possible for a different user to log in as prior to login the current user is automatically logged out by CX Supervisor A user with the designer privilege can further amend the user configuration in the runtime environment using a similar dialog to the development environment s Configured Users dialog As well as typing a password verification of the password is required and both fields are disguised by a symbol This is so that a new user can apply their own password and that only they know the password Verification is required to ensure the password was typed correctly in the first instance Option Access Levels To open the Menu Option Access Levels dialog select Menu Option Access Levels from the Runtime Security menu The dialog is displayed as follows Page 116 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects General Utities Communications General Utilities Communications General Utilities Communications M Loan F Acknowledge A Alamis ai Users M PLE Maintenance aluses v Logout All
307. ms and the procedures associated with the creation amendment and removal of alarms using the Alarm Editing facility The use of alarms during the running of a project is also described What is an Alarm Alarms provide notification of a problem during the execution of an application in runtime Alarms are defined in the development environment and monitored in the runtime environment Alarms range from incidental to catastrophic in nature In runtime the occurrence of an alarm condition and any subsequent change of state is recorded in a log file known as the Alarm History log An operator is alerted to an alarm condition by means of an Alarm Acknowledge dialog which may also be accompanied by a warning sound A list of current alarms is also maintained Individual alarms are defined in the development environment using the Alarm Editor General alarm settings are controlled in the development environment using the Alarm Settings dialog The Alarm Object refer to chapter 4 Objects is a graphical object which can be configured to display alarm messages for certain groups of alarms and thus provides a convenient way of filtering alarm messages Alarm definitions are made and modified using the Alarm Editor To use the Alarm Editor CX Supervisor must currently have a project open If no project is currently open either select Open Project from the Project menu to open a previously saved project or select New Project from the Project m
308. n error of 0 to granularity depending on when the action is started The frequency cannot be guaranteed as the OS may be busy or handling other processes Note 4 Because of Note 2 and Note 3 above Sleep should not be used for creating output or logic pulses e g setting a bit on sleeping then setting the bit off Instead just use the PC to set the bit and allow the PLC to clear the bit either after a duration timed by the PLC real time clock or when the triggered process is complete The requirement for Sleep is quite simple but the implementation is actually very complex In the example above the application must continue to run during the pause i e read PLC data log data check alarms animate graphics etc For this reason any script with a Sleep statement must be executed in parallel with the system This can result in unexpected results when a Sleep is added and previously functioning script commands are now running in parallel Redesign the script considering parallel processing This can also result in unexpected behaviour when a Sleep is added to a Project initialisation or Page initialisation script as some parts of the system or objects may not be loaded at time of execution Sleep can cause problems during shutdown of the runtime if a sleeping script is still running Page 310 Release 3 0 OMRON APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions Q How dol use System points in Visual Basic VBScript Access CX Supervisor poi
309. n the CX Supervisor point that this item should have If not an array enter 1 Having checked that all the parameters are correct bring return to the Point Editor window by closing any attributes window that may be open Release 3 0 OMRON Release 3 0 CHAPTER 18 Connecting to Omron Industrial Components The CX Supervisor Point will now be connected to Device parameter and can be used like all other CX Supervisor points i e to drive animations in alarm expressions in recipes for data logging etc The application can now be run by clicking on the Run Project button in the toolbar Page 277 CHAPTER 19 Best Practices OMRON CHAPTER 19 Best Practices This chapter details the best practices to get the most from CX Supervisor including how to plan and design your application Design This section covers some good design practices There is no doubt as with everything in life that a good design is essential and creating a good CX Supervisor application is no different Poorly designed applications may run slower provide slower user feedback be difficult to maintain increasing costs and in some cases not fulfil all User Requirements resulting in the application being rewritten Never fall into the trap code first think later e Design your page layouts and navigation flow Traditional design works well for most applications Providing an application with a clear structure can make applications very
310. n the State 0 Text field and State 1 Text field To abort the Display Status Text edit click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed Display Value Analogue The state of a Real or Integer point may be displayed using the Display Value Analogue dialog To access the Display Value Analogue dialog to add an action select Display Value from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Display Value Analogue dialog to modify an action select Display Value from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar For a list of the objects to which this action is applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On selection of the Display Value action the Display Value Analogue dialog is displayed Display Value Analogue Expression Ok Second Displayed T ext Number of seconds H Format Standard C Scientific Hexadecimal Cancel ike Browse T Left Justified Leading Zeros An expression based on Real or Integer point must be entered This expression is typed into the Expression field A text string to coincide with the display of a Real or Integer value can be entered in the Displayed Text field
311. nalysis Performance Monitor OMRON Always Updating The percentage of points that are always updating this should be reduced in favour of update on display Always Updating Bytes Sec This is a count of points that are set to Always update at the specified rate It is best to have a small number of different update rates as this helps CX Server to optimise Whilst good to have a low number of different update rates it is also worth remembering that the more updates per second the more bandwidth is used Inputs On Request The total number of inputs that are on request These are potentially less efficient than an on interval a single point being requested is not optimised by CX Server when sending to a PLC many points at the same interval can be sent in the same message with negligible overheads Inputs Outputs at X M Sec This list shows the total number of device points at each update rate these should be kept to a few well chosen update rates many points on very few update rates that are not more frequent than absolutely necessary Invalid Points Invalid CX Server Point Keys References to invalid CX Server point keys These indicate that the cdm file has become corrupted CX Supervisor auto generates the cdm file so if this has become corrupted for some reason you can close all Omron software and delete the file When you re open CX Supervisor developer the file will be re generated Max Bandwith Used This is t
312. name to display its contents in the dialog The dialog shows the objects in the selected Library The content of each library is provided for reference in chapter 7 Manipulating Objects Modify Library w The only element of the Library definition which is editable is the Library name To change the name of a Library open the desired Library file and click on the Modify Library button on the toolbar The Modify Library dialog is displayed an example of which is illustrated as follows Modify Library Library Marne Fumps_1 7 Cancel Type over the current field entry with a new name and click the OK pushbutton or cancel the operation by clicking the Cancel pushbutton Delete Library i A Library may be deleted by selecting it from the drop down list to open it and clicking the Delete Library button on the Graphics Library Editor toolbar CX Supervisor displays a message box to confirm the deletion of the Library Click the Yes pushbutton to remove the Library or the No pushbutton to cancel the operation and return to the Graphics Library After clicking the Yes pushbutton a second message box is displayed to confirm deletion of the library Click the OK pushbutton to delete the Library or the Cancel pushbutton to the leave the Library unchanged Release 3 0 Page 129 CHAPTER 7 Graphics Library OMRON Manipulating Objects Add Object Any object created on a CX Supervisor page can be added to the Library All att
313. ncel pushbutton to abort the operation To remove a user from the Configured Users list Fae ee 1 Select a user from the Configured Users list and click the Delete pushbutton 2 A confirmation dialog is displayed Click the Yes pushbutton to remove the selected user or the No pushbutton to abort the operation When all user amendments are complete click the Close pushbutton In the runtime application to make use of the designated privilege the user must log in Login can be accessed in a variety of ways and so is dependent on the setup of the runtime application Some applications may require login as soon as the application is run others may allow login from a context sensitive floating menu Refer chapter 9 Animation for further information The Login User dialog is as follows Release 3 0 Page 115 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON Menu a Hame Fassword Cancel keyboard To log in enter the login name not the full name in the Login Name field and the associated password in the Password field Any characters typed in the Password field are disguised by a symbol for each character typed Click the OK pushbutton to log in or the Cancel pushbutton to abort For users without a keyboard to enter login details select the Keyboard pushbutton The login name and password can be constructed from the subsequent dialog by clicking on each pushbutton in turn followed by the Enter pushbutton to co
314. nd the values are ignored When the value exceeds the deadband limits the new value will be logged This may dramatically reduce file size and ease analysis Entering a value of 0 i e no dead band will cause every sample to be logged Trigger on change of value This option is only used when the Sample Rate is set to On Change When unchecked every time the expression changes a new record is written If a record consists of many fields that may be read or calculated at different times a new record is written every time any one field changes However the desired action may be to change several fields and then log the new values to a single record To achieve this action the Trigger on change of value should be checked for all fields within a record that may be read or calculated at different times Only when all checked fields have been changed is the record logged If however while waiting for remaining fields to change before writing a field is changed for a second time the record is written with all current field values including unchanged fields before the field value is changed for a second time Note There is a risk when using fields with Trigger on change of value checked that the new value of a field may not actually change its value i e the new value happens to be the same as the old value Because the field has not changed the record is not written until the value is changed again This can produce unexpected result
315. ne point click whilst holding the lt CTRL gt key down Note If a point is deleted then any animations or scripts that were using the point become invalid Run the Analyse Application tool to check for References to non existent points Page 46 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 3 Points Quick creation of many points CX Supervisor supports up to 8 000 points which could take much time to create Within the Point Editor you can use Copy Paste which helpfully increments the point name automatically BoilerTemp1 becomes BoilerTemp2 BoilerTemp3 etc but you still have to edit each point to configure the PLC address and possibly other information Using the Copy and Paste functions Point data can quickly be edited and created for example in grid form using Excel This can prove extremely quick when the design uses contiguous addresses ee fH Start of A Release 3 0 L i Open the Point Editor Select the points to edit or a single point to act as a template and Copy to the Windows Clipboard Start Excel Position the cursor in column A and paste the CX Supervisor Points into Excel The worksheet should resemble the following X Microsoft Excel Booki Heal File Edit Yiew Insert Format Tools Data Window Help JOSH GRY BBS O o SS FHT MOB 0 2 Arial 0 BFU FS BESO 8H S O A a gt Sliderln1 C D E F H J K IL M On Interval PLC Input C200H DMs 1 Single wor Alwa
316. ned assuming it is not already open To open a project select Open from the Project menu CX Supervisor displays the Open dialog This is a standard Windows dialog and usage depends on your operating system Please consult your Microsoft documentation Release 3 0 Page 89 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON Ty Ded cee 1 Locate the drive and directory where the desired project is stored 2 Select the desired project from the list presented 3 Click the Open pushbutton to load the project Once the project is loaded the various editing tasks required may be carried out such as editing page or graphics formats as described in the other chapters of this manual Saving a Project Once a project has been created it is wise to save it It is good practice to ensure that projects are saved regularly in case of an event such as a power failure To save a project select Save from the Project menu If this is the first time the project has been saved the Save As dialog is displayed ly 2 ore 1 Move to the location where the project is to be stored 2 Ensure that the Save as Type field is set to CX Supervisor Projects SCS 3 Enter a name for the project The name under which the project was created is offered as a default 4 Click the Save pushbutton to save the project Note Subsequent saves do not cause the Save Project As dialog to be displayed Printing a Project All of the printable views of the project can be printed
317. nfiguration and limitations Chapter 14 Multilingual Features This chapter describes the Multilingual features including creation of dynamically language switching applications Release 3 0 OMRON CX Supervisor User Manual Chapter 15 Application Analysis Performance Monitor This chapter describes the Application Analysis and Performance Monitor functionality Chapter 16 OPC Client This chapter introduces OPC Server to a new user and explains how to use CX Supervisor as an OPC Client Chapter 17 Connecting to a Remote CX Supervisor application This chapter explains how to create a distributed solution by connecting together CX Supervisor applications on networked PCs Chapter 18 Connecting to Omron Industrial Components This chapter details connecting CX Supervisor to Omron s Industrial Components Chapter 19 Best Practices This chapter details the best practices to get the most from CX Supervisor including how to plan and design your application Appendix A Configuring a PC for remote connection The appendix explains how to configure a PC for remote connection Appendix B Frequently asked questions The appendix list some FAQs and of course their answers Appendix C Troubleshooting The appendix is a guide to troubleshooting and resolving problems Appendix D CX Server error codes The appendix lists the error codes from the communication software CX Server and their meanings A
318. ng Options for Input and Input Output points are Always Update Point Value and Only Update Point Value When On Display Options for an Output point are Write Value Read Value and No Data Transfer Data Transter Actions When Opening a PLC write Value To PLC C Read Value From PLC C No Data Transfer Conversion Attributes The minimum and maximum PLC value and the application of a conversion factor is specified in the Conversion Attributes fields these fields are not applicable for Boolean and text points Conversion Attributes can be used to convert in a linear fashion between a value in a PLC and the point range For example if the possible range in the PLC is 0 to 1000 and the point range is 0 to 100 then a PLC value of 500 would correspond to a point value of 50 The conversion would be performed just before the data is sent to the PLC or immediately upon receipt of it from the PLC On completion of the PLC configuration connection click the OK pushbutton to continue or the Cancel pushbutton to abort Click the Add PLC pushbutton to create a new PLC connection Information relating to the selection of this pushbutton is described in chapter 6 Projects Device Configuration Advanced Point Settings Advanced settings can be applied to a new point by clicking the Advanced pushbutton in the Add Point dialog This results in the Advanced Point Settings dialog being displayed Page 44 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 3 Points
319. nits 10 Major Display Units 20 CX Supemisor Gauae Bar lndicatar Colour W Auto Size Forts Aii Display Minor Units W Display Major Units Style Specific Attributes W Display Minor Ticks If Display Major Ticks W 3 D Frame Maximum Display Angle Minimum Display Angle E z i 20 Display Units on Outside The Wizard allows entry in the Gauge Style Configuration Attributes Style Attributes and Style Specific Attributes fields To select a style click on an entry in the Gauge Style field To select an Expression Attribute click on the Browse pushbutton and select a point from the displayed list The Select Required Item dialog is displayed click the OK pushbutton to accept the point or click the Cancel pushbutton to leave the point unselected Clicking the Add Point button from the toolbar allows a new point to be created prior to association with the Wizard An existing point can also be associated with the Wizard by dragging a point directly from the Point Editor Refer to chapter 3 Points regarding adding a new point and dragging from the Point Editor To enter gauge values or display units type over the existing field entries Enter display angles by typing over the existing field entries Check the boxes to choose the required style attributes The Gauge can be displayed in linear or rotary format either with or without ticks The text font used for the gauge title can be changed via t
320. not be underlined Text Left Aligned Release 3 0 The Text Left Aligned button aligns any selected text object s to the left edge of the bounding box Text Left Justified only applies to text block text and to text on buttons Page 23 CHAPTER 1 Graphics Editor OMRON other controls and graphics cannot be left justified Text Centred The Text Centred button aligns any selected text object s to the centre of the bounding box Text Centre Justified only applies to text block text and to text on buttons other controls and graphics cannot be centre justified Text Right Aligned The Text Right Aligned button aligns any selected text object s to the right edge of the bounding box Text Right Justified only applies to text block text and to text on buttons other controls and graphics cannot be right justified Grid The use of the grid may be helpful in drawing and aligning the objects on the screen Select the Grid button from the toolbar to enable the grid The grid settings are available by selecting Grid from the View menu All the available grid sizes are shown along with a Snap to Grid option which forces graphical objects selected by the user to align according to the current grid setting Note The toolbar buttons can be customised to remove or add favourite functions Tip of the Day On startup a Tip of the Day dialog is displayed All tips can be reviewed using the Next and Previous buttons This di
321. ns Provisions are given to both 12 hour and 24 hour time formats 12Hour Hours in 12 hour format SAMPM Ta f o AM PM indicator for 12 hour clock form Millisecond 0 999 Number of milliseconds Page 50 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 3 Points Date Points The following table describes system points for use with date based operations Provisions are given for numerical and alphanumerical formats C simpan Pompe Pomeranio ow f e O ea wonnan ree S Nenthrame ea toinen ssorwonmene Tox Aon mont rane ea Fay ssorwveabaynane Tox Aoi woody rame eg wen srove mer oo f amrevareayeareg o meos mer 06 pay ormeweorto sunezsa sweabayvare Tox wear rame tea Weores Internal Points The following table describes system points for use with interrogating current system settings such as memory and disk space restrictions and other system resources AvailableMemory 0 2 147 483 647 Amount of available memory in bytes DemoMode Boolean Indicates status of communications O active 1 disabled DiskSpace 0 2 147 483 647 Amount of free disk space available in bytes PCName Tet Computer name of PC as seen in Explorer Computer name Computer name of PC as seen in Explorer PC as seen in Explorer Ca Text Name of project file without SCS extension ProjectPath Text Path to project on disk without project Path to project on disk without project
322. nts from Visual Basic style scripting called VBScript couldn t be simpler just use the point name normally e g MsgBox MyPoint However note that is a reserved character so System Points can be accessed with s prefix instead e g MsgBox s Second for Second system point For up to date information and all help on scripting and the Windows Scripting Host see http www microsoft com scripting Q What are the syntax differences between VBScript and CX Supervisor script VBScript has some minor syntax differences to CX Supervisor script The most important are e Boolean equality test is only in VBScript e Boolean inequality test is lt gt in VBScript e Endif becomes End If in VBScript e Array indexing using uses square brackets in VBScript Note that CX Supervisor interprets and characters as string delimiters even in VBScript so the following code does not work MsgBox Press Enter does not work Instead use the following to replace these characters MsgBox Press chr 123 Enter chr 125 Q Why are ActiveX events shown differently in the Animation Editor and Property Browser New in CX Supervisor version 1 2 the ActiveX Property Browser has an Events Tab which allows the object s events to be linked to scripts These scripts are defined as VBScript subroutines defined in the Page Initialisation script It is more efficient to load these subroutines once during page initialisation th
323. nts is a better guide to how much memory on the PLC you are addressing This number should not Page 256 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 15 Application Analysis Performance Monitor be a surprise if this number looks large you need to consider if you are using and updating too many points at once and affecting performance TX Bytes CX Server RX Bytes CX Server The bytes transmitted or received to the PLC from CX Server TX Bytes CX Supervisor The number of bytes transmitted from CX Supervisor to CX Server TX Bytes Sec CX Supervisor The current number of bytes per second being transmitted from CX Supervisor to CX Server this should be kept well below the bandwidth capacity of the network being used Also take into account other bandwidth use such as received data and other unrelated network traffic Release 3 0 Page 257 CHAPTER 16 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client OMRON CHAPTER 16 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client This chapter introduces OPC Server to a new user and explains how to use CX Supervisor as an OPC Client An Overview of OPC What is OPC OPC stands for OLE for Process Control and is a standard published by the OPC Foundation The basic aim of the OPC standard is to allow hardware vendors to produce software drivers called OPC Servers and for software vendors to produce applications called OPC Clients which use a standard method for data interchange This allows software and hardwar
324. number of array elements in the CX Supervisor point that this item should have If not an array enter 1 1 OPC COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL PROPERTIES a Server Tab The options in this window allow you to select the correct name of the computer with the OPC Server and select the appropriate server OMRON CX OPC Communications Control Properties JEE Groups Items OPC Communications Control Settings Hame OPCCommsServers Computer Name METE Show l Serer Hame OMRON OpenDataServer F JE Program Files OMARONSCX Supervisorvopctestalantest ope New Oper Cancel Apply Help OPC Communication Control Settings Name This is the name of the selected communications control The default name for the first control iS OMRONCXOPCCommunicationsControl For each additional control added the number increments by one Computer Name This shows the system name for the computer with the OPC server Ifthe server is on the same computer as CX Supervisor set to Local If the OPC server is on a remote computer click the Show All button and select the correct name from the list If you cannot identify the PC in the list contact your system administrator Server Name This shows the names of the OPC Version 2 compliant servers installed on the specified computer Make your selection from the drop down list Clicking the Info button opens the Server Status Information dialog for the selec
325. nviados al PLC El punto de CX Supervisor Sliderin esta conectado al IROOS pero IROO IR00700 IROO701 IROO702 y IROO703 Los puntos de entrada son IROO701 IROO702 y IR00703 en el PLC Un cambio en el estado de IROOS en el PLC El indicador circular la barra y el circulo estan conectados a es un punto de entrada con un ciclo de actualizaci n de 1 segundo NOTA El PLC debe estar en modo Program o Monitor para que la demo funcione OFF Off ON ON Release 3 0 BitO conr Ent point Slide Slide des Bit O1 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Surv toute Les l API Point est IROQ IROQ Les IROD Unc IROO cerc lestu surv NOTI ou M fonge OFF OMRON CHAPTER 14 Multilingual Features Note The Translation Tool can also be launched manually from the Start button and the Default UDT for the required project loaded Note The Translation Tool can be distributed to translators licence free and an installation package can be found on the original CD in the folder Translation Tool The User Defined Text for the application is shown in the first column sorted alphabetically A column is shown for each existing translated UDT file To add new translations click the Add New Language toolbar button and select the required language Now simply select each cell and type the required translation Non translatable t
326. o CX Supervisor objects This allows you to break apart the image and animate it s sub parts See Metafile Conversion to CX Supervisor Objects for further details Sharing Graphic Libraries Graphic Libraries including the default Graphic Libraries can be shared by other users at other PCs running CX Supervisor Each library has its own MAT file e g PANELS MAT for the panels library The MAT files reside in the same directory as the CX Supervisor application Using file utilities on the PC it is possible to copy one or more MAT files onto a diskette or a network and transfer them to a CX Supervisor directory on another PC Consult the Microsoft Windows User Guide for details on copying files Printing the Graphics Library Print Setup The Graphics Library can be printed in the same way pages can Before printing ensure that the printer has been set up correctly To check the printer settings refer to chapter 2 Pages Print Preview To preview the page before printing select Print Preview from the File menu Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print Preview dialog Page 132 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 7 Graphics Library Printing To print the contents of the Graphics Library select the Print button from the toolbar Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print dialog Release 3 0 Page 133 CHAPTER 8 Alarms OMRON CHAPTER 8 Alarms This chapter describes CX Supervisor alar
327. o embed an object into a page Once embedded or linked the object can be moved and positioned in a similar way to any other object created within CX Supervisor To use the Object Packager select Package from the list of objects displayed in the Insert Object dialog shown later in this chapter An example of a typical Object Packager window 1s as follows fa Object Packager Package in Untitled pag File Edit Help Insert Icon Content Yiew f Description Picture Copy of Bookl xls For the remainder of this chapter only the direct insertion of objects using the CX Supervisor built in functions are detailed For further details of using the Object Packager refer to the Windows User Guide or the Object Packager On line Help Whether using the Windows Object Packager or embedding or linking objects directly proceed as follows Release 3 0 Page 343 APPENDIX F Obsolete Features OMRON a are 1 Click on the page in which the object is to be inserted Le 2 Click the Insert OLE Object button The Insert Object dialog is displayed Insert Object El ES obec Lp Achonb yr Class Cancel AchorByr Class Adobe Acrobat Document ALink AudioE xplosion as Control Ai i l Display As Icon ColorByr Class Create New Create from File Create Control Result Inserts a new Adobe Acrobat Document object m 5 Into Your document Creating an Object From New To create an obj
328. oblems with applications due to the necessity to have the containing script in a separate thread It is highly recommended that this command is not used and an alternative method is used such as On Condition scripts which can be triggered when something completes There is almost always a better more efficient alternative to a Sleep see the User Manual FAQ How Does Sleep work Update on Display The percentage of points that only update when you can see them Update on Display Bytes Sec If a point value is not required unless you can see it this is a more efficient way of getting its value frequently The same recommendations apply as with Always Updating but these points will only update when you can see them the page is displayed Updating When Displayed The total number of points on a device that are only updated when on display this could be 100 if there is only one page Performance Monitor The Performance Monitor dialog shown below can be accessed from the Performance menu on the Runtime popup menu Page 254 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 15 Application Analysis Performance Monitor CX Supervisor Performance Monitor q x Statistics Performance Component Overviews Clear All Summan 1 PC Statistics 10ms ors Fat CS1H_H_Ethermet Not Open Data Analysed This following information explains what data is monitored in the Performance Monitor dialog
329. ocess or event always use the PLC The stored result can then be read by the SCADA at its leisure If creating a pulse of fixed duration never attempt to design the SCADA to set a bit wait and clear the bit Instead allow the SCADA to set the bit but use the PLC program to clear the bit after the required time e Operation should continue if the SCADA is unplugged In a well designed system normal operation can continue even if the SCADA is unplugged Some functions like data logging batch control and control obviously will not be available but the system should be able to continue with its task until completion That is the process should not rely on co operation between the SCADA and PLC because of the possibility of failure e g of the power supply PC components or operating system e Ensure the PLC has hardware failsafes In situations where the system can cause damage e g to itself the materials or people it is essential to ensure the PLC has suitable safeguards and failsafes to prevent such damage Given the possibility of SCADA failure it is not acceptable to implement such failsafes in software Care should also be paid to the design of software control to allow and cope with the possible refusal of operation from the PLE Performance This section covers some good practices to ensure excellent performance e Organise the PLC memory properly This is probably the single most important practice to provide maximum performance an
330. og To access the Colour Change Analogue dialog to add an action select Colour Change Analogue from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Colour Change Analogue dialog to modify an action select Colour Change Analogue from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar Refer to chapter 9 Objects for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable On selection of the Colour Change Analogue action the Colour Change Analogue dialog is displayed Colour Change Analogue Ea Analogue Expression oK l Cancel Colours lt Thresholds Browse Clear W Apply changes to object frame text colour I Apply changes to abject background fill colour Enter an expression in the Analogue Expression field which results in a real or integer value Only when the result of the expression reaches a value identified as a threshold does the object change colour Page 166 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation The object can have one of five colours depending on the value of the expression It changes between these colours at the thresholds For example choose the colour blue for the first colour and the value 20 for the first threshold The object then changes to blue until the value reaches 20 at which point it changes to the second colour To apply the change to the frame of the object select the Apply colour changes to object frame
331. og to add an action select Display Status Text from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Display Value Digital dialog to modify an action select Display Status Text from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar For a list of the objects to which this action 1s applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On selection of the Display Value Digital action the Display Value Digital dialog is displayed Digital Expressior OK motor Displayed T ext motor iz set to H State O Text FALSE State 1 Text TRUE Cancel iit Browse An expression based on Boolean point must be entered This expression is typed into the Digital Expression field A text string to coincide with the display of a Boolean value can be entered in the Displayed Text field The position of the displayed value within the text field is specified by entering a character into the Displayed Text field Page 170 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation Note To include a character as part of the text insert it as an escape character For example to display Box 1 type Box Only hashes to be displayed to the left of the required for value display need escape characters as the first hash without a meta character is taken to be the point at which the value should be displayed Text for Boolean State 0 and Boolean State 1 are entered i
332. oint or click the Cancel pushbutton to leave the point unselected Clicking the Add Point button from the toolbar allows a new point to be created prior to association with the Wizard An existing point can also be associated with the Wizard by dragging a point directly from the Point Editor Refer to chapter 3 Points regarding adding a new point and dragging from the Point Editor Enter the maximum and minimum slider values and check the box to display the minimum value at the left or bottom of the page Exit the Wizard by clicking on the OK pushbutton to accept the new slider attributes or click on the Cancel pushbutton to leave the slider unchanged Toggle Button Toggle buttons are used to control and display the current value of a digital point Click the Toggle Button button then click or click and drag on the page to insert a button To edit the Toggle Button double click on it The Toggle Button Wizard dialog is displayed as follows Release 3 0 Page 71 CHAPTER 4 Objects OMRON Toggle Button Wizard Button Style OK Cancel Blank Button Toggle Switch Colour Button Inf Qut Button Rotary Switch On Off Switch Font Configuration Attributes Boolean Point State State 0 Attributes Text Ott Style Attributes ff Ur Toggle While Pressed Button Palau State 1 Attributes Tex i J Button The Toggle Button Wizard allows a Toggle Button to be assign
333. omatic login in Windows The initial Windows security screen can be bypassed which may be useful on systems with no keyboards or systems that should start automatically on boot up Information on how to achieve this is published by Microsoft on its Web site see Q253370 How to Enable Automatic Logon in Windows 2000 and Q315231 How to Enable Automatic Logon in Windows XP Please note the cautions included on registry editing and security Q What is the functionality of On Condition scripts ON CONDITION scripts will be executed whenever any of the points mentioned in the expression change value or are re evaluated as a result of being input AND the result of the expression is TRUE For example if the expression was Second then the script would be executed 59 times a minute The expression would be evaluated every second when the value changes but when Second was 0 the result of the expression would be FALSE Page 306 Release 3 0 OMRON APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions Q What is the scan time of On Condition scripts There is no scan rate directly associated with the script processing itself In fact the execution is instant as soon as the value has changed The script expression will be checked whenever any of the points are updated a value is input or the value is changed in some way CX Supervisor is an event driven object oriented system meaning is that it is actually the points changing that force the scr
334. omatically at runtime or as specified by the developer As an aid to viewing a number of particular events in isolation Data Sets can be subdivided into data Groups Specific areas of related data can then be stored in these groups which can then be viewed either singly or with other groups within a Data Set The main elements of the CX Supervisor Data Logger are Data Logger Editor used to configure items to be logged Data Logging at Runtime the actual logging of the data Data Log Viewer used to view the logged data Remote Data Viewer enables viewing separately from the runtime system Data Log Export facility enables export to other programs e g MS Excel gt gt OH OH MO Script Functions gives full control over the logging process Data Log Editor Configuring Data Sets and Logging Settings The Data Sets data Groups and Items to log are configured from the Logging Tab on the a bottom of the Development Workspace editor Items are edited using a right mouse button context sensitive menu The option available from the menu are Edit enable the parameters of the selected Data Set Group or Item to be edited Cut Copy and Paste enables the selected Item to be cut or copied and then pasted into a Data Set or Group Delete will delete the selected entry Release 3 0 Page 193 CHAPTER 11 Data Logging OMRON Add DataSet Add Group and Add Item enables new Data Sets Groups and Items to be added to t
335. on 2 0 of the Data Log Viewer Modern User Interface The user interface has a modern look and feel Better Zoom and Pan Control Features include double click to zoom in on a specific point on the graph ability to zoom a specific area of the graph and the ability to grab and move the graph around i e left right up or down Data Table View A data table view allows instantaneous values to be displayed based on a cursor position on the graph Improved Cursors Horizontal and Vertical cursors can be used to analyse the data Where a cursor intersects the data the value will be displayed in the Data Table view Y Offset Ability to quickly and easily scale data to make it easier to read X Offset Ability to overlay data i e overlay one week on another week Snapshot as JPEG A screen shot of the Data log Viewer display including all visible trend data can be saved as an image file JPG Support for Comma Separated Files Ability to open and view data from comma separated files CSV Support for Database Files Ability to open and view data from database files MDB Multiple File Support Ability to view large amounts of data spanned across multiple files e g 1 year on the same graph For more details refer to the Data Log Viewer online help Release 3 0 Page 203 CHAPTER 11 Data Logging OMRON Data Log Viewer 1 8 Data Log Viewer 1 8 looks like this w3 Data Log Viewer Balloon 19990
336. on with a DCOM object occurs through its interfaces an interface is said to provide a contract a full and unchanging description for the functionality provided by that object Each interface has a unique ID and describes a group of related methods The description of the interface defines the syntax and the semantics of the services provided by that interface the internal implementation of those services doesn t matter to the calling applications In the case of OPC these interfaces for each of the DCOM objects are defined within the relevant specifications This guide only deals with the OPC Data Access specification Custom used by C and Automation used by script languages and VB interfaces What are the benefits of OPC Asking what the business benefits of OPC are is like asking what the benefits of plug and play technology are to the computer industry More choices better access to process data ease of plug and play operation and efficient utilization of development resources are the main benefits of OPC technology OPC brings the value that comes with the use of standards including reduced training costs reduced custom development costs and lower long term maintenance costs By design OPC compliant products work seamlessly with one another With this plug and play approach off the shelf components can be brought together efficiently to solve immediate requirements In addition long term maintenance and upgrading c
337. onment SCADA applications are run using the run time environment of CX Supervisor following creation of the application in the CX Supervisor development environment Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition A Server is the central processing point of a Network that is accessible to all computers Networks affect CX Supervisor in that further associated options are available if the computer Network is connected An application that can be used to view or interact with whilst currently within CX Supervisor Within the CX Supervisor script language a statement is a command understood by the run time environment Statements are constructed of commands and arguments which when combined help to formulate a finished application to be used in the run time environment The contents of a Text type point that can only contain literal alphanumeric characters A string starts following an opening quotation mark and ends before a closing question mark in the example name spot the point name holds the string spot Page 355 GLOSSARY OF TERMS CX Supervisor User Manual SVGA mode CX Supervisor Target Value Taskbar Text Object Text Type Unicode Validation Code VBScript VGA mode Windows Desktop Windows Scripting Host Wizard Page 356 OMRON A mode of video display that provides 800 x 600 pixel resolution or higher with 16 or more colours and is supported on Super Video Graphics Adapter sy
338. ontrols used by the application This includes any use of Microsoft Forms FORMS20 DLL which is not included on the DyaloX IPC by default 4 If you are running a Machine Edition project you will not need a USB Dongle However if you are running a PLUS project install the USB Dongle copy protection Release 3 0 Page 331 APPENDIX E Using with the Omron DyaloX OMRON 5 Copy the desired runtime application Note Remember that drive C is for the operating system and space may become limited Consider installing other software to other drives like additional flash cards or USB keys However note that typically all software automatically installs some files to Windows system folders or Common folders on the C drive even if the program is installed to another drive Communication Settings The USB port can be used to communicate with compatible Omron hardware The CX Server USB drivers for the USB PLC must be installed manually if required and can be found in the CX Server installation directory Note At runtime the DyaloX IPC can only use the COM ports that are configured in the operating system The Development platform therefore must have the same COM ports available so they can be selected at development time and the same port available for use at runtime If required it is possible to reconfigure the COM port for a configured device once the application is compiled if the Embed CX Server Project within CX Supervisor S
339. op A scripting engine supplied by Microsoft to run VBScript or JScript See http msdn microsoft com scripting Wizards are dialogs used by the CX Supervisor development environment to take the user through complex operations in a simplified step by step process Release 3 0 OMRON INDEX A About CX Supervisor 356 About the Point Editor 35 About the Project Editor Project Editor 124 Access Alarm Editor 123 134 136 144 145 Animation Editor 147 Graphics Editor 13 Graphics Library 128 Point Editor 35 Project Editor 123 124 Project Workspace 123 Recipe Editor 123 180 Accessing PLC Connection in Runtime Device Configuration 94 Activating Graphics Library Graphics Library 128 ActiveX Objects Editing 84 Events 86 Inserting 83 Methods 86 Overview 83 Properties 86 Adding Pages to a Project Project Editor 125 Adding unsupported runtime languages 248 Advanced Point Settings Creating Points 44 Alarm Editor 134 36 About 134 36 Access 123 134 136 144 145 Delete alarm 142 Modify alarm 45 46 45 46 Viewing contents 136 Alarm Objects Control Objects 59 Alarm Points Point Import 52 Alarms Alarm Editor See Alarm Editor Current status 144 Customise settings 107 Deadband 139 Editor Alarms See Alarm Editor Groups 136 138 History 144 Information 137 Release 3 0 INDEX CX Supervisor User Manual Print alarms See
340. ossible especially for PLC points e If memory points are defined for scripting try to reuse general purpose points like nLoopCounter bReturnValue nTemp e Use expressions in animations instead of calculating new values e g using TemperatureK 273 rather than creating a new TemperatureCelsius memory point e For memory areas that are bit and word addressable access as words If you want the bits use expressions with amp and operators e g Display Digital animation expression MyW100 amp 0x80 and MyW100 amp 0x40 instead of MyW100bit8 etc e Reduce the number of active points Aim to reduce the number of active points that are currently communicating where possible e Automatically by setting Update when on Display option e Manually using script EnablePoint DisablePoint OpenPLC ClosePLC etc e Have a minimum of Input Output points Double check the use of all Input Output points Don t forget that Output points can actually have Data Transfer set to input the value only once on start up Page 282 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 19 Best Practices e Use Standard update rates CX Supervisor only allows update rates in standard groups which allows a greater chance for CX Server to optimise reads together Old projects may still be using non standard update rate and are best changed to the standard rates e Use few update rates Even when
341. oting OMRON e Elements Same as above except multiplied by number of array elements per point Ratio between Total Active Points and Total Active Points Elements shows how well optimised or badly like above with use of arrays Read Callbacks Number of data postings from CX Server MSecs since last callback Milliseconds waited since last data Min Max Average Callback interval Calculation using above values Write Same as above but for the writing part of output and I O points Data Changes Number of inputs causing change of value Scripting errors The scripting engines are very complex which provides many opportunities for errors This can be categorised as follows VBScript Syntax errors These are seen during runtime as errors in the Error Log often giving the line and character of the error Referring back to the original script should easily display the problem Note that if the VB lt Script syntax is used within CX Supervisor script the line number reported refers just to the lines of VBScript with the VBScript being line 1 To troubleshoot further Page 324 For specific help on VBScript language syntax see Microsoft s web site at http msdn microsoft com scripting Double check capitalisation and objects names See Appendix B FAQ What are the syntax differences between VBScript and CX Supervisor script To confirm the line causing the problem temporarily comment it out and see if the
342. out CX Supervisor applications An associated string replaces the alias when used in a script or expression Select the Aliases pushbutton from the Script Editor dialog The Alias Definitions dialog is displayed Refer to chapter 6 Projects for more details on alias definitions Execution Attributes The animation reacts to an event A script can be associated with an event depending on whether it is a project script page script or object script For a project or page script the following events trigger the execution of the script On a condition based on a regular expression At a regular interval defined by an interval time At the initialisation of the page or project gt gt 6M At the termination of the page or project For an object script the following events trigger the script Release 3 0 Page 155 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON Following the user clicking once on the left mouse button Onacondition based on a regular expression To specify a trigger for the script select an option from the Trigger Event field Note Note Script Code If On condition is specified a valid relational expression is required in the Expression field The script is executed every time a variable included in the expression changes value and the result of the expression is TRUE For example the expression Second executes every second except when Second is zero whereas Second gt 0 executes every
343. p lt Default gt Pricirity Medium k T Acknowledge Box Play Sound I Auto Acknowledge Print Messages Description fe Alarm Attributes Expression Browse OvenTemp 100 Alarm Type Simple C Deadband C Rate of Change Alarm Messages Browse Raised wWaming Oven temperature i too low Normal Release 3 0 Page 141 CHAPTER 8 Alarms OMRON The selected alarm can be redefined as described in chapter 8 Creating a New Alarm Once all the information has been provided for the updated alarm clicking the OK pushbutton commits the alarm to the alarms database whilst the Cancel pushbutton aborts this modify operation Copying an Existing Alarm Definition Open the Alarm Editor dialog as described in chapter 8 Viewing the Contents of the Alarm Database To copy an existing alarm highlight the alarm from the alarm list and then type lt Ctrl gt C This creates a copy of the alarm definition on the Windows clipboard To paste the alarm definition back in to the current project type lt Ctrl gt V The Alarm Editor ensures the name of the alarm is unique by appending a number to the name For example if the original alarm name was Alarm the name of the pasted alarm is Alarm1 All other properties of the pasted alarm remain the same as the original alarm definition It is possible to copy many alarms at once by highlighting all the desired alarms in
344. pecification affect communications performance See gt What is the maximum number of communication updates 120 00 100 00 40 00 8 80 00 Subscription Ethernet Subscription Sysmac Way 1 amp 60 00 Subscription Sysmac Way 2 E gt Read gt Write 20 00 0 00 CX Server 1 6 3 CX Server 1 7 CX Server 2 2 Q How does my PC specification affect communications performance The graphs below show that processor speed has a significant impact on performance especially for large systems with high quantities of On Interval Subscription points The graphs show e Upgrading from a 450Mhz system to a 2 4Ghz can quadruple the maximum number of Subscriptions that can be processed See gt What is the maximum number of communication updates e Read Write times and performance under load improve with processor speed e CX Server DI 2 2 performs in very similar manner to previous versions and better on a mid spec machine Page 298 Release 3 0 OMRON Release 3 0 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions Performance difference between PC specifications 350 300 250 ill Read 1 7 200 Write 1 7 150 Subscription 1 7 Read 2 2 100 Write 2 2 eat Subscription 2 2 50 0 of 450Mhz performance 450 Mhz 1 1 Ghz 2 4Ghz 100 90
345. phics control or logging To create your application Create Device points for every data value required by the Server application and any required by any client See Chapter 3 Points for more details Configure DCOM on the server machine to allow access from the client machines See Appendix A for further details Add any other elements required by the Server application e g Graphics Control Logging Alarms etc Be sure to note the computer name of the server machine Note A quick way to display the computer name is to right click the Network Neighbourhood icon on the Windows Desktop and select Properties Release 3 0 Page 271 CHAPTER 17 Connecting to a remote CX Supervisor application OMRON Creating a CX Supervisor Client application The client must retrieve the data and process it To create your application Add any elements required by the Client application e g Graphics Control Logging Alarms etc Configure DCOM on the client machine to allow access from the server machines See Appendix A for further details Create points for every data value required by the Client application following these steps 1 2 Ses 1 Start CX Supervisor Development and open your application or start a new application gE 2 Open the Point Editor by selecting the Point Editor option from the Utilities menu or by clicking the toolbar button 3 In the Point Editor dialog click the Add Point but
346. pic gt lt item gt lt index gt Example SCS Point ddearray 3 access ddearray 3 using Point topic or SCS ddetest srt ddearray 0 access ddearray 0 using Project topic Note Microsoft Excel accepts the square brackets used in CX Supervisor to reference an array index in a formula use instead Note The index must always be specified if an individual array element is required Note CX Supervisor supports Hot DDE links if Microsoft Excel has the link option automatic set then the value in Microsoft Excel are updated whenever ddearray index changes The above example is the simplest way to access read single elements of an array from Microsoft Excel to read write whole arrays it is necessary to use macros Microsoft Excel Visual Basic scripts The example scripts that follow have all been created using Microsoft Excel and are working examples They contain the minimum amount of information required to demonstrate the particular facility being described i e they do not contain any error checking code Page 340 Release 3 0 OMRON APPENDIX F Obsolete Features Sending Arrays to CX Supervisor via DDEPoke In order to write to an CX Supervisor array point using the DDEPoke function it must first be given DDE Read Write access via the Advanced Point Settings dialog when adding or modifying the point The following script shows how to send arrays of values from Microsoft Excel to
347. plied in the related Default Text fields The default text is associated with Toggle buttons and object animations such as Display Value and Edit Point Value when they are configured to use the point For an Integer point the following attributes are displayed Point Attributes Mininurn value 99999999 Md axinum Yale 99999999 Default Value lo The minimum threshold for the point is inserted into the Minimum Value field The maximum threshold for the point is inserted into the Maximum Value field The default value is inserted in the Default Value field Note Integer points are limited to 2 147 483 648 to 2147483647 For a Real point the following attributes are displayed Point Attributes Minimum alue 99999999 Md axinum Yale 99999999 Default Value E The minimum threshold for the point is inserted into the Minimum Value field The maximum threshold for the point is inserted into the Maximum Value field Page 40 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 3 Points The default value is inserted in the Default Value field Note Real points are limited to 1 7E 308 to a precision of 15 digits For a Text point the following attribute is displayed Point Type Paint Attributes C Boolean C Integer Real f Text Text Text is entered in the Text field Note Memory Text points can have 32768 characters but PLC I O Text Points are limited to 1024 characters I O Type The
348. ported Databases Target Type Conversion Notes No Issues Found Any conversion problems are reported in the Notes at the bottom and conversion is prevented if it is not allowed Non Volatile Rate The Non Volatile rate specifies how often the value of points flagged as non volatile are saved to disk in seconds The latest disk values are used to re initialise the point values when CX Supervisor is restarted To adjust this value select Runtime Settings from the Projects menu and select Non Volatile Rate from the sub menu CX Supervisor displays the following dialog NHon Yolatle Rate p Save to Disk Every E E Seconds Enter a new value for the Non Volatile Rate in the Seconds field and click the OK pushbutton Page 106 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects Screen Size To open the Screen Size dialog select Screen Size from the Runtime Settings menu The dialog is displayed as follows Screen Size Fa Screen Width 2 Cancel Screen Attributes Screen Height f Dad Rescale run time to screen size Type valid values into the Screen Width and Screen Height fields These values are used to define the screen size of the runtime application but do not affect Maximise and Minimise dialog states By enabling the Rescale run time to screen size option the screen rescales itself to take into account the resolution of the runtime system Click the OK pushbutton to accept the setting or the Cance
349. ppendix E Using with the Omron DyaloX The appendix lists information when using with the Omron s DyaloX Industrial PC Appendix F Obsolete Features The appendix details obsolete features for backwards compatibility only A Glossary of Terms and Index are also provided Release 3 0 Page 5 CX Supervisor User Manual OMRON TABLE OF CONTENTS About the Graphics Editor cvs sisiiextsoe sd dakede soshdcanccaceus eeeacskoidelod Mad eeneetd denies 13 ACW Gai ttc lmalet tanta a Mn cucelabataadiah austen dunia 13 Graphic ODiCCU Banon ees eco sas tees idiomas a a te luce tees 16 Contool Ba ties Rt cetera et a erate ee lee ee ee ae 16 SUS BA Annee aR et ae oe eee eee or ok eee ee eer eee ee er eee eee 20 FOXBAT sstucsneensescscecnsentoavsencMecvoenverernneeannanndpateardtechaetstenioad apis Mecuneueeanee created 21 i PEE atta tt ees vente nt aes tors tute i ne dilation erly ares EE T 24 WTO O WMC AY esses dats et E E ose daesan dates a N ootenetes 24 Creating a Page eae me an ee en Set oe ee en a 25 AMEnNdING a curs 0 te een near pene reer eae ee ee a OC eerie 26 Defining the Properties Of a Page cccccccccsseccseeceeeeeceeeseeeceueesaueeseeesseeesaueess 26 PINDO A F ageuke Mauda akes e E 28 Saving a Fageto a FrojeCtsaier i ace edeeacaed unas 32 CX Su pervisor Preferent eS sinomina a a a aA 32 Chapter 32 Poin aasanasnnnnnnsn a n a Whati ce POIN eenia aaa a a neta a a a aR 35 ADOULME FPONCEONO sorsana iad acinavan
350. previously created object select the object on the page and click on the appropriate line in the Line Style Palette Note Line styles may only be applied to some graphic objects They cannot be applied to text embedded objects controls or bitmap graphics Fill Pattern Palette To create an object with a particular fill pattern before selecting the object s tool from the Tool Palette first select the fill pattern by clicking on Fill Pattern button to drop down the Fill Pattern picker Note It is not strictly necessary to select a fill pattern for an object before creating it however if no fill pattern selection is made the object retains the default of no pattern Release 3 0 Page 15 CHAPTER 1 Graphics Editor OMRON To apply a fill pattern to a previously created object select the object on the page and click in the appropriate square in the Fill Pattern Palette Note Fill patterns may only be applied to solid graphic objects They cannot be applied to unfilled graphic objects text objects embedded objects controls or bitmap graphics Graphic Object bar The Graphic Object bar contains the tools to create the graphic objects which can be placed on pages within CX Supervisor RAHA NM S ROCCOKVO2R SOY A a l e SA Selection Graphics Objects In general terms the operation of the Graphic Object bar is simple With a page active the Graphic Object bar is active and operation involves merely clicking on the desir
351. project when saving it can be added later by using the Add Page button on the toolbar Removing Pages From a Project To remove pages from a project select the page by clicking its description on the Project Editor and click the Remove Page From Project button on the toolbar A message is displayed asking Do you want to remove name and path of page from the project Click the Yes pushbutton to delete the page or click the No or Cancel pushbutton to keep it and return to the Project Editor Linking Pages in a Project A number of pages may be linked together within a project Linking allows a main page containing active elements e g pushbuttons to be loaded and depending upon the actions performed i e which buttons are clicked allow other pages to be loaded on demand For further details of showing pages on demand refer to chapter 9 Animation Selecting Pages for Display on Run When a project is run the first pages to be displayed can be selected To display a page when a project is run open the Project Editor select the page by clicking on its description and click the Display Page Upon Run button on the toolbar To stop a page being displayed on run click the Don t Display Page Upon Run button on the Project Editor toolbar Changing the View Mode amp Select the Large Icons button to view details with large icons ag Select the Small Icons button to view details with normal icons Release 3 0 Page 125
352. pter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed Resize Height Objects can be animated by shrinking or expanding vertically This can be specified via the Resize Height dialog To access the Resize Height dialog to add an action select Resize Height from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Resize Height dialog to modify an action select Resize Height from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar Refer to chapter 9 Objects for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable On selection of the Resize Height action the Resize Height dialog is displayed Ea Resize Height Expressiory oK l Cancel Active Expression Range Required Height Browse Minimum alue jo Minimum Height jo Masimum Yalue 100 Masimum Height E Justification f Bottom C Centre Top To define the animation an expression consisting of a number of operators and operands which may be based on the status of a point must be entered in the Expression field The boundaries in which the object moves are inserted into the Active Expression Range Required Height fields The Maximum Height specifies the required height in pixels of the object when the result of the expression reaches the Maximum Value The Minimum Height specifies t
353. ptimisations for writing array elements that can yield substantial results particularly with serial communications These performance improvements have been excluded from these results rather than distort the true figures 120 100 eee 80 e Read 60 s Write Subscription 40 of 1 0 Performance 20 CX S 1 0 CX S 1 1 CX S 1 2 12 CX S 1 22 7 Version Page 296 Release 3 0 OMRON APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions Write time under increasing load l CX Supervisor 1 0 CX Supervisor 1 1 CX Supervisor 1 2 12 gt lt CX Supervisor 1 22 7 Write Time ms 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 No of Active Points Note lower write time indicates greater performance See gt How does upgrading CX Server affect communications performance Release 3 0 Page 297 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions OMRON Q How does upgrading CX Server affect communications performance The graphs below should show that this does not have a significant impact The graphs show e Time to perform instantaneous read and writes are slightly slower on average although this is in the order of a few milliseconds so is not ordinarily visible e Maximum number of Subscription points remains the same across all versions This is confirmed with a variety of protocols See gt How does my PC s
354. pts to download the recipe If for some reason the recipe definition can t be found the following error message appears Unable to find recipe One recipe download must be completed before another recipe download is started If a recipe download is already in progress when another is started the following error message appears A recipe download is currently in progress If any validation code has been entered for this recipe the validation is conducted first If the validation is successful the recipe is downloaded If the validation fails the recipe is not downloaded and the following error message appears Unable to download selected recipe If there is no validation code to execute the recipe is downloaded anyway The download process consists of setting each ingredient to its specified target value The download may fail at this stage if there are problems communicating with a PLC A communications failure results in the error message Downloading recipe failed A delay in response from the PLC of more than one minute results in the error message Recipe transfer timed out When the recipe download is complete all the ingredients are saved and the CX Supervisor runtime environment continues to run in the normal manner An event is logged stating that the recipe was successfully downloaded Uploading a Recipe There are two ways of uploading a recipe definition in runtime The first method is to use a CX
355. put Once all the information has been provided for the new point clicking the OK pushbutton commits the new point to the points database whilst the Cancel pushbutton aborts the add operation General Attributes The name of the point is entered in the Point Name field The point name can be up to 20 alphanumeric characters and must not begin with a digit or include mathematical operators such as or be identical to a script reserved word such as IF or cos Any invalid characters including spaces generate an audible error or an Invalid Point Name entered message when the OK pushbutton is clicked The group to which this point belongs is selected from the Group field A new group can be entered by typing in the Group field A points description detailing the use of the current point may be inserted in the Description field Point Type The point type can be Boolean Integer Real or Text The default type is Boolean Release 3 0 Page 39 CHAPTER 3 Points OMRON Point Attributes The attributes for a point vary according to the point type For a Boolean point the following attributes are displayed Point Attributes Default State Default Text State O Jor C Integer C Real C Text State 1 On The default state of the point is defined by selecting either the State 0 or State l setting Associative text such as OFF or FALSE for state 0 can be ap
356. r presses a pushbutton to change the object s colour This is a simple example but underlines how quickly and smoothly a runtime application can be built This chapter elaborates on all forms of actions and animations that can be applied to CX Supervisor in the development environment Also refer to the CX Supervisor Script Language Reference Manual for further syntax details for the application of actions and animations Animation Editor Actions and animations are created on a project page or object basis using the Animation Editor To use the Animation Editor CX Supervisor must currently have a project open If no project is currently open select Open from the Project menu to open a previously saved project or select New from the Project menu to create a new project Page 146 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation H To access the Animation Editor select the Animation Editor pushbutton from the toolbar The Animation Editor dialog is displayed Objects Actions Users Animation Ed tor Ellipse 2 ee ee All Users HIH o T mi i z 5 wo Blink he Close Page Ji Colour Change Analogue iy Display Page ih Edit Point Value Analogue dh Edit Point Value Digital des Edit Point Value Text 73 Enable Disable dh Execute Script 74 Move Horizontal ae Move Vertical ty Percentage Fill Horizontal res Percentage Fill Vertical 7 Resize Height The Ani
357. r details on adding a point refer to chapter 3 Points Use the Simple Expression Entry dialog to assign an expression to an action It is accessed from an entry in the script code This results in the Simple Expression Entry dialog being displayed Expression Ok ee ooo Cancel Lok Geel i Bae Browse Enter the expression in the Expression field The Browse pushbutton can be used to pick a valid point Click the OK pushbutton to proceed or the Cancel pushbutton to abort Page 154 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation Use the Select Required Object dialog to assign an object to an action Itis accessed from an entry in the script code This results in the Select Required Object dialog being displayed Select Required Object Cancel Object Hames Select an object from the Object Names field Click the OK pushbutton to proceed or the Cancel pushbutton to abort Note The short cut keyboard combinations for Cut Copy and Paste operations are valid within the Script Editor Highlight part or all of a field and type lt Ctrl gt X to cut the text or lt Ctrl gt C to copy the text insert the cursor at the desired field and type lt Ctrl gt V to paste the text Since the cut and copy operations store the information in the Windows Clipboard it may be pasted to another dialog or application Aliases An alias definition can be provided to replace strings in scripts and expressions used through
358. range of alarms that are to be displayed The default selections are from the Lowest to the Highest Note that the range From must be the same or lower than the range To Use the check box Highest Priority at Top to reverse the alarm order 4 In Alarm Status Colours the colour codes for each of the three alarm states and blinking colours may be specified by clicking the appropriate colour box and selecting a new colour from the resultant Colour dialog 5 The Alarm Window Colours options allow you to select the colours for the Alarms Windows Background Title text and the Frame 6 Select the font used by the alarm object using the Font pushbutton 7 In Style Attributes set the following options as desired Display Date shows the date of the alarm Display Time shows the time of the alarm Display Alarm Status shows the status of the alarm Display Column Titles shows the column headings 3 D Frame displays object with 3 D border Highest Priority at Top shows highest priority at top Display Group shows the groups of the alarm Display Priority shows the priority of the alarm Date Width number of characters in date field Time Width number of characters in time field Group Width number of characters in priority field Status number of characters in status field 8 Exit the Wizard by clicking the OK pushbutton to accept the new alarm object attributes or click the Cancel pushbutton to leave the alarm obj
359. rdset therefore whenever a new record is selected in the parent a new child recordset will be generated Creating a Datashape connection Create DSN file specifying the required database as the Data Source Configure a Connection to the DSN file In the connection string type Provider MSDataShape FILEDSN lt your file name gt dsn Configure a Recordset as SQL Text and enter the required shape command as the Source See Datashape Source examples After successfully adding a Datashape Recordset it is now possible to add a Child Recordset to the existing Recordset by selecting the right menu option Add Recordset which will now be enabled If the Connection is Live a list of valid child recordset names will be entered in the Source ComboBox Field associations can be added to Child recordsets in the normal manner Child recordsets can be accessed via Script command in a similar manner to normal recordsets bResult DBState DataShape Customers Orders Details Open Note Child recordsets are not supported in the Database function dialog Simple Relation Hierarchy example SHAPE select from customers APPEND select from orders AS rsOrders RELATE customerid TO customerid The parent recordset contains all fields from the Customers table and a field called rsOrders rsOrders provides a reference to the child recordset and contains all the fields from the Orders table The other examples use a sim
360. requirement to use the original vendor is eliminated High priced proprietary solutions and their expensive after sale support contracts will yield to lower cost OPC enabled alternatives Time Reduction through Lower System Integration Costs OPC eliminates the need for costly custom software integration OPC provides plug and play software and hardware components from a variety of automation software device and system suppliers Process and manufacturing companies can easily integrate applications into corporate wide automation and business systems something that has been virtually unachievable in the past OPC compatible components greatly reduce system integration costs because all software and hardware components adhere to a single standard interface that s being adopted around the world Automation suppliers are providing hardware devices with integrated OPC servers that are replacing proprietary device driver software The driver connection between hardware and software from different vendors has historically been the number one headache in system integration OPC offers the opportunity to ease the pain and shorten the application development cycle This gets automation projects up faster which saves time for new projects and brings the benefit of automation to the process sooner Who should care about OPC You should care about OPC if your applications are largely run in personal computers and you are involved with solving plant integra
361. ributes Point Name E aripleP oir Group kDefault gt Description Ix K Cancel Advanced Browse rikt a bal Point Attributes Minimum ale 93999999 Maximum Value 99999999 Default Value fo LO Update Aate Point Type Boolean C Integer Real C Ten LO Type LO Attributes Memory On Change f PLC Input C On Request C OPC Other C Output On Interval R Seconds Setup 12 Fill in the physical address using the format described above We will create a point for table memory 500 and select an internal data type of IEEE float The command modifier should be set to blank f Input Output Release 3 0 Page 101 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON PLC Attributes Real hy TJ1 7 7 EEE foot 13 Click OK twice to close both dialogs You should now be able to access this point in a similar fashion to any other point in CX Supervisor Refer to the actual Trajexia documentation for further details about Trajexia devices memory areas and limitations Page 102 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects Settings General Settings Default Button Font The Default Button Font option which can also be selected from the General Settings sub menu of the Project menu displays the standard font dialog Font Ea Eont Font style Size C a ws m Regular m A Arial Black Cancel F Arial Narrow F Bookm
362. ributes assigned to an object that is copied to the Library are stored for example animation information da To add an object select it from a page and click the Add Object to Library button on the Graphics Library Editor toolbar The Add Object To Library dialog is displayed as illustrated below Add Object to Library Title Pure Cancel Description 1000mm bore low pressure cold water centrifugal pump Identifier Grug The name of the object used by the Object Identification control is shown in the Title field Type over this with a new name if required this is the name used by the Library Enter a text description in the Description field and an identifier for the object this is used when it is inserted on a page in the Identifier field Click the OK pushbutton to add the object to the Library and place the object in the dialog Click the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation Further details on the Object Identification control are contained in chapter 1 Graphics Editor Alternatively ensure that the Graphics Library Editor is open click and hold the mouse button on the page object and drag it from the page onto the Graphics Library Editor illustrated as follows Graphics Library Library When the mouse button is released the object is placed in the Library and the Add Object To Library dialog is displayed Copying an object to a page from a Library is the reverse of the click and drag
363. rmatting characters like s or d indicate a position for inserted text or numbers so should be left in the relevant place Also the amp character used in menus signifies the keyboard shortcut for the item so select an appropriate character in the translated language 3 The Runtime will now automatically show any new files with LNG extension in the Language Settings dialog 4 Repeat steps 1 and 2 above for the same file with the LND extension This provides the translations for the Data Log Viewer 5 Create a new language file for the user defined text as described in the section User Defined Text above To deploy this language to a new machine just install CX Supervisor as normal and then copy the LNG and LND file to the installed application folder These languages will then be available for all applications run on this machine When copying the application files also include the newly translated UDT files Page 248 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 14 Multilingual Features Popup Keyboard Layout The layout of characters shown on the Alphanumeric popup keyboard can be set for existing or new languages The layout is updated when a new language is selected All keyboard layouts are saved in files with KBD extension and have the same name as the selected language Note If there is no valid keyboard layout for the selected language then the default layout in SCSDEFS KBD is used This already caters for all the western lang
364. rocedure for connecting CX Supervisor to Third Party OPC Servers will depend on the server being used Consult your server documentation for full details However the following is a basic overview 2 3 Start the OPC Server and configure any settings and workspace items as described in WAStart the vendor s manual start 1 Start CX Supervisor and open your application Fe 2 Open the Point Editor by selecting the Point Editor option from the Utilities menu or by clicking the toolbar button 3 Inthe Point Editor dialog click the Add Point button in the toolbar to open the Add Point dialog 4 Inthe Add Point dialog move to the I O Type options and select the Input Output or Input Output option as appropriate Note that the I O Update Rate and I O Attributes options and displayed 5 Inthe I O Attributes options select OPC Other and click the Setup button This will open the Communications Control Attributes dialog 6 Inthe Communications Control Attributes dialog enter the appropriate parameters as follows Communications Control Attributes Release 3 0 Page 263 CHAPTER 16 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client OMRON Page 264 Communications Contre Communications Control Attributes Server OMAONCKOPCCommunicationsContral Group Gou L E ltem MySineWave O H Array Size i Server This shows the name of the communications object to connect to the server i e OMRONCXOPCCommuni
365. roduct Loda Indicates lists of one sort or another such as procedures checklists etc Represents a shortcut on the Toolbar to one of the options available on the menu of the same window Indicates a program must be started usually by clicking the appropriate option under the standard Windows Start button OMRON 2009 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of OMRON All copyright and trademarks acknowledged No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication Release 3 0 Page 3 CX Supervisor User Manual OMRON About this Manual Page 4 This manual describes the CX Supervisor application and its ability to create modify and run SCADA applications This manual contains the following Chapter I Graphics Editor This chapter describes the Graphics Editor
366. rties pushbutton on the Print dialog gives access to advanced printer configuration functions for the selected printer For details of these functions please consult the Windows User Manual On line Help or the appropriate Manufacturer s handbook Release 3 0 Page 31 CHAPTER 2 Pages OMRON Saving a Page to a Project Once a page has been created it is wise to save it into the project in which it is planned to reside It is good practice to ensure that pages are saved regularly for example to minimise the loss of work in the event of a power failure To save a page click the Save Page button from the toolbar If this is the first time the page has been saved the Save As dialog is displayed This is a standard Windows dialog and usage depends on your operating system Please consult your Microsoft documentation ED fae Pee 1 Move to the location where the page file is to be stored 2 Ensure that the Save as Type control is set to CX Supervisor Pages PAG 3 Enter a name in the File Name field 4 Click the Save pushbutton to save the file Subsequent saves do not cause the Save As dialog to be displayed After clicking the Save pushbutton if the page is currently not assigned to a project a confirmation dialog is displayed Alternatively select Save Page from the Fi e menu or use the short cut key combination of lt Ctrl gt S Save Page As Should a copy of a page be required for incorporation into ano
367. run in at least 1 language This is often English but does not have to be It could be the same language as the developer or even a completely different language for the end user All translations for all system text like dialogs and menus are installed automatically User defined text entered at development time is normally entered in the target language see Runtime Multilingual Features if this is not suitable The Default language can be set so that at runtime the translated system text automatically loaded and displayed To support the diversity of end users the Runtime features come translated in 16 languages including English and can easily be extended by the developer see Adding unsupported Runtime languages Release 3 0 Page 239 CHAPTER 14 Multilingual Features OMRON Note Remember that the choice of runtime language is in no way connected to the language of the installed Developer application Setting the Default language The Runtime application first starts up in the preferred default language Set this language during development from the Language Settings dialog select menu Project Runtime Settings Language Settings Language Settings Language for User Defined Test Cancel Default Default Danish Deutsch English Espa ol Finnish French Italiano Nederlands Belgie Horwegiar After setting when the application is next run it will start in the selected language
368. s the creation of master detail type recordsets which allow drilling down into detailed data Persisted Records _ Records MSPersist For locally saved recordsets a Provider MSDAOSP For creating your own providers for simple text data The above is just the list of standard providers supplied by Microsoft Other vendors are actively creating their own Creating a Data Source Name file A Data Source Name file or DSN for short stores information about a database connection in a file The file has the extension DSN and by default is stored in the Program Files Common Files ODBC Data Sources directory This type of file can be viewed with a suitable text editor e g Notepad One advantage of using a DSN file over specifying the full path of the database is that the DSN file remains unchanged while its contents can be re configured to reflect any changes in directory or database file name etc Creating a New DSN For Windows 98 ME and NT From your Windows Control Panel select the ODBC Data Sources icon This will show the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box For Windows 2000 and XP From the Programs folder select Administrative tools and Data Sources ODBC icon note this is only available if the logged in user has administrative rights and the Taskbar properties Display Administrative Tools option is checked This will show the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box Click on the
369. s as fields with Trigger on change of value unchecked are written with their current values at the time of writing not the value at the time of initial change This may also occur when a Deadband is used Page 210 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 12 Databases CHAPTER 12 Databases Overview CX Supervisor Database facilities provide fast transparent access to many different data sources via a database technology called ADO Database design is not covered here as it is a large subject explained fully in any of the many books available It is assumed that developers using these database facilities have a working knowledge of databases Comprehensive Database Script Functions allow complete database access The data sources which can be accessed depends on the Data Providers installed but may include MS Access MS Excel Visual FoxPro dBase ODBC for Oracle Paradox SQL Server A gt A gt A Text files in TXT and CSV format Database Connection Editor The Database connection editor in the Development Workspace enables users to create Connections Recordsets Field association Parameter association and Schema objects in a familiar Tree View hierarchical format using the popup menu Release 3 0 Page 211 CHAPTER 12 Databases Gai WorkSpace H E Customers H E Employee Sales H E Order Details Order Subtotals m Ep Shippers H E SOL OMRON Eonnect Shon Emors Cut Copy Paste Dele
370. s can be dragged from the Point Editor onto a Linear Gauge Rotary Gauge Trend Graph and Slider Boolean points can also be applied to a Toggle Release 3 0 Page 37 CHAPTER 3 Points OMRON To apply a point to a control object with the Point Editor ee l 2 J Arrange the CX Supervisor windows so that the point to drag and the target control object are both visible E Paine Cat Select the point to associate and drag it onto the page sAn Groupee Se wel ee Mir Fl fani ila i da n ZA Jcdssn Toa Sodan hd aint Drop the point at the position of the target control object An invalid drop is denoted by the mouse pointer changing to a circular symbol For further information of the use of points with objects refer to chapter 4 Objects Page 38 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 3 Points Creating a Point To add anew point select the Add Point button from the toolbar This results in the Add Point dialog being displayed Add Point OF General Attributes Point Mame whitevalve Group lt Default gt k Descriptions Cancel Advanced Browse Aidi White valve position El Point Attributes Default State Default Text f State 0 Jor State On Memory Attributes Array Size i Point Type Boolean C Integer C Real C Text lO Type f Memory C Input C Output C Input Out
371. s informed of the row col requirement by specifying a Range of cells in either row or column format Both the Microsoft Excel and CX Supervisor specifications must match in order for the call to be successful It is not necessary to specify rows or columns if a single element of an array is required Note DDE Requests are one shot request i e they are not part of a Hot link 1 Example requesting CX Supervisor array values from Microsoft Excel Sub RequestingArrayValues Dim chan As Integer Release 3 0 Page 341 APPENDIX F Obsolete Features OMRON chan DDEInitiate SCS Point If chan lt gt O Then Request Array1 from CX Supervisor and store in a row starting at RICI Range Cells 1 1 Cells 1 3 DDERequest chan Arrayl Request Array2 from CX Supervisor and store in a column starting at R2C1 Range Cells 2 1 Cells 4 1 DDERequest chan Array2 col Request elements 2 and 3 from Array2 and store in R3Cl1 amp RS C2 The or format can be used to delimit the array index Cells 3 1 DDERequest chan Array2 2 Cells 3 2 DDERequest chan Array2 3 End Lf End Sub OLE Automation OLE Automation provides a mechanism whereby one application can control another In order to access a CX Supervisor points value via OLE Automation it must be given either OLE Read or OLE Write access This can be achieved by check
372. s with embedded files should be OK Existing databases or those specified by dynamic connections cannot be detected and are therefore not copied These will need to be added manually Report Templates used by script cannot be detected and are therefore not copied These will need to be added manually Any User Settings files used by script e g CSV or TXT files cannot be detected and are therefore not copied These will need to be added manually Project Information Information may be stored concerning a project by using the Project Information dialog This dialog may be accessed by selecting Information from the Project menu CX Supervisor displays the following dialog Page 120 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects Project Information Factory Cancel Description File C PROGRAM Enter a title and any relevant details concerning the project in the Title and Description fields and click the OK pushbutton Alias Definitions An alias definition can be provided to replace strings in scripts and expressions used throughout CX Supervisor applications An associated string replaces the alias when used in a script or expression Select Alias Definitions from the Project menu 3 141592 The constant Pl Cancel System Aliases Browse Help The 3 columns are seperated by tabs and are the Alias text to be used the actual value to be used and an optional comment starting with lt
373. sappears when there are no further alarm messages to be reported Each acknowledgement is logged in the alarm history log with the login name of the current user An unacknowledged alarm does not affect a runtime application Release 3 0 Page 143 CHAPTER 8 Alarms OMRON Current Alarms A list of current alarms can be viewed by accessing the Current Alarms dialog A current alarm is one which has been raised but is not yet cleared and acknowledged The current alarm status viewer can be accessed in a variety of ways and is dependant on the setup of the runtime application Some applications may allow access to the dialog via the context sensitive floating menu whilst others may allow access via a pushbutton Refer to chapter 6 Projects or chapter 9 Animation as appropriate The Current Alarms dialog is as follows fel Current Alarms OF x x 2 Time of Alarm Message Priority Status There are no existing alarm conditions The Current Alarm dialog always shows the alarm messages listed in order with the highest priority at the top 5j The widths of the alarm fields can be widened or narrowed as required using the i mouse to drag the column boundaries Time 09 56 1 03 56 11 The Acknowledge Selected Alarm toolbar button acknowledges the alarm which is currently highlighted in the alarm status dialog This has no effect if the alarm has already been acknowledged hi The Acknowledge All Outstan
374. script code if required in a number of ways Placing the I beam cursor at the desired point in the script code field followed by Tab from the Edit menu Release 3 0 Page 157 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON Placing the I beam cursor at the desired point in the script code field and then pressing lt Ctrl gt lt Tab gt Finding and Replacing Text Text can be found and replaced within the current script as follows Select Find Replace from the Edit menu and type appropriate text in the Find what and Replace with fields Press the Find pushbutton to initiate the search and lt Return gt to execute text replacement Clear Script Code Field The script code field can be cleared if required Selecting Clear All from the Edit menu Script Completion Once script entry or script modification is complete click the OK pushbutton To abort the Script Editor prior to completing the task click the Cancel pushbutton If there is an error in the script the Compilation Error s dialog is displayed Compilation Errors Ea CH Supervisor Balloon Demonstration Fish jumping script Fishlump FALSE Fish visible FALSE AingeSize 1 Ainge visible TRUE ENDIF Syntax error 1 compilation error s In this example the error is caused by a spurious ENDIF This dialog informs the user where an error has occurred and its type If necessary use the scroll bars to see the whole error message Click the OK pu
375. se 3 0 Page 119 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON Create Runtime Install Disk A CX Supervisor application can be packaged safely for authorised distribution by creating a runtime install disk The process copies all required files plus files to install to the specific directory to be used to distribute the runtime project These files can be on a removable Memory Stick or later burnt to a distribution CD or even to floppy disk if the project is small enough Click on Create Runtime Install Disc from the Project menu The Save Runtime As dialog is displayed ready to create an installation to the desired folder Refer to chapter 6 Save Runtime As for further information regarding the Save Runtime As dialog Note Note Note Note Note Note Note The files are not compressed This feature does not support large projects that need to span multiple disks The Runtime environment itself 1s not copied and must still be installed from a legitimate source Any ActiveX components used are not copied and should be installed on the target machine using the supplier s instructions Support files used by any ActiveX control cannot be detected and are not copied These will need to be added manually This includes e Omron OPC Client settings stored in OPC file e Omron Industrial Component communication settings stored in MSC file e Any bitmaps when using Microsoft Image control e Any file linked to by an OLE object object
376. second If an invalid expression is entered an error message is displayed when the OK pushbutton is clicked Execution Attributes Script Hame Script Trigger Event On Condition Expression pee If On Regular Interval is specified a valid interval is required in the nterval Time field in units of milliseconds The script is started at the interval specified by this period If an invalid time is entered an error message is displayed when the OK pushbutton is clicked Execution Attributes Script Name Script Trigger Event On Regular Interval Interval Time li O00 Millizeconds Script code is entered in the script code text field To start a new line press lt Return gt Refer to the Script Language Manual for explicit details regarding the construction and syntax of script code Expressions consist of operators and operands Operators are relational arithmetic logical and include many functions Operands are constants or point variables The script language can also contain Java and Visual Basic script Refer to the Script Language Manual for details Page 156 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation Scripts can be generated either by typing directly into the script code text field or by using the pull down menu commands When using the pull down menu commands the user is assisted in the completion of the parameters to the command via a series of dialogs The di
377. selecting the Auto Size Font option Enter an arithmetic trace expression for each point or select one by clicking on a Browse pushbutton An existing point can also be associated with the Wizard by dragging a point directly from the Point Editor Refer to chapter 3 Points regarding adding a new point and dragging from the Point Editor Exit the Wizard by clicking the OK pushbutton to accept the new chart attributes or click the Cancel pushbutton to leave the chart unchanged To select the chart scaling click the Scaling pushbutton the Axis Scaling dialog is displayed as follows Page 62 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 4 Objects Cancel Style Attributes I Display Minor Ticks W Display Major Ticks Display Minor Units Display Major Units Scale Units Units M LNA Keep Ticks On Axis Asie Tick Colour Keep Units On Asis Scale Units Colour Display Grid Configuration Attributes Minimum Scale Yale E Maximum Scale Walue i O0 Minor Display Units 10 Major Display Units 20 The Configuration Attributes fields can be altered by typing over the existing entries The Style Attributes fields can be amended by clicking on the settings Exit the Axis Scaling dialog by clicking the OK pushbutton to accept the scaling attributes or click the Cancel pushbutton to leave them unchanged Pictures Pictures and graphics can be inserted on a page in the form of bitmaps bmp Windows
378. seseueeseeeseeessaeessaeens 211 Configuring a Connections kamanni p a a a R 212 Configuring Recordsets sient oo ea he a elias eat Bs eee ie deen 219 Configuring Field ASSOCIATIONS ccccccececeeeeceeeeceeeeceeeeaeeeeaeeesaeeesaeeeseueeseeeaes 221 Configuring Parameter ASSOCIATIONS ccccccecccececeeeeeeeeeeaeeesaeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeaes 223 CONMIGUFING SCMOMAS sactstenc at eoeretieteokctldosteliatenuceeebaendedeomretdeseatidosalatencemtedess 225 Release 3 0 Page 9 CX Supervisor User Manual OMRON USNO I GANGACUONS aicatat ate cutee ae a e a alien iawtebelals 229 Saving Recordsets AS AME asne easel ete ta eas cued hase a e Seana edo lik ds 230 WalaS Na DING essee a a nnacatanaaMepeanuinnuails 230 Chapter 13 Standard Web Pages scscssssssscccceeeeessssses LOD BEF cent ene Rec eR aa ROR eRe ERC PR era anc om Ae aA Meter ree 235 AO SS heise staat sat sa panera sate separa sah a oainadee cet aead cama tes tps steae ald etoaiien 236 CONNU AUO ammeter E nent sre Cee tee ren erm ere ret 236 Defaut POM ssassn earned cit a aor ate AT 236 DCON SCWING S osaa ean eae een ce ahaa acai etadanaG emeaac te easnateesee te 236 EOR AGOS ca aa e a E 237 LINKAUONS atenarna aa a a a 237 Development Features iain bidrovnoatvav no Mirninindnde ay ule biaencanatuavvncsiaupintedud a tiauabeund 239 Runtime Language Features cccccccccsccceeecseeseeeceeesaeesaeesaeesaeeseeeseeesesesaeees 239 Runtime Mulitlingual
379. setting To apply the change to the object background select the Apply colour changes to object background setting On selection of a colour in the Colour Change Analogue dialog the Colour Palette dialog is displayed The Colour Palette dialog is described in chapter 9 Common Colour Palette Click the Clear pushbutton to reset all colours and re start To abort the Colour Change Analogue edit click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed Colour Change Digital Objects can be animated so they change between two colours This is achieved using the Colour Change Digital dialog To access the Colour Change Digital dialog to add an action select Colour Change Digital from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access Colour Change Digital dialog to modify an action select Colour Change Digital from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar For a list of the objects to which this action is applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On selection of the Colour Change Digital action the Colour Change Digital dialog is displayed Colour Change Digital Digital Expressions 0k Colours State O Colour Cc Cancel Wi Browse
380. setting determines whether the target expression may be changed at runtime when the recipe is downloaded Only expressions featuring a fixed value may be edited in this way expressions featuring point names may not be edited at runtime Select the OK pushbutton to add the ingredient to the recipe or the Cancel pushbutton to abort this part of the operation Recipe Validation Recipe validation is an optional safety check which may be made in runtime as the recipe is about to be downloaded Ifthe validation fails the recipe is not downloaded If no validation is required make sure the Validate Recipe Before Download setting is set to OFF If validation is required check this box and then click the Validation Code pushbutton to display the Script Editor dialog Release 3 0 Page 183 CHAPTER 10 Recipes OMRON Script Editor Mikl x Edit Operators Control Actions Functions Special Execution Attributes Script Hame Cancel Trigger Event On Request Browse Aliases Script Code 0 WB Script f C Supervisor Script IF water temp gt 98 OA watertemp lt 95 THEN RETURN Waker 1s Invalid temperature iF ee ENDIF ELSE ENDIF Enter the recipe validation code using any standard CX Supervisor script language constructs The validation code should check any possible invalid point value or error condition The point value being checked is the value of the ingredient about to be downloaded or the
381. shbutton to remove the Compilation Error s dialog and return to the Script Editor to fix the error Page 158 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation Horizontal Move Objects can be animated by moving either left or right This is specified using the Move Horizontal dialog To access the Move Horizontal dialog to add an action select Move Horizontal from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Move Horizontal dialog to modify an action select Move Horizontal from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar Refer to the Script Reference chapter 10 Objects for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable On selection of the Move Horizontal action the Move Horizontal dialog is displayed E Hove Horizontal Expression __Cancel_ Cancel Active Expression Range amp Required Fosition Browse blinimum value ja Mininum Offset la 100 100 Masimum Offset blasimum Walue To define the animation an expression consisting of a number of operators and operands which may be based on the status of a point must be entered in the Expression field The boundaries in which the object moves are inserted into the Active Expression Range Required Position fields The Maximum Offset specifies the number of pixels to the right from its initial position that the object moves when the result of the expression reac
382. soft Remote Registry If it does not exist follow these steps to add it Ly 2 Dees l Page 334 In the Network settings ensure User level access control is selected on the Access Control tab From the Configuration tab click Add to add a Network component Choose Service from the type list and click Add Click Have Disk and browse your Windows CD Select the path Admin Nettods remotReg for Win95 CD or Tools ResKit NetAdmin RemotReg for Win98 and select regsrv inf Release 3 0 OMRON APPENDIX F Obsolete Features Follow screen prompts to complete installation and reboot if necessary On the server machine select Passwords from the Control Panel Ensure the Enable remote administration of this server option is checked ae OO pe Add all required user ids to the Administrators list by clicking Add Note Windows ME no longer includes the Microsoft Remote Registry network service on the product CD but this can still be installed and used from any Windows 95 or Windows 98 CD ROM using the above steps Windows 95 This product is no longer supports Windows 95 It is recommended to upgrade to Windows 2000 or Windows XP Professional System Points The following System Points are obsolete and are no longer updated Scripts and expressions will currently still compile but their value at Runtime will always be 0 GDIResources 0 100 Percentage of GDI resources free SystemResources 0 100 Percentage of system
383. st and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar For a list of the objects to which this action is applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On selection of the Edit Point Value Analogue action the dialog is displayed Edit Point Yalue Analogue Integer Real Point BIA User Input Limits Cancel dili Browse blinimum value E Maximum Yale fi 00 Runtime Display Attributes Caption Enter a new value M Display Numeric Keypad T In Place Edit Page 174 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation A Real or Integer point must be entered This is typed into the nteger Real Point field A text string for the caption of a user dialog can be entered in the Runtime Display Attributes field The limits imposed on the user for the value of the input are specified in the User Input Limits fields The Display Numeric Keypad option is useful if the runtime system does not have a keyboard i e it is controlled by a touch screen or tracker ball When a value is edited a Numeric Keypad dialog is displayed which allows editing by clicking on screen E feee A DEDS fefe If the In Place Edit option is checked instead of the popup editing dialog the value can be edited on the page in a standard Windows edit box To abort the Edit Point Value Analogue edit click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chap
384. st and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Display Value Text dialog to modify an action select Display Text Point from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar For a list of the objects to which this action is applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On selection of the Display Text Point action the Display Value Text dialog is displayed Text Point Ok weekD ap ame Cancel Displayed Text Browse Today is An expression based on a text point must be entered This expression is typed into the Text Point field A text string to be displayed can be entered in the Displayed Text field this field can be updated using the Graphics Editor The position of the displayed text within the text field is specified by entering a character into the Displayed Text field iit Note To include a character as part of the text insert it as an escape character For example to display Box 1 type Box Only hashes typed to the left of the required for value display need escape characters since the first hash without an escape character is taken to be the point at which the value should be displayed Page 172 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation To abort the Display Text Value edit click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed c
385. stems A SCADA software application which creates and maintains graphical user interfaces and communicates with PLCs and other I O mechanisms An ingredient must specify a target value for its related point This is the value to which the point will be set in runtime when the recipe is downloaded An integral part of Microsoft Windows which allows Microsoft Windows based applications to be started CX Supervisor is run from the Taskbar In CX Supervisor a text object is a string on a page Attributes such as typeface point size embolden italicise underline left justify flush right and centre can be applied to enhance its presentation A type of point that holds a string A Multi Byte Character Set which not only includes European Characters like DBCS but can also include global support including for Japanese Chinese and Cyrillic fonts However Unicode is not supported on all Windows platforms Recipe validation code is CX Supervisor script language which is used to check point values before downloading a recipe A Visual Basic style scripting language supported by Microsoft s Windows Scripting Host A mode of video display that provides 640 x 480 pixel resolution with 16 colours and is supported on Video Graphics Adapter systems An integral part of Microsoft Windows which allows Microsoft Windows based applications to be started from icons and for all applications to be organised CX Supervisor can be run from Windows Deskt
386. t file searches in the Data Log Viewer Note Additional files should never be copied into the Data Logging directory as the automatic purging mechanism may delete all the log files Number of files in a Data Set When a Data Set starts logging a file will be created to hold the logged items this file is known as a Live or Active log file There is only one Live file in a Data Set file set When the time period for a Data Set log file expires a new file is created with a more recent Timestamp this file then becomes the Live file and the previous file is now known as a Dead log file Over a period of time there can be many Dead files in a Data Set but only one live one Ifa limit has been set on the number of dead files to be kept when this number is reached the oldest file will be purged automatically as each new file is created The number of dead files to be kept for a particular Data Set is managed automatically by specifying the Number of Files to Keep from the Data Set Properties Parameters when a Data Set is created This field is only enabled when the Keep all files check box is unchecked Note There will always be one Live file for each Data Set For example if the number of files to keep is set to 24 then there the system will keep 24 Dead files and one Live file 1 e 25 files in total WARNING No backups are taken when a file is purged If you wish to keep any data you must ensur
387. t E Cancel Help 5 Click the Settings button next to Device Type and then select the model of the device you will be using Device Type Settings T 1 Device x General Model Type TJ1 MC1E Make Default Cancel Help Page 98 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects 6 Click the Settings button next to Network Type and then configure the communications settings for the TJ1 The FINS Source Address and FINS Destination Address are not currently used for communication with a TJ1 whilst the Frame Length and Response Timeout s can normally be left at their default values Network Settings Ethernet x Network Driver FINS Source Address Network Hade f rit fe FINS Destination 4ddress Network s 4 Node a3 H Unit fe Frame Length Response Timeout s 2o00 f2 Host Link Urt Humber Network Operating Level fe f 0 1 Cancel Help Release 3 0 Page 99 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON 7 On the second tab enter the IP address of the TJ1 Network Settings Ethernet 8 Click OK to close the Device Type Settings dialog and then OK to close the Add PLC dialog 9 Open the point editor 10 Press the button to add a point and enter a point name 11 Change the I O type to Input Output and then press Setup Page 100 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects SL General Att
388. t 3 14 then FishJump FALSE EH eS eS Fish wisible FALSE i Ring2Size 1 EI aes ee Ringe es ibe TRUE aise 2 En e Fish rotate Fish angle 360 6 28 The script editor is colour coded to help show correct syntax with keywords and different object types are shown in different colours Release 3 0 Page 153 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON When creating the script choosing an action function etc from the menu may require further information This subsequent information is provided using some common dialogs the Select Required Item dialog the Simple Expression Entry dialog and the Object Selection dialog Use the Select Required Item dialog to pick a point to associate with the current action It is accessed by clicking the Browse pushbutton from the current dialog This results in the Select Required Item dialog being displayed Select Required ltem Cancel Point Names Add Alas 4ctivedlarnms 4 larmCount Add Point available emon 0 apDfMonth ap frear Items Displayed D emoblode Aliases Disk Space a tGD Resources Points Highdlarms HighE rors M Boolean s M Integer Description a Text Exclude System Points Only relevant points are listed in the Point Names field Select the desired point from the Point Names list and click the OK pushbutton Clicking the Cancel pushbutton aborts the selection To add a new point click the Add Point pushbutton fo
389. t last c R5C2 R5C5 ricl r3cl column Enter the number of elements in the array in the Array Size field This must match with the specified range in the Item Name field In the CX Supervisor Runtime environment the above DDE Client array transactions are initiated by means of script in the same way as single DDE Client points The CX Supervisor script below gives examples of the facilities available with DDE Client array points Page 338 Release 3 0 OMRON APPENDIX F Obsolete Features 1 Example CX Supervisor Script demonstrating client array points chan DDEInitiate Excel Bookl xls IF chan gt 0 THEN Establish data transfers between point DDEArray and Excel the initial values of DDEArray is sent to Excel DDEOpenLinks chan The array 1S initialised with the value 5 and sent to Excel in one operation InitArray DDEArray 5 The contents of MemoryArray are copied into DDEArray and the array are sent to Excel in one operation MemoryArray 0 100 MemoryArray 1 34 MemoryArray 2 89 6 CopyArray MemoryArray DDEArray Sets element 2 of the array to 6 and sends the whole array to Excel Note Use On Reguest option and OutputPoint to send the array after setting several elements of a large array DDEArray 2 6 ENDIF DDE Script Functions The existing DDE Script functions DDEPoke and DDERequest can be used wi
390. ta Window Help SH SRY BRS O BelZ 10 Customerinvoice Invoice_Number i Invoice Number SE T Be Invoice Total 105 Alex Homer 22 99 106 David Sussrnz 37 95 06 Edward Julius 14 99 307 John Daintith 0 99 456 Roger Hatton 243 2 En EE EN Ka EE IEI Ready Bum 1169 91 e oe a i z j t a i jpk The first row of the range is assumed to contain the Column Headings When updating files the column headings cannot contain numbers or spaces for example Column1 or Invoice Total is invalid Also some words are reserved and can not be used for example a column heading of Number will cause an error These restrictions do not apply when only reading these files Make sure that all the cells in a column are of the same data type The Excel ODBC driver cannot correctly interpret which data type the column should be if a column is not of the same type or you have types mixed between text and general This type of querying and updating information in an Excel Spreadsheet does not support multi user concurrent access Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 12 Databases Creating a Read Write connection to CSV Text file Connections to CSV or Text files using the Provider installed with ADO version 2 0 like Excel files are also read only hence Records can not be added or amended However CSV and Text files can be updated by converting the data into an Excel spreadsheet and accessing the file via t
391. tacd hg Seton attend RAE 76 PPOIMM SUID SUCUMOM atic acee smectite ah case oh cole os eaaeietl als a ne eae a E ile eden oes 81 Chapter 5 ActiveX Objects cccccccsssssssscccccsssssssccsssessssssses OF OVENI EW aaea aecteserh tecetcnseonectweceneesaiasteanth souatsaseensseanaeneinn vies essere ecoueee 83 Inserting a new object vicina eGrateossiolranrdedaave aa bianca tear iaablcn winded tabsiinninatialiaaticanns 83 Editing Properties at Design TIMG ccccsccceecceeeceeeceecceeecceeccueeceseeenesenesaeees 84 Reading and Writing Properties at RUN Time cccccccceccseceeeeeeeeeneeeneeeseeeseeeees 86 Calling Methods at RUN TiMme cccccseccceeeccececeececeeeeceeeceecsueecueessessaaeesaeeens 86 Responding to EVES wecssiesuetesmndeteoiace youn seed a a a a aa vee emacs 86 Chapter 6a Pr jeCiS seiniin A OO OV VIEN o E teens ea oh ese otc sates eh cee 88 RUNNUM CUMOIS sautia a a a tactic le obaledewaus 88 Creating a PlrO e Cts cn6e sie dite et alee ieee hail aren hei eee lane 89 Amending clr TO CCL aatcastace hin date Sees Un eects en canus dame EE AE A E 89 DAVIN el PPO OCU ss sacs essere dade ote whitead coved Ea a E EA i 90 PINUNO PTO SO eene a atisuatosa anne eotwamen snare atamavanatsu 90 Device COMNGUIATOM aiic e Rood ecdet wed A Bie eae eda 90 Fins Galeway OPO Missar aa ee cca a ete casper esata a ce oiacne ce a eee 96 Mooka DEVICES arnoa ea A 97 SEMN aa E e a T 103 R n Mme SCT Sse e e
392. te Add Connection DSH Add Recodser A Text Add schema Records Add Field Add Parameter This editor is unique in CX Supervisor in that actual database connections can be tested online in the Development Environment The ability to connect online also has the added benefit of providing assistance in creating objects lower down in the hierarchy This editor has been designed to enable a large proportion of the database functionality to be performed automatically 1 e without the need for Script functions although a comprehensive set of Database Script functions are available Configuring a Connection Connections to existing databases are added to the Workspace by using a right mouse button context sensitive menu option Add Connection which invokes the Add Modify Database connection dialog They can be modified later by selecting the Edit option from the menu Add Modify Database connection dialog The Add Connection dialog show below is show when the Add Connection menu option is selected from the Database connection editor and the identical Modify Connection dialog when the Edit menu is selected Add Connection Connection Properties Mame Connection Cancel Data Source C Data source N orthweind mdb E Advanced lM Connect on Application Startup Page 212 Release 3 0 OMRON Name CHAPTER 12 Databases For convenience a unique Connection name is created automat
393. tected as being invalid it will be renamed Batch1 2000032922 dlv A new Batch1 2000032922 dlv file will then be created to log the new data If the file Batch1 2000032922 d1v already exists then the current invalid file will be renamed Batch1 2000032922 1 dlv and so on This is most likely to occur during the development of an application when Data items are continually being amended and tested Invalid files are not part of the Data Set files and can not be purged or found by the File Management next or previous searches The data recorded in these files is not lost and can be viewed using the Data Log Viewer and exported from them using Export Log Invalid files can only be deleted using Windows explorer Data Set Period Examples The following examples show how the specified period Hour s Day s Month s is implemented while the System is running 1 Data Set period Hours If a Data Set named CV500 starts logging at 12 30 on the 7th March 1999 with a period of 6 hours the following files will be created CV500 1999030712 dlv If the s7stem is left running the Data Logging directory will contain the following files CV500 1999030712 dlv CV500 1999030718 dlv CV500 1999030800 dlv CV500 1999030806 vdiv The first file will only contain 5 5 hours of Data because the minimum resolution is one hour and the file was created on the half hour all subsequent files will contain the full six hours of
394. ted server check the information is correct and click the OK button Note Ifthe server is not shown in the drop down list the server may not Page 265 CHAPTER 16 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client OMRON be fully OPC version 2 compliant Check the server documentation Project File This is the name of the current Project file which stores the setup of the OPC items If no name is shown or it is incorrect click the New or Open button as appropriate Clicking the Open button opens the Open Project dialog from where you can navigate to the project file you wish to open If you want to create a new file click the New button to open the Create Project dialog In the Create Project dialog navigate to the directory in which you want to create your new file and enter your File Name Select the appropriate file type Save as type i e File Name opc and click the Save button Note A Project File name can not be entered from the keyboard File names can only be entered by using the New or Open buttons b Groups Tab The groups within the selected project file are listed A Group is made up of one or more items data points that share a common update rate enabling them to be controlled as a single entity For example you could create any number of groups each containing Items that have the same update rate There is no limit to the number of groups you can have in a Project File and each group can contain any number or
395. ter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed During runtime selecting the user input object by clicking the left mouse button results in the in place edit box or runtime User Input Analogue dialog being displayed based on the contents of the development version Enter a new value Ea Current Value Enter New Value Cancel 6 008 Maximum Value 1 6 008 New Value E Minimum ale Release 3 0 Page 175 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON CX Supervisor provides an instruction based on the Runtime Display Attributes field the minimum and maximum values allowed based on the User Input Limits fields and a New Value field in which the user types the desired Real or Integer value Click the OK pushbutton to accept the value or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation An invalid entry in the New Value field is exposed as an error once the OK pushbutton has been clicked Edit Point Value Text A text point may be issued to the user for amendment during runtime defined using the User Input Text dialog To access the User Input Text dialog to add an action select Edit Point Value Text from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the User Input Text dialog to modify an action select Edit Point Value Text from the animation list and click the Modif
396. terval will also be too high RX Bytes CX Supervisor The number of bytes received by CX Supervisor from CX Server RX Bytes Sec CX Supervisor The number of bytes per second received by CX Supervisor from CX Server this should be well below the bandwidth of the chosen networks capacity Also take into account other bandwidth use such as received data and other unrelated network traffic RX Heartbeat Interval ms RX Average Heartbeat Interval ms RX Average Heartbeat Deviation ms If you have an Input point at 1 second this is used as a heartbeat If there is no point at this rate there will be no monitor of heartbeat interval This is so the measure doesn t actually affect the performance The average heartbeat should be about 1000 with the deviation as low as possible If this number is much more than 1000 then this would indicate a communications problem Even if you don t notice in normal use CX Supervisor is communicating faster than the network bandwidth or infrastructure can cope with and performance is suffering Theoretical Max CPS An assumed maximum CPS possible for the particular network this is a rough calculation and is only used as a guide It does not take into account other network traffic or differences between throughput of different PC network cards Total Active Points Total Active Elements The number of active memory addresses on a PLC the Active points could be in arrays of many elements so the Eleme
397. tes and element sizes For example 1000 reads per second could be 1000 points of 1 element with a 1 second update rate or 200 array points with 5 elements with a 1 second update rate or 20 array points with 5 elements with a 100 millisecond update rate or any combination of variations The figures should be self explanatory but its worth noting that Toolbus is better than twice as good as SYSMAC WAY at the same baud rate and depending on the PLC supports higher baud rates This is a very cheap way to improve performance Note 1 These figures assume best case scenario where data is in contiguous addresses Lesser performance will be achieved as memory areas are fragmented Note 2 These tests stopped at 1000 updates so actual limits are beyond this figure except for CS1H Ethernet and Controller Link Networks which has been tested for 10 000 updates per second Release 3 0 Page 291 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions Max Num of Reads per Second CS1H N N 9 N gt Ay NO a 1200 1000 800 600 400 Max Num of Reads per Second 200 CVM1 V2 CPU21 CV500 V1 CPU21 Page 292 OMRON Release 3 0 OMRON Release 3 0 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions 1200 1000 800 600 400 Max Num of Reads per Second 200 C200HX CPU64 Max Num of Reads per Second 1200 1000 800 600 400 200 SYSMAC WAY 9600
398. th any array points as the following example CX Supervisor Scripts show 1 Example CX Supervisor Script demonstrating DDEPoke with arrays chan DDEInitiate Excel Book1l Sheet2 IF chan gt 0 THEN Send element 1 of RealArray to Excel DDEPoke chan R16C1 RealArray 1 Send IntegerArray to Excel as a column note range and column must be specified DDEPoke chan R1C1 R3Cl1l column IntegerArray Send TextArray to Excel as a row default only range required DDEPoke chan R1C2 R1C4 TextArray ENDIF Release 3 0 Page 339 APPENDIX F Obsolete Features OMRON 2 Example CX Supervisor Script demonstrating DDERequest with arrays chan DDEInitiate Excel Book1 Sheet3 IF chan gt 0 THEN Request a row of cells from Excel and copy into Arrayl Arrayl DDERequest chan R1C1 R1C3 Request a column of cells from Excel and copy into Array2 using the return flag Array2 DDERequest chan R1C2 R3C2 bReturnFlag Request a cell value from Excel and copy into element 2 of Arrayl Array1 2 DDEReguest chan R3C2 ENDIF Note All the above points must have DDE Read Write access set DDE Server Array Points The value of an array point named ddearray in a CX Supervisor project called ddetest srt can be read from a Microsoft Excel worksheet by entering the following formula format into a cell lt Server gt lt To
399. that point had been used extensively for data exchange within SCADA systems designed for Windows The new OLE technology was more flexible robust and efficient than DDE OLE provided an opportunity to create a standard interface between the SCADA core and the device drivers responsible for reading and writing data to various automation devices such as PLCs Such a standard interface would benefit both the SCADA vendors and equipment suppliers as the SCADA vendors would not need to invest costly effort in developing software drivers while the equipment manufacturers could provide just one driver that would work with all Windows software in the same way that printer manufacturers already could The first draft of the OPC OLE for Process Control specification v1 0 was released in December 1995 The following year the group of companies involved in the definition of the standard decided that an independent body must be set up to manage the OPC specification This decision resulted in the formation of the OPC Foundation that has continued to develop the philosophy of standardised interfaces for SCADA In 1998 the Data Access 2 0 specification for OPC was released This addressed several deficiencies and ambiguities in the original standard and included specifications for both the Automation interfaces typically used by VB programmers and Custom interfaces typically used by C programmers In 2000 using these DA 2 0 specifications Omron creat
400. that the cause is only the last 2 digits of the error code for example if the error shown is Ox8alb then ignore the 8a and just look up Oxnn1b Cause Normal Operation Cancel Button was pressed Normal Operation The executing function was stopped in the applications callback handler The return specified buffer is not large enough to hold all the data requested The specified name is not unique within the open project file An unspecified error occurred in CX Server that is not handled by any other error code CX Server has not been initialised by the application during a read write request Oxnn08 The specified address is invalid for the selected or open device This error may be generated by the Communications Manager during address validation or the device device The CDMPLCCommand function executed is not supported on the selected or open The File or filename specified is invalid or could be opened created Oxnn0B The device s operating mode is invalid for the requested operation or the device was opened in an mode not compatible with the requested operation e g attempt to execute CDMGetData when the device was open in Read Only mode The specified name is invalid it name contains invalid characters One or more of the specified parameters are invalid Page 328 Release 3 0 OMRON APPENDIX D CX Server Error Codes The open PLC handle specified is invalid The open Project handle speci
401. the PLC Data Monitor and are correct in CX Supervisor using the Point Maintenance tool e Prove that scripts are executed by popping up message boxes e For speed or responsiveness issues use the Performance Monitor to check the system is not overloaded Point Maintenance The Point Maintenance dialog is very useful during troubleshooting for displaying and setting point values Launch by right clicking the runtime and selecting Point Maintenance providing that you have sufficient security When an expected animation or script execution has not occurred the Point Maintenance can quickly show if the data is not the expected value If the data is the correct value then the fault must lay with the animation or script Note You can not set the value of points defined as Input only In this case use the PLC Data Monitor PLC Data Monitor The PLC Data Monitor is similar to the Point Maintenance dialog except that it is a CX Server tool that operates at a lower level on the PLC It can be used to read and write logical and physical addresses and using a variety of PLC data formats It is launched by right clicking the runtime and selecting Communication Utilities PLC Data Monitor Page 320 Release 3 0 OMRON APPENDIX C Troubleshooting Most useful is the Address monitor select the Address tab and double click Monitor Any CX Supervisor PLC Symbol point can be selected and monitored and set including Input only points
402. the Wizard by dragging a point directly from the Point Editor Refer to chapter 3 Points regarding adding a new point and dragging from the Point Editor Select the Toggle While Pressed field if the value should only be set while the button is pressed i e the mouse button is held down when the toggle button is clicked The value has its state toggled and then set back when the mouse button is released The different styles of toggle button are the same as those for pushbuttons Examples of some of the different styles of toggle button are illustrated below pi E Switch Blank Toggle Coloured In Out Rotary On Off The colour of the coloured pushbutton is red by default but can be changed by using the Palette Click the OK pushbutton to accept the new toggle button attributes or click the Cancel pushbutton to leave the button unchanged Release 3 0 Page 73 CHAPTER 4 Objects Trend Graph OMRON Trend graphs allow the display of data over time Click the Trend Graph button then click or click and drag on the page to insert the graph To edit the Trend Graph double click on it The Trend Graph Wizard dialog is displayed as follows Trend Graph Wizard Configuration Attributes 5 Seconds 0o Minutes 50o Samples Background Colour a W Display Time Labels fe Slider Trend Graph Title Sample Aate Visible Time Spar Total Time Span Time Label E very W Yale Bar Traces 1 to 5 Traces 6 to 10 Tra
403. the list click the Security Level field on the toolbar Select the required security level from the list The selected security level is then applied to the recipe To change the security level click the Security Level field again and choose a different security level from the list Printing Recipes Print Setup The Recipe Editor can be printed in the same way pages can Before printing ensure that the printer has been set up correctly To check the printer settings refer to chapter 2 Pages Print Preview To preview the page before printing select Print Preview from the File menu Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print preview display Printing S To print the contents of the Recipe Editor select the Print button from the toolbar Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print dialog It is possible to print the details of a recipe including a list of all the ingredients points and expressions which comprise the recipe To do this display the Recipe Editor dialog as described earlier and then highlight the appropriate recipe from the list of recipes Click the Print Recipe button on the toolbar to send a copy of the recipe to the printer The recipe is formatted similar to the following example Recipe Coffee British Description Makes weak washy British style coffee Access Level All Users Ingredient Point Expression Editable milk ml milk 50 Yes coffee g coffee 2 Yes sugar g sugar O
404. the same width Click the Make Same Height button from the toolbar to make objects the same height Click the Make Same Height and Width button from the toolbar to make objects the same width and height Click the Align to Grid button from the toolbar to align objects to the grid When performing alignment operations the Master Object determines how the other objects are aligned The Master Object 1 e the last object clicked on has green sizing handles To align objects ee ee 1 Select the objects to be aligned 2 Ensure the correct master object is selected 3 Choose the appropriate tool from the Alignment toolbar The alignment operations available at any one time vary according to the number of objects selected Zoom It is often useful to be able to view an object in more detail The Zoom option allows selected objects to be magnified up to four times their normal size To enlarge an area of the screen choose the View menu and select Zoom Then select the required magnification factor Off 2X or 4 A specific object can be zoomed in on by selecting that object and then performing the procedures described above Page 80 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 4 Objects Point Substitution This feature allows the points associated with one or more objects to be changed en mass This can make reusing page objects either by using copy and paste or the Graphics Objects Library simpler and quicker The Point Substitu
405. ther project perhaps select Save Page As from the File menu CX Supervisor displays the File Save As dialog as described previously After entering a new name for the page CX Supervisor prompts to save the different page into the current project as above Closing a Page To close a page after editing select Close Page from the File menu Alternatively either click on the control box for the page located in the top left corner of the page and select Close from the Control menu or simply double click on the Control menu and the page closes Should you attempt to close a page which has not been saved CX Supervisor displays a confirmation dialog If you want to save the changes click the Yes pushbutton Otherwise click the No pushbutton or click the Cancel pushbutton to abort closing the page CX Supervisor Preferences CX Supervisor allows a user to customise the working environment To set or amend the CX Supervisor setup select Preferences from the File menu followed by the preference to set up Page 32 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 2 Pages The types of customisation are described in the following paragraphs Startup Preferences The Startup Preferences allows the project last accessed in the previous session of CX Supervisor to be automatically loaded in the next session It is accessible by selecting Startup from the Preferences menu Click in the Load last project on startup setting to switch this preference as desir
406. tings Q Why do get Installation error 115 Error 115 during installation means the specified file could not be copied This is most often caused by the file already being in use or locked Reboot the machine and attempt installing before running any Omron software This error can also appear when attempting to install on a operating system that does not support extended European characters e g Japanese or Chinese Windows During installation on the Select Components dialog select CX Supervisor package and click Change Scroll to the bottom of the list of sub components and deselect Language Files This will prevent language files including those using extended European characters being installed Q How do address extended memory banks in PLCs In the point editor where you configure the PLC address enter a hyphen and the bank number for example E32000 3 Or depending on PLC type EM32000 3 This will address memory location 32000 in bank 3 Q Why can t see all my installed controls in the Insert Object dialog Under Windows 2000 and Windows XP the Insert Object dialog is not able to see all the controls installed on the PC These include the MS Forms 2 0 controls that are installed as part of MS Office This is by Microsoft s design for these operating systems however it is possible to force the old operation depending on which controls you need to expose for use in CX Supervisor Contact your supplier to re
407. tion dialog is shown automatically after inserting a library item or on demand by right clicking on an object or objects and choosing Point Substitution or from the Edit menu Example In this example a button has been created which has a Colour Change animation and a script Both are linked to PointA After performing a copy and past on the item the Point Substitution dialog can be used to choose the points that should be re linked Clicking the Browse button will allow a new point to be selected Clicking OK will now replace all instances of PointA with PointB and then recompile the button animations and scripts set Point Set Point hore an Cancel Browse Release 3 0 Page 81 CHAPTER 4 Objects OMRON Applying Tooltips In the runtime environment it is possible to provide instant help for the object currently selected by the cursor This is achieved by tooltips that can be applied to all objects ly 2i 1 Inthe development environment select the object to apply a tooltip 2 Click on Tooltip Text from the Edit menu The Tooltip Text is displayed Tooltip Text Tooltip Text Select the Burner pushbutton to go Cancel Type the help text in the Tooltip text field or select the Browse pushbutton to apply the value of a point 4 Click the OK pushbutton to accept the settings or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation An example of a tooltip in the runtime environm
408. tion machine Windows NT provides the best overall performance It is understandable that newer larger Operating Systems run slower on the same specification machine This is not usually a problem as newer operating systems are usually delivered on newer specification machines FINS Gateway drivers for particular networks operate consistently across all operating systems OMRON recommend Windows 2000 and Windows XP Professional for the following reasons Better security Better stability Better multitasking Better DCOM configuration 103 85 100 00 80 00 60 00 40 00 of Windows 95 20 00 0 00 Win95 Win98 WinME WinNT Win00 WinXP Release 3 0 Page 295 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions OMRON Q How does upgrading CX Supervisor affect communications performance The graphs below show that this does not have an impact itself which is not surprising as a communications functions and therefore performance are governed by the communication middleware CX Server The graphs show e Upgrading CX Supervisor does not affect the total number of Subscription points that can be simultaneously read which has remained more than 1000 e Performance of instantaneous read and write is not significantly affected by the version of CX Supervisor e Updating CX Supervisor does not affect how performance degrades when the system gets busy Note CX Supervisor 1 2 and later do include automatic o
409. tion problems As a critical mass of servers and OPC enabled applications become available OPC is likely to become an important part of your plant integration tool set The OPC specification promises a future without proprietary interfaces that will greatly benefit both manufacturing customers and automation suppliers Page 262 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 16 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client How is OPC going to improve my bottom line From a business perspective the use of OPC for connectivity promises to reduce the cost of automation control and integration solutions By using OPC compliant products significant savings can be achieved through shorter development efforts and a wide choice of vendor hardware and software solutions For every automation system installed today a significant amount of time and money is spent ensuring that the system can share information with other systems and devices OPC will save the customer time and money by eliminating a lot of the system integration problems caused by lack of open standards that exist between automation devices systems and manufacturing software After an automation system is installed OPC will not improve business bottom line directly however OPC will provide a common method to access real time information The real key to improving the bottom line is to distribute and use the information throughout the business value chain Using CX Supervisor with OPC Servers The exact p
410. tion tool to highlight and fix References to non existent points Q How do I access CX Supervisor Local Points from Omron Graphical components Omron ActiveX Graphical components like the Thumbwheel shipped with CX Supervisor or those shipped with CX Server Lite and CX Server OPC 7 Segment Display Knob Toggle etc can be placed on CX Supervisor pages and linked directly to CX Supervisor points by selecting a data source of CX Supervisor Local Points However note that the default setting for points is to allow reading but to protect against writing from external sources like these controls If this is attempted you will get the following error message OLE Point lt pointname gt has no write access Note however that as a low priority message the default project configuration will not cause the error log to automatically open and you will have to manually view the error log viewer To prevent this error and to allow write access change the OLE Access to Read Write on the Advanced Point Settings dialog Note Copy Protection must be installed for this function Q Which OPC Servers have been tested with CX Supervisor The following third party OPC Server products have been tested with CX Supervisor Release 3 0 Page 301 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions OMRON 4CE Industry OPCSysDiag 1 0 Pass 4CE Industry Modbus Server 2 0 4 Alstom FBSOPC 1 30a Pass Technology although noted not OPC compl
411. tly to the objects being animated This means that you don t have to define lots of memory points to hold intermediate values Just link the appropriate action to the object using the Animation Editor and enter the required expression For example using expression Temperaturek 273 rather than creating a new TemperatureCelsius memory point Boolean expressions can easily written to operate on bits within a word e g nFlags amp 0x02 will be TRUE if bit 2 is set or FALSE if it not This eliminates the need for additional memory points and processing Q Can I use token disks with USB Floppy drives or in high capacity LS120 Disk Drives The token copy protection is no longer supported The software tokens have proven to be incompatible with some USB floppy drives and the high capacity LS120 Disk Drives If you need to remove a software token use the network to conduct the token transfer by sharing a floppy drive from another machine Q Can print accented characters on alarm printers There is a limitation with Windows such that it is not possible to print accented characters to a line printer a line at a time The only alternatives are Page 308 Release 3 0 OMRON APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions e To print using English only characters e To set the printing to page mode which will print a page when a specified number of alarms have occurred This can be set up under Runtime settings Alarm Message printer set
412. to communicate with each other If there is a problem with the DCOM settings the Standard Web Pages login page will show Unknown project instead of the project name To check the DCOM settings follow the steps below 1 Click Start Run type dcomcnfg and then click OK Expand Component Services Computers DCOM Config Find the entry for scs exe and open its properties dialog 2 3 4 On the Identity Tab select The Interactive User 5 Select Customize on the Security Tab of the Launch and Activation Permissions section 6 Click Edit and then add the user PCNAME everyone Select Local Launch and Local Activation and then click OK Select Customize on the Security Tab of the Access Permissions section 8 Click Edit and then add the user PCNAME everyone Select Local Access and then click OK Error Pages Error Pages The Standard Web Pages use a two tier error reporting system Remote users that is someone viewing the web pages from any other machine apart from the one which is running the CX Supervisor runtime see the default error page If you are viewing the web pages on the local host a full error page is shown This page is not shown to remote users for security reasons Limitations The standard web pages require version 3 5 or later of the Microsoft NET Framework to be installed on the server the computer running the CX Supervisor runtime application Requirements for the client are simply a relatively
413. ton in the toolbar to open the Add Point dialog 4 In the Add Point dialog move to the I O Type options and select the Input Output or Input Output option as appropriate Note that the I O Update Rate and I O Attributes options and displayed 5 In the I O Attributes options select OPC Other and click the Setup button This will open the Communications Control Attributes dialog 6 In the Communications Control Attributes dialog enter the appropriate parameters as follows Communications Control Attributes Communications Contri Communications Control Attributes Server OMRON CHOPCCommunicationslontrol i Group Groupi i Sos Item MySinew ave Delete Array Size fi Server This shows the name of the communications object to connect to the server i e OMRONCXSupervisorCommunicationsControl If you wish to use a different object make your selection from the drop down list To Add Modify or Delete an object click the Info button Selecting the Add option will open the Communications Control dialog From the list of control objects select OMRON CxX Supervisor Communications Page 272 Release 3 0 OMRON Release 3 0 CHAPTER 17 Connecting to a remote CX Supervisor application Control and click the OK button Communications Controls x Select a control OK OMRON Cs Communications Control OMRON Cs IC Communications Control Cancel OMRON Cs OPC Communications Control OMRON
414. ttings button to configure which columns of information are displayed in the Point Editor amp Select the Large Icons button to view details with large icons Select the Small Icons button to view details with normal icons e7 Select the List button to view details as a list Select the Details button to view details as a list including name type I O type address and description information The details can be sorted in ascending order by clicking once or in descending order by clicking twice in the appropriate field Summary of Point Information aj A summary of point information is available by selecting the Display Information on Points button from the toolbar The resultant Point Information dialog shows an overall summary a breakdown on the number of points per type and the input output type To exit the dialog click the Close pushbutton The Point Information dialog is shown as follows Point Information Ea Point Summary Total Points Total User Defined Points Total Point Groups Point Type Number of Boolean Points Number of Integer Points Number of Real Poirits Number of Text Points I O Type Number of System Points Number of Memory Resident Points Number of Input Points Number of Output Points Number of Input Output Points Drag and Drop of Points onto Control Objects The Point Editor can be used to drag and drop points onto control objects For instance Integer point
415. tton a toggle button a slider a trend graph a rotational gauge or a linear gauge Essentially a control object can be a complex graphic object consisting of a number of primitive graphic objects which provides user interaction An advanced communications management system for OMRON PLCs providing facilities for software to maintain PLC device and address information and to communicate with OMRON PLCs and their supported network types CX Server supports CS Series PLCs A Database connection or Connection for short contains the details used to access a data source This can either be via Data Source Name DSN filename or directory A Database Connection Level is a string which determines what level in the database tree hierarchy is to be operated on Some examples are listed below Northwind Connectionlevel CSV Result Recordset level Northwind Order Details OrderID Field level Invoice Data Types Schema level A Database recordset or Recordset for short is a set of records This could either be an actual Table in the database or a table that has been generated as a consequence of running a Query A Database Schema or Schema for short obtains database schema information from a Provider A Database Server Query or Server Query for short is a query that is stored in the actual Database They are pre defined and added by the database designer which means they are fixed for the duration of a project Server Queries may
416. type of project is either chosen on creation or changed from the Target Settings dialog CX Supervisor Machine Edition For most HMI and visulisation projects These projects only require a Machine Edition USB dongle for the Runtime CX Supervisor PLUS Where features additional to the Machine Edition are required These projects require a PLUS USB dongle for the Runtime Feature ae PLUS Activex Yes Yes VBScript Yes Yes Page 88 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects Recipes Yes Yes Alarms 300 5000 Animations Yes Yes Max no Devices PLCs etc 15 256 orc Connections Yes Yes Max user defined Points 500 8000 Max Regular Interval Scripts 10 100 Max no Pages 100 500 SQL ODBC MS Access Supported Databases MS Access MS Excel dBase CSV Note Once the limits shown are reached no more of those objects can be created Note Remember that although either target can be chosen easily you must purchase the correct USB Dongle in order to run Note The CX Supervisor Runtime no longer recognises Software Tokens Hardlock parallel port dongles or USB Dongles from older versions Only USB Dongles for this version will active the Runtime Creating a Project To create a new project within CX Supervisor select New followed by either Machine Edition project or CX Supervisor PLUS project Choose a name and location Click OK to create the project Amending a Project To amend an existing project it must first be ope
417. u s Russian Slovenija Srpski and Swedish Note User defined text is specific to each application and therefore is located in the application project directory i e in the same folder as the lt project gt SCS file Release 3 0 Page 241 CHAPTER 14 Multilingual Features OMRON Note In CX Supervisor version 1 25 and earlier the user defined text was stored in files with a USL extension These files are in MBCS format For backwards compatibility if these files still exist they will be loaded as MBCS and converted to Unicode temporarily for the duration of the runtime For this conversion to succeed the operating system must be configured to support displaying and converting the original language To permanently convert a USL translation file to a Unicode format UDT file simply open the USL file in Notepad select Save As and choose Encoding Unicode and change the extension to UDT Note If both a UDT and old style USL file are present the Runtime will load and use translations from the newer UDT file Translating User Defined Text with the Translation Tool At any time during development select Translation Tool from the Tools menu A dialog similar to below will be shown CX Supervisor Translation Tool C Program Files Omron CX Supervisor Demos Comms default udt ER Fie Edit view Help Ea Ei ia De gt 3 Bit01 BitO2 and BOS These points iare connected to IROO700 Input01 InputO2 and
418. uages supported To create a new keyboard layout dD Sows l Copy the file scsdefs kbd in the installed application folder default is C Program Files Omron CX Supervisor and rename the copy with the language name e g American kbd 2 Follow the instructions at the top of the file to add each character for each key 3 Save the new keyboard layout 4 The Runtime will now automatically update the layout when the new language is selected Release 3 0 Page 249 CHAPTER 15 Application Analysis Performance Monitor OMRON CHAPTER 15 Application Analysis Performance Monitor Introduction A visualisation application should always be designed in advance with special care being taken to make best use of bandwidth This design must be closely linked with the PLC program design so the two processes complement each other Visualisation design should never be an after thought CX Supervisor comes with two utilities to help you monitor how healthy your application is while you are designing and testing it Application Analysis performs a validation of the application and checks for communications performance theoretical error conditions such as use of non existent points use of obsolete functions such as Sleep or DDE and provides an overall summary of the application In some cases it will also offer suggestions on how to resolve some of the problems found Performance Monitor works during the runtime to check t
419. und oN SS Toggle the Project Colours and 3 D Frame settings as desired If set the Project Colours field allows the colour of the axis to be changed using the Palette The 3 D Frame option enables the graph to appear with a 3 D frame Release 3 0 Page 69 CHAPTER 4 Objects Slider Page 70 OMRON Either enter an arithmetic expression for the X and Y axis or select one through the Browse pushbutton An expression point can also be associated with the Scatter Graph Wizard by dragging a point directly from the Point Editor Refer to chapter 3 Points regarding adding a new point and dragging from the Point Editor Change the fonts used for the Scatter Graph via the Font pushbutton The font size used by the graph can be automatically calculated for the user by selecting the Auto Size Font field Exit the Scatter Graph Wizard by clicking the OK pushbutton to accept the new scatter graph attributes or click the Cancel pushbutton to leave the scatter graph unchanged To configure the X axis click the X Axis pushbutton To configure the Y axis click the Y Axis pushbutton The Axis Scaling dialog is displayed Asis Tick Colour Configuration Attributes Minimum Scale Value E blasimum Scale Walue i O0 Minor Display Units Cancel Style Attributes W Display Minor Ticks W Display Major Ticks Display Minor Units W Display Major Units Keep Ticks On Asis Keep Units On Asis Display Gr
420. use in the communication between CX Supervisor and a PLC sytompoint Pontope Pomare Reman read per second since application startup SPLCBusy Boolean indicates if PLC communications are busy Indicates if Indicates if PLC communications are busy communications are busy Security Points The following table describes system points for use with user login logout and user privileges in the runtime environment SecurityLevel Current user s security level SecurityName pet ff o Current user s security name Printing Points Print Setup The Point Editor can be printed in the same way pages can Before printing ensure that the printer has been set up correctly To check the printer settings refer to chapter 2 Pages Print Preview To preview the page before printing select Print Preview from the File menu Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print Preview display Printing To print the contents of the Point Editor select the Print button from the toolbar Release 3 0 Page 53 CHAPTER 3 Points OMRON Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print dialog Embedding Point Values in Text Overview As well as using point names in expressions in many cases where text is entered this can be made dynamic by replacing a placeholder in the text with the value of a point Part or all of the text may be a point name enclosed in the Point Substitution c
421. use in the outer summary This defines the Grand Total because the parent rowset contains a single record with the grand total and a pointer to the child recordset Grouped Parent Related to Grouped Child example SHAPE SHAPE select from customers APPEND SHAPE select orders year orderdate as OrderYear month orderdate as OrderMonth from orders AS rsOrders COMPUTE rsOrders BY customerid OrderYear OrderMonth RELATE customerid TO customerid AS rsOrdByMonth AS rsCustomers COMPUTE rsCustomers BY region Page 234 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 13 Standard Web Pages CHAPTER 13 Standard Web Pages This chapter introduces CX Supervisor s Standard Web Pages and explains their function configuration and limitations Overview The standard web pages provide a web interface to a running CX Supervisor application similar to that of a network router or office printer The pages provide the ability to monitor the state of the application and view current point values alarm state and history event error log and perform basic maintenance operations E CX Supervisor Points Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help tek 7 z x EB A J Search Sp Favorites E A w rel 5 gt gt Supervisor Points Alarms Alarm Log Event Error Log Application Settings Log Out Name Yalue Altitude g Remove Fuel 91 1099999999999 Remove Lift g Remove Score O Remove Add Remove All
422. user privilege 114 Development environment user configuration 114 Keyboard 116 Login 115 Logout 116 Manager user privilege 114 Menu option access levels 117 Modify an existing user 115 Operator user privilege 114 Recipe levels 186 Remove an existing user 115 Required privilege for exit 117 Runtime 114 Runtime environment user configuration 116 Supervisor user privilege 114 User configuration development environment 114 User configuration runtime environment 116 Security Points Point Import 53 Select Manipulating Objects 76 Selecting Pages for Display on Run Project Editor 125 Setting Default language 240 Settings 103 Saving a Project 103 Settings general and runtime See Customising CX Supervisor Slider Control Objects 70 Sorting Points in the View Point Editor 36 Sorting Points in the View by I O Type Point Editor 36 Startup Preferences 33 Status Bar 20 Summary of Point Information Point Editor 37 Page 365 INDEX CX Supervisor User Manual Super Video Graphics Adapter See SVGA SVGA 356 System points 157 12Hour 50 ActiveAlarms 52 AlarmCount 52 SAMPM 50 AvailableMemory 51 Date 51 DayOfMonth 51 DayOfY ear 51 DemoMode 51 DiskSpace 51 52 HighAlarms 52 HighEtrrors 53 HighestAlarms 52 Hour 50 LowAlarms 52 LowErrors 53 LowestAlarms 52 MediumAlarms 52 Mediu
423. using the standard update rates use as few different update rates as possible ideally 5 or less different rates Try to use the same update rates for the same areas of PLC memory so optimisations can occur e Use sensible update rates Aim to keep update rates low 5 seconds or 1 second updates should suffice If faster than 1 second updates are needed always question Why If fast update rates are required pay special attention to consider if they can be disabled when not required e Use Copy Paste to Excel for bulk editing During development the point editor supports Copying and Pasting in textual format so Excel s powerful editing formulas can be used to create definitions for points This can allow thousands of consecutive points to be created in seconds e Use lt Shift gt and lt Ctrl gt to select multiple points for editing During development using lt Shift gt and lt Ctrl gt while selecting can be useful to apply the same changes to many points e Use Hungarian notation Improve readability and maintenance by defining and using a standard naming convention For example Hungarian notation where variable names are prefixed by a type character e g bMyBooleanPoint nMyIntegerNumber txtMyTextPoint or rMyReal e Use default optimisations Leave the default communications optimisations turned on In nearly all cases they really do provide the best solution Seek advice if you are considering turning them off e
424. val However transients occurring between sample periods are not recorded which depending on the application may be a benefit Scale The scale fields enable the graph upper and lower limits to be set and a scale label entered for the selected item Enter the Minimum value as the lower limit to be shown on the graph for this item Enter the Maximum value as the upper limit to be shown on the graph for this item Enter the Scale Label to be displayed This is a text field the contents of which are displayed by the Y scale of the graph The entry should be kept short but also be logical for clarification Editing Items Copy Cut Paste Options The Copy Cut and Paste options follow the windows convention and enable a selected Item to be copied or cut from one Data Set Group and then pasted into another As Item names within a Data Set must be unique when a copied Item is pasted back into the same Data Set the name is given a numerical suffix New or existing Items can be renamed and have their parameters edited by high lighting the Item and then selecting the Edit option from the popup menu When the Modify Item dialog appears edit the appropriate parameters in the normal way Adding Renaming Groups The adding or renaming of Data Set groups follows the windows convention New Groups are added by selecting the Data Set to which the group is to be added and then selecting the Add Group option from the popup menu The new Group is automatica
425. when the system is stopped If this option is not selected then logging must be controlled by the Start Stop logging script functions as required by the developer Editing Item Properties The Add Modify Item properties dialog is shown when adding a new Item or editing an existing one Release 3 0 Page 195 CHAPTER 11 Data Logging OMRON Modify Item Cancel Browse ltem Properties ltem Marne Volume Expression Water Data Type Boolean C Integer Peal Deadbard i e Sample Fate C On Change amp On Interval 5 S econdis Scale Minin yale 50 blasimum Yale fen Scale Label Litres Item Properties These options enable an items name and associated expression to be entered Its data type can be selected and if required a deadband value can be applied to the measured value The tem Name field allows the Item to be given a meaningful name The entry should be kept short but also be logical for clarification A maximum of 26 characters is allowed The Expression field defines the point name or expression that will be logged The Browse button allows easy point selection For details on how expressions or points are formulated Refer to chapter 3 Points The Data Type field determines the type of data to be logged Select either Boolean Integer or Real For points this is automatically picked up from the points database For expressions the required type must be selected
426. xport dialog which can be invoked from the CX Supervisor right menu script or the Data Log Viewer Options include the following USE GENERATED FILES If this option is checked then filenames will be automatically created otherwise a Save File As dialog will be displayed EXPORT TYPE Controls whether export should be as comma separated values files or as text ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TO EXPORT Release 3 0 Page 205 CHAPTER 11 Data Logging OMRON Controls whether breaks date time and milliseconds are exported Data Log Export x M Sron tene in dataset Zh Balloon 199902031 4 Expression Open Dataset Fuel E Lin Real Lit arpat Meta ti Burning Boolean burner O Export Data amp view Altitude Feal Altitude V Use Generated Files Additional Information to Export x Saale Tine LIL V Breaks in Data J Date J Time xport Type csi Milliseconds Generation of Comma Separated CSV Files Both the ExportLog script function and the Export Dialog use the following conventions for automatically generating comma separated values files for export All generated CSV filenames will contain at least the lt Data Set name gt lt timestamp gt and a CSV extension CSV is a format that is recognised directly by spreadsheet packages such as Excel and can therefore be opened and viewed with this application e g MyData Set1999011214 csv No characters are used in the timestamp This is
427. y Action button on the toolbar For a list of the objects to which this action is applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On selection of the Edit Point Value Text action dialog is displayed Edit Point Yalue Text Text Port Ok are ooo Runtime Display Attributes Cancel Browse Wi Caption Set Testto 00 Echo Off T Display Keyboard F In Place Edit A text point must be entered This is typed into the Text Point field A text string to use as the caption of a user dialog can be entered in the Caption field Selecting the Echo Off setting ensures that text typed at runtime appears hidden as asterisks The Display Keyboard option is useful if the runtime system does not have a keyboard i e it is controlled by a touch screen or tracker ball When a value is edited a Keyboard dialog is displayed which allows editing by clicking on screen If the In Place Edit option is checked instead of the popup editing dialog the value can be edited on the page in a standard Windows edit box Page 176 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation Enter Login Name i JE Fd J 8 VC pap 8 fp a ck i E E E ae ek io ek ck a fa An Rl Bc Pa a Pct i DO ER E Enter To abort the Edit Point Value Text edit click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid
428. y access level simply click on the Access Level field The widths of the recipe fields can be widened or narrowed as required using the mouse to drag the column boundaries Haccess Lew D Select the Large Icons button to view details with large icons 1 Select the Small Icons button to view details with normal icons e7 Select the List button to view details as a list Select the Details button to view details as a list including recipe access level and validation script The details can be sorted in ascending order by clicking once or in descending order by clicking twice in the appropriate field aj A summary of recipe information is available by selecting the Recipe Information button from the toolbar The resultant dialog shows the overall number of recipes in the project To exit the dialog click the Close pushbutton The Recipe Information dialog is shown as follows Page 180 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 10 Recipes Recipe Information Recipe Summary Total Humber of Recipes 4 Creating a New Recipe ah Open the Recipe Editor as described in chapter 10 Viewing Recipes in the Recipe Editor To add a new recipe select the Add Recipe button from the toolbar This results in the Add Recipe dialog being displayed Cancel Validation Configuration Attributes Recipe Name Coffee British Desorption Makes weak washy British style coffee E Yaldation Lode
429. ys UpEnabled O to 100 0 None None Mih Sheet SHEE SHEE Dn m sim Ready Each row is a single point and each column is a setting of that point Note Some settings may be hidden on the right Use the scrollbar to view J Edit the point details as required Note To quickly create new points with the same settings select the whole row by clicking the row number on the left A range can now be drawn to be filled by dragging the black square box on the bottom left of the range selection Page 47 CHAPTER 3 Points OMRON or id SP LA a E Arial Blio g Excel will automatically increment any data ending in a number This can be very useful for Names and PLC Addresses columns A and F but take care with other columns If other columns are wrongly incremented like PLC Name Array size and Data Range columns E G and K these can quickly be copied by selecting the correct value e g G1 then using the square box to highlight the column of data to fill To see the fill options hold down the right mouse button before draging the square box Repeat for each column 6 When editing is completed select the row s to required and select Copy 7 Switch back to the Point Editor and select Paste Note If the pasted point names already exist CX Supervisor will automatically add or increment a number on the end to prevent overwriting If you wish to overwrite to replace old point settings simple delete not
430. ysical addresses Logical point names like Boiler _3 Pressure provide more flexibility than physical addresses like D8319 allowing the PLC program and addresses to be changed without impacting the SCADA They also make it much easier read during development and more importantly during maintenance Page 278 Release 3 0 OMRON CHAPTER 19 Best Practices Tip If the Logical symbols are created in CX Programmer it can link them to a CX Server file which CX Supervisor can then Import into the Points Editor This is a very quick method of creating all the required points e Perform all data conversion in PLC ladder Although today s PCs have excellent maths performance consider the format of the PLC data and how it will be used It can be temping to scale a point value when read e g to change the units of measurement or always perform a calculation e g calculate a running average or to format it e g make 1700 become 17 00 Instead consider writing this conversion as ladder in the PLC hardware rather than in CX Supervisor software This is particularly true if this conversion has to occur on several pages where the value is used or before data logging This ensures the converted value is always available and results in a simplified solution e Perform all timing functions and pulse generation from PLC ladder The PLC hardware has far superior timing and accuracy than Windows can provide When timing a pr

CX-Supervisor User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents